2022 Chassis Cab: Owner'S Manual

2022 RAM CHASSIS CAB
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
U.S. CANADA
` `
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA 2022 CHASSIS CAB

©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. First Edition V1
OWNER’S MANUAL
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 22_DPF_OM_EN_USC
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving
itself to install them on products previously manufactured. is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
substitution therefore. while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/ This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. reference for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway transportation.
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except WARNING
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
22_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 9 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................15 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 74 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................105 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................190 5
6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................ 259 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ...................................................................................................... 311 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 328 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 397
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .................................................................................................... 409
10
11 INDEX ..............................................................................................................................................413
11
INTRODUCTION DOORS ....................................................................24 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —

Manual Door Locks ..........................................24 IF EQUIPPED .......................................................... 37
SYMBOLS KEY........................................................ 10
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ....................24 MIRRORS ............................................................... 38
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS........................... 10 Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................38
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.......... 10 (If Equipped) .....................................................25 Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped .........39
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 11 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — Outside Mirrors ................................................40
If Equipped........................................................26 Power Mirrors — If Equipped ..........................40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ..............26 Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard
KEYS ....................................................................... 15 Child-Protection Door Lock — If Equipped ......27 And Trailer Tow — If Equipped.........................41
Key Fob .............................................................15 STEERING WHEEL ..................................................27 Power Convex Mirror Switch — If Equipped....41
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 18 Tilt Steering Column.........................................27 Trailer Towing Mirrors ......................................42
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 18 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ............28 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .........................42
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................18 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped .....42
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) ... 20 IF EQUIPPED ..........................................................28 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature .....................43
How To Use Remote Start................................20 Introducing Voice Recognition.........................28 UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
To Exit Remote Start Mode..............................21 Basic Voice Commands ...................................28 (HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED S ...................... 43
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — Get Started .......................................................29 Before You Begin Programming
If Equipped........................................................21 Additional Information .....................................29 HomeLink® ......................................................43
Remote Start Comfort Systems — DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED.....29 Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels............44
If Equipped........................................................21 Programming The Memory Feature ................30 Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device...................44
Activation — If Equipped ..................................21 Entry Key Fob To Memory................................30 Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Remote Start Abort Message ..........................22 Memory Position Recall ...................................30 Door Opener .....................................................44
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) .......... 22 SEATS .....................................................................31 Programming HomeLink® To A
How To Use Remote Start................................22 Manual Front Seat Adjustment .......................31 Miscellaneous Device......................................45
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .... 23 Power Driver Seat Adjustment — Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
To Arm The System ..........................................23 If Equipped........................................................32 Button ...............................................................45
To Disarm The System .....................................23 Heated Seats — If Equipped ............................33 Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........45
Rearming Of The System .................................23 Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......................34 Security .............................................................46
Security System Manual Override ...................23 Head Restraints ..............................................35 Troubleshooting Tips........................................46
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 47 CLIMATE CONTROLS .............................................54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR

Headlight Switch...............................................47 Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And INSTRUMENT PANEL
Multifunction Lever ..........................................47 Functions ..........................................................54
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) ......................48 Manual Climate Control Descriptions And BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
High/Low Beam Switch....................................48 Functions ..........................................................58 GASOLINE ............................................................... 74
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ............60 Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
If Equipped........................................................48 Climate Voice Recognition — If Equipped .......60 Descriptions......................................................75
Flash-To-Pass....................................................48 Operating Tips .................................................60 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..............48 INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ...............61 GASOLINE ............................................................... 76
Directional LED Headlamp System — Storage..............................................................61 Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions.....77
If Equipped........................................................49 USB/AUX Control..............................................66 BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
Parking Lights ...................................................49 Electrical Power Outlets...................................68 DIESEL .................................................................... 78
Headlights On With Wipers..............................49 Power Inverter — If Equipped ..........................69 Diesel Instrument Cluster ...............................79
Headlight Delay ................................................49 Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ............70 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ... 80
Lights-On Reminder..........................................49 WINDOWS ..............................................................71 Diesel Instrument Cluster ...............................81
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .......................50 Power Windows — If Equipped ........................71 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........................ 81
Turn Signals .....................................................50 Automatic Window Features — If Equipped....71 Instrument Cluster Display And Controls........82
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................50 Reset Auto-Up ..................................................72 Oil Life Reset ...................................................82
Cargo Lights/Trailer Spotter Lights — Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped ...........72 Display Menu Items .........................................83
If Equipped........................................................50 Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped ....72 Diesel Messages And Warnings......................90
Battery Saver ....................................................51 Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped...72 Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................. 51 Wind Buffeting .................................................72 Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Courtesy Lights .................................................51 HOOD .......................................................................73 Actions — If Equipped ......................................93
Illuminated Entry .............................................52 To Open The Hood ...........................................73 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................... 94
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............. 53 To Close The Hood ...........................................73 Red Warning Lights..........................................94
Windshield Wiper Operation ...........................53 Yellow Warning Lights......................................97
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...............54 Yellow Indicator Lights.................................. 100
Green Indicator Lights .................................. 101
White Indicator Lights................................... 102
Blue Indicator Lights ..................................... 103
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ......103 NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE......... 113 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cold Weather Precautions............................ 114 IF EQUIPPED ........................................................132
Cybersecurity ................................................. 103 Engine Idling ................................................. 115 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Noise .............................................................. 116 (8-Speed Transmission) — If Equipped ....... 132
PROGRAMS ..........................................................104 Stopping The Engine ..................................... 116 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
Idle Shutdown................................................ 117 (6-Speed Transmission) — If Equipped........ 135
STARTING AND OPERATING Programmable Maximum Vehicle Speed .... 117 Manually Shifted Transfer Case —
Operating Precautions .................................. 117 If Equipped .................................................... 138
STARTING THE ENGINE— GASOLINE ENGINE ..105
Cooling System Tips...................................... 117 LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL ............................139
Automatic Transmission ............................... 105
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Manual POWER TAKE OFF (PTO) OPERATION —
AutoPark — Rotary Shifter and 8-Speed
Regeneration — If Equipped ......................... 118 IF EQUIPPED ........................................................140
Transmission Only ......................................... 105
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ......... 118 HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING.........................140
Tip Start Feature ........................................... 107
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — Power Steering Fluid Check ......................... 140
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition................... 107
Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/ GASOLINE ENGINE ............................................. 118 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
STOP Button .................................................. 107 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — IF EQUIPPED ........................................................141
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or DIESEL ENGINE.................................................... 119 Cruise Control ............................................... 141
−30°C) .......................................................... 108 PARKING BRAKE ................................................ 119 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ...................... 143
After Starting.................................................. 108 DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE (ENGINE PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST —
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE.......108 BRAKING) ............................................................ 120 IF EQUIPPED.........................................................151
Automatic Transmission ............................... 109 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............................. 121 ParkSense Sensors....................................... 152
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition................... 109 Ignition Park Interlock................................... 122 ParkSense Warning Display ......................... 152
Extreme Cold Weather .................................. 110 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) ParkSense Display ........................................ 152
Normal Starting Procedure — Engine System .......................................................... 122 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.............. 155
Manifold Air Temperature Above 66°F (19°C).. 8-Speed Automatic Transmission — Service The ParkSense Park Assist
111 If Equipped .................................................... 122 System ........................................................... 155
Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air 6-Speed Automatic Transmission — Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 155
Temperature 0°F To 66°F (–18°C to If Equipped .................................................... 126 ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 155
19°C) ............................................................. 111 AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED............. 131
Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air
Temperature Below 0°F (-18°C) ................. 112
Starting Fluids ............................................... 113
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............................156 TRAILER TOWING................................................ 173 MULTIMEDIA

LaneSense Operation ................................... 156 Common Towing Definitions......................... 173
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .........................................190
Turning LaneSense On Or Off....................... 157 Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer
CYBERSECURITY .................................................190
LaneSense Warning Message...................... 157 Weight ............................................................ 176
UCONNECT SETTINGS .........................................191
Changing LaneSense Status ........................ 158 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...............159 Weight Ratings) ............................................. 176 Customer Programmable Features ............. 191
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................... 177 UCONNECT INTRODUCTION................................211
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
Towing Requirements .................................. 177 System Overview .......................................... 211
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................161
Towing Tips ................................................... 182 Safety And General Information................... 213
TRAILER CAMERAS — IF EQUIPPED..................165
SNOWPLOW — IF EQUIPPED ............................. 183 UCONNECT MODES .............................................213
Trailer Surround View Camera System —
Before Plowing............................................... 183 Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................... 213
If Equipped..................................................... 165
Snowplow Prep Package Model Radio Mode .................................................. 214
AUX Camera — If Equipped .......................... 168
Availability...................................................... 183 Media Mode ................................................. 221
ENGINE RUNAWAY ..............................................168
Over The Road Operation With Snowplow Phone Mode ................................................. 223
REFUELING THE VEHICLE— GASOLINE CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
ENGINE .................................................................169 Attached......................................................... 184
Operating Tips ............................................... 184 IF EQUIPPED ........................................................233
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .................... 169 Is My Vehicle Connected? ............................ 233
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE ..169 General Maintenance ................................... 184
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND Introduction To Connected Vehicle
Diesel Exhaust Fluid...................................... 170 Services ........................................................ 233
VEHICLE LOADING ...............................................172 MOTORHOME) .................................................... 185
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......... 172 Services ........................................................ 235
Payload .......................................................... 172 Vehicle ........................................................... 185
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Using SiriusXM Guardian™ .......................... 236
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)................ 172 Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™ Account .. 247
Tire Size.......................................................... 172 Models ........................................................... 185
Rim Size ......................................................... 172 Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Inflation Pressure .......................................... 172 Models ........................................................... 186
Curb Weight ................................................... 172 DRIVING TIPS....................................................... 188
Loading .......................................................... 173 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................... 188
Driving Through Water ................................. 189
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS ...........................247 SAFETY IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Connected Services SOS FAQs — SAFETY FEATURES.............................................. 259 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .........................311
If Equipped .................................................... 248
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 259 ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ......312
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 260 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................315
Unlock FAQs .................................................. 248
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................... 266 4500/5500 Models...................................... 315
Connected Services Roadside Assistance
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Preparations For Jacking .............................. 316
FAQs .............................................................. 248
Mitigation — If Equipped ............................... 266 Jacking Instructions 4500 And 5500
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs —
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .... 268 Series ............................................................. 316
If Equipped .................................................... 248
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................... 275 To Stow The Flat Or Spare — If Equipped ... 318
Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs ... 249
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 275 Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped....... 318
Assistance FAQs — If Equipped ................... 249 Important Safety Precautions ...................... 276 JUMP STARTING .................................................319
Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 276 Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 320
FAQs .............................................................. 249 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 284 Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 320
Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights Child Restraints............................................. 291 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...........................322
FAQs ............................................................... 250 SAFETY TIPS ........................................................ 307 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............................322
Connected Services Account FAQs — Transporting Passengers.............................. 307 6–Speed Transmission ................................ 322
If Equipped..................................................... 250 Transporting Pets .......................................... 307 MANUAL PARK RELEASE ...................................323
Data Collection & Privacy.............................. 252 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside 8–Speed Transmission................................. 323
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES......252 The Vehicle ................................................... 307 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................324
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 252 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE..........................325
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ....................253 Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 309 Two-Wheel Drive Models .............................. 326
Exhaust Gas .................................................. 309 Four-Wheel Drive Models ............................. 326
Off-Road Pages Status Bar ........................... 254
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......................... 310 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped.......... 327
Vehicle Dynamics .......................................... 255
Accessory Gauge ........................................... 256 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
Pitch & Roll .................................................... 257 (EARS) ..................................................................327
Suspension .................................................... 258 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................327
Forward Facing Camera................................ 258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Intervention Regeneration Strategy — STORING THE VEHICLE .......................................393
Message Process Flow ................................ 350 BODYWORK..........................................................393
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ........................... 351 Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 393
ENGINE..................................................................328
Body Lubrication ........................................... 351 Body And Underbody Maintenance ............. 394
Maintenance Plan – Gasoline Engine.......... 329 Windshield Wiper Blades.............................. 351 Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 394
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE ....332 Exhaust System ............................................ 353 INTERIORS ...........................................................395
Oil Change Indicator System — Diesel Cooling System ............................................. 354 Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 395
Engine ............................................................ 332 Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler ................. 357 Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 395
Perform Service Indicator — Diesel Brake System ............................................... 358 Leather Surfaces........................................... 396
Engine ............................................................ 333 Automatic Transmission ............................... 358 Glass Surfaces ............................................. 396
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Engine ............. 334 Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................338 Level .............................................................. 360 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.4L Gasoline Engine ................................... 338 Transfer Case ............................................... 361
6.7L Diesel Engine ........................................ 339 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) .......397
Noise Control System Required
Checking Oil Level ......................................... 340 BRAKE SYSTEM ..................................................397
Maintenance & Warranty ............................. 361
Adding Washer Fluid ..................................... 340 Fuses.............................................................. 364 Hydraulic Brake Assist — If Equipped .......... 397
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 340 Bulb Replacement......................................... 371 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ..397
Pressure Washing ......................................... 341 TIRES..................................................................... 376 Torque Specifications ................................... 397
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ....................................341 Tire Safety Information ................................. 376 FUEL REQUIREMENTS— GASOLINE ENGINE ....399
Engine Oil ...................................................... 341 Tires — General Information ......................... 383 6.4L Engine ................................................... 399
Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 342 Tire Types....................................................... 386 Reformulated Gasoline................................. 399
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................... 342 Spare Tires — If Equipped............................. 387 Materials Added To Fuel............................... 399
Air Conditioner Maintenance........................ 344 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care......................... 389 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................... 399
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ................... 346 Snow Traction Devices ................................. 390 Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter .......... 347 Tire Rotation Recommendations ................. 391 Vehicles ......................................................... 400
Engine Mounted Fuel Filter Replacement ... 348 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 400
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ................... 392 Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Replacement ................................................. 349 Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ..................... 400
Treadwear...................................................... 392
Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel System Cautions ................................... 400
Traction Grades............................................. 393
Fuel ................................................................ 350 Temperature Grades..................................... 393
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE .........401 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 409 MOPAR® PARTS .................................................411
Fuel Specifications ....................................... 401 FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 409 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................411
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements ....................... 401 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 409 In The 50 United States And
FLUID CAPACITIES ..............................................403 Mexico............................................................ 410 Washington, D.C............................................ 411
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ..................404 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands................ 410 In Canada ...................................................... 411
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .................407 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................411
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)......................... 410 GENERAL INFORMATION....................................412
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE Service Contract ........................................... 410
WARRANTY INFORMATION ............................... 410
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ....................................................409
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 409
Prepare A List ................................................ 409
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 409
INTRODUCTION
1
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers
differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version
of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering,
transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving
off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial
and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 188.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For
this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized
dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your
satisfaction.
10
SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

These statements are against operating The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
WARNING! procedures that could result in a collision, bodily special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body
injury and/or death. builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C.
Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty
These statements are against procedures that
CAUTION! Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/Blu-Ray™,
could result in damage to your vehicle.
heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these
A suggestion which will improve installation, items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
NOTE: operation, and reliability. If not followed, may result
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/
in damage.
camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle. For any
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier additional instructions, please contact your conversion/camper manufacturer.
TIP:
use of the product or functionality.
To obtain dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle, refer to the
PAGE REFERENCE Body Builder’s Guide at https://www.ramtrucks.com/ram-commercial/
ARROW body-builders-guide.html.
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
pertaining to the topic. roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
11
SYMBOL GLOSSARY Red Warning Lights

Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light 1
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of Ú page 97
each symbol Ú page 94.
NOTE: Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and Ú page 96
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights Hood Open Warning Light

Ú page 95
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 95 Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 96
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 96 Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 96
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 95 Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 94
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 97 Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
Ú page 97
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 96 Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 97
12
Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights
Vehicle Security Warning Light LaneSense Warning Light

Ú page 96 Ú page 98
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light

Yellow Warning Lights Ú page 98
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light

Ú page 97 Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 99
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

Ú page 100 Low Coolant Level Warning Light
Ú page 99
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light

Ú page 100 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
Ú page 99
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)

Ú page 97 Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 100
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light

Ú page 98 Service LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 100
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light Service 4WD Warning Light
13
Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Indicator Lights
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light 4WD Lock Indicator Light 1
4WD Low Indicator Light

Yellow Indicator Lights Ú page 101
Cargo Light
Ú page 100 4WD High Indicator Light
Ú page 101
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator Light

Ú page 101 Snowplow Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 101
Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light

Ú page 101 TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Ú page 100
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off Indicator Light

Ú page 100 Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light
Ú page 100
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator Light

Ú page 101 Wait To Start Light
Ú page 101
NEUTRAL Indicator Light

Ú page 101 Water In Fuel Indicator Light
Ú page 101
14
Green Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected

Indicator Light
White Indicator Lights
Ú page 101
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light
Ú page 102
Ú page 102
Cruise Control Ready Indicator

Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 102
Ú page 102
LaneSense Indicator Light

ECO Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 102
Ú page 102
Set Speed Display

Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 102
Ú page 102
LaneSense Indicator Light Blue Indicator Lights

Ú page 102
High Beam Indicator Light
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light Ú page 103
Ú page 102
15
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
KEY F OB fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be 2
verified by referring to the instrument cluster,
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which which will display directions to follow Ú page 412.
supports Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) (if equipped)
and Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped).
To Lock/Unlock The Doors
If the vehicle is equipped with remote power door
If the vehicle is equipped with remote power door
locks, push and release the unlock button on the
locks, the key fob allows you to lock or unlock all
key fob once to unlock the driver’s door. Push the
doors, as well as activate the Panic Alarm, from
unlock button twice within five seconds to unlock
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The
all doors. If the vehicle is equipped with remote
key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle
power door locks, push and release the lock button
to activate the system.
on the key fob to lock all doors.
NOTE:
Key Fob When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
 The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if flash and the Illuminated Entry system will be
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, 1 — Unlock activated. When the doors are locked, the turn
laptop, or other electronic device. This may 2 — Lock signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
result in poor performance. 3 — Remote Start All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
 The key fob should not be placed next to the 4 — PANIC push of the unlock button. The horn chirp when the
wireless charging pad (if equipped). 5 — Emergency Key lock button is pushed can be programmed on/off
 In the ON/RUN position, all key fob buttons will within Uconnect Settings Ú page 191.
work until the vehicle reaches 2 mph (4 km/h).
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Key Left Vehicle Feature  Perchlorate Material — special handling may 2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ down, and locate the small rectangular gap on
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the
perchlorate for further information. the left side between the housing and the back
vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the
 Do not touch the battery terminals that are on cover of the key fob. Use a small screwdriver
ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key Left
the back housing or the printed circuit board. (or similar tool) to pry open the left side of the
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster
fob cover while applying pressure until the
display along with an interior chime. An exterior 1. Remove the emergency key (1) by pushing cover snaps open.
audible and visual alert will also be activated to and holding the release button (2) located on
warn the driver. the side of the key fob while pulling the 3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key
emergency key out with your other hand. fob, which is positioned further to the edge
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times
than the left side gap. Pry open the right side,
along with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior
and remove the back cover.
lights.
4. Remove the battery by using a suitable tool,
NOTE:
such as a screwdriver, to slide the battery
 The doors have to be open and then closed in downward and back toward the key ring.
order for the vehicle to check for the presence of
a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not
activate until all of the doors are closed.
 These alerts will not be activated in situations
where the vehicle’s engine is left running with
the key fob inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob Emergency Key Removal
The replacement battery model is one CR2032 1 — Emergency Key
battery. 2 — Emergency Key Release Button
NOTE:
 Customers are recommended to use a battery Key Fob Battery Location
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE: 7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks into Programming And Requesting Additional
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on place. Key Fobs
the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause NOTE: Programming the key fob may be performed by an
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean The key fob battery should only be replaced by authorized dealer.
it with rubbing alcohol. qualified technicians. If the battery requires NOTE: 2
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to replacement, see an authorized dealer.  Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
push down and slide the battery under the cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
WARNING!
small lip on the top edge of the opening. another vehicle.
 The integrated key fob contains a coin cell  Only key fobs that are programmed to the
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a vehicle electronics can be used to start and
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
in just two hours and can lead to death. programmed to any other vehicle.
 If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body, WARNING!
seek immediate medical attention.  Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
 Keep new and used batteries away from chil- and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
dren. If the battery compartment does not unattended.
Key Fob Battery Replacement close securely, stop using the product and  Always remember to place the Keyless
keep it away from children. Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the OFF position.
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top
edge of the back cover with the top of the fob,
and press the edges into the interlocking Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
hinges until all edges snap together with no authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
large visual gaps. programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never
been programmed.
NOTE: with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start will illuminate when in position. The three positions
 When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system and shut off after two seconds. are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal START. During START, RUN will illuminate.
authorized dealer. vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than NOTE:
 Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the In case the ignition switch does not change with
match the vehicle locks. electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
SENTRY KEY dealer. method can be used to operate the ignition switch.
Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents CAUTION! key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the ignition button, with your foot applied on the brake
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
engine. The system does not need to be armed or pedal, and push to operate the ignition switch.
compatible with some aftermarket Remote Start
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
systems. Use of these systems may result in
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
vehicle starting problems and loss of security
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button protection.
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The have been programmed to the vehicle electronics
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from Ú page 412.
another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
IGNITION SWITCH
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on Keyless Push Button Ignition
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a This feature allows the driver to operate the 1 — OFF
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
2 — ACC (Accessory)
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates the Remote Keyless Entry key fob is in the
that someone attempted to start the engine with passenger compartment. 3 — ON/RUN
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four
is used to start the engine but there is an issue operating positions; three of which are labeled and
The push button ignition can be placed in the Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency
following modes: WARNING! key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
OFF  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended ignition button and push to operate the ignition
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child switch.
 The engine is stopped.
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
 Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, Children should be warned not to touch the 2
alarm, etc.) are still available. parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
ACC selector.
 Engine is not started.  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
 Some electrical devices are available (e.g. or in a location accessible to children, and do
power windows, etc.). not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ON/RUN position. A child could operate
RUN power windows, other controls, or move the
 Driving position. vehicle.
 All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate  Do not leave children or animals inside parked Back Up Starting Method
controls, heated seats, etc.). vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
START may cause serious injury or death. NOTE:
 The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
 The engine will start.
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next
WARNING! CAUTION! to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
 When exiting the vehicle, always remove the An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
wireless signal and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
Go™ system from starting the vehicle.
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with  For more information on the engine starting
access to an unlocked vehicle. procedure, see Ú page 105.
In case the ignition switch does not change with
(Continued) the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED HOW TO USE R EMOTE S TART  The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
(GASOLINE) Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The parking
repeated for a third cycle.
This system uses the key fob to start the  If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote
lights will flash, vehicle doors will lock, and the
engine conveniently from outside the Start will automatically lock the doors.
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the
vehicle while still maintaining security. vehicle has started, the engine will run for All of the following conditions must be met before
The system has a range of approximately 15 minutes. the engine will remote start:
300 ft (91 m).  Gear selector in PARK
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold the engine off.  Doors closed
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and  Hood closed
ambient conditions before the driver enters the
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
vehicle.  Hazard switch off
NOTE:
NOTE:  Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob  With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
 Battery at an acceptable charge level
may reduce this range Ú page 412. 15 minutes.
 PANIC button not pushed
 Remote Start can only be used twice.
WARNING!  Fuel meets minimum requirement
 If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed the vehicle will start and then shut down in  System not disabled from previous Remote
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains 10 seconds. Start event
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and  The parking lights will turn on and remain on  Vehicle Security system not active
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and during Remote Start mode.  Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illumi-
can cause serious injury or death when
 For security, power window operation is nated
inhaled.
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
 Keep key fobs away from children. Operation mode.
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
TO EXIT R EMOTE START MODE system will automatically adjust the settings cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next  In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
system, push and release the START/STOP ignition section for detailed operation. 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
button while pressing the brake pedal prior to the
REMOTE START C OMFORT SYSTEMS — on the last settings selected by the driver.
end of the 15 minute cycle.
 In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
2
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if I F E QUIPPED
above, the climate settings will default to MAX
the Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation on.
again, or if the engine is allowed to run for the
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather. For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed
The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat control settings, see Ú page 54.
in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will
feature will turn on if programmed in the comfort
resume the previously set operations NOTE:
menu screen within Uconnect Settings
(temperature, blower control, etc.). These features will stay on through the duration of
Ú page 191. In warm weather, the driver vented
NOTE: seat feature will automatically turn on when Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
 For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Remote Start is activated, if programmed in the ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the message comfort menu screen. The vehicle will adjust the change, and exit the automatic defaults, if
“Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will climate control settings depending on the outside manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is
display in the instrument cluster display until ambient temperature. in Remote Start mode. This includes turning the
you push the START/STOP ignition button. climate controls off using the OFF button.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
 To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system If Equipped REMOTE START WINDSHIELD W IPER
will disable for two seconds after receiving a The climate controls automatically adjust to an DE–ICER A CTIVATION — I F EQUIPPED
valid Remote Start request. optimal temperature and mode, dependent on the
outside ambient temperature. When the ignition is When Remote Start is active and the outside
REMOTE START F RONT DEFROST placed in the ON/RUN position, the climate ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED controls will resume their previous settings. the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
When Remote Start is active, and the outside Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the  In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or and operation will continue.
system will automatically activate front defrost for below, the climate settings will default to
15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the
REMOTE START A BORT M ESSAGE NOTE:  Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
 Obstructions between the vehicle and the key  Battery at an acceptable charge level
The following messages will display in the
fob may reduce this range.  PANIC button not pushed
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits Remote Start prematurely:  The Remote Start system will wait for the Wait  Fuel meets minimum requirement
To Start Light Ú page 101 to extinguish before
 Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open  Water In Fuel Indicator Light is not illuminated
cranking the engine. This allows time for the
 Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open intake heater to preheat the incoming air, and is  Wait To Start Light is not illuminated
 Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low normal operation in cold weather Ú page 412.  Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illumi-
 Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault HOW TO USE R EMOTE S TART nated
 Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset For additional functions of the Remote Start
Push and release the Remote Start button on the system, see Ú page 21
The instrument cluster display message stays key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the WARNING!
position. horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the  Do not start or run an engine in a closed
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
This system uses the key fob to start the Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
engine conveniently from outside the the engine off.
can cause serious injury or death when
vehicle while still maintaining security. To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and inhaled.
The system has a range of approximately place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
300 ft (91 m).  Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
All of the following conditions must be met before of the Remote Start system, windows, door
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold the engine will remote start: locks or other controls could cause serious
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
 Gear selector in PARK injury or death.
ambient conditions before the driver enters the
vehicle.  Doors closed
 Hood closed
 Hazard switch off
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED  Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle able in the same exterior zone Ú page 25. where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
doors and ignition for unauthorized operation. of the previously described arming sequences has
 Push the lock button on the key fob.
When the Vehicle Security system is activated, occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm
interior switches for door locks are disabled. If 3. If any doors are open, close them. regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. 2
something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
system will provide the following audible and The Vehicle Security system will set when you use
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
visible signals: the power door locks, or use the key fob to lock the
Security system.
doors. After all the doors are locked and closed,
 The horn will pulse the Vehicle Security Light, in the instrument panel If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
 The turn signals will flash cluster, will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm Security system will remain armed when the
 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
is set, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash,
cluster will flash
slower rate to indicate that the system is armed. and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
TO ARM THE SYSTEM Vehicle Security system.
TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security REARMING O F T HE SYSTEM
system: The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
any of the following methods: If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will
the OFF position. 1. Push the unlock button on the key fob.
turn the horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five
 For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
2. Grab the Passive Entry door handle with a valid seconds between cycles and up to eight cycles if
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the Passive Entry the trigger remains active), and then rearm itself.
system is OFF. door handle (if equipped) Ú page 25.
3. Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position.
SECURITY S YSTEM MANUAL O VERRIDE
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle: The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock
the doors using the manual door lock.
 Push the lock button on the interior power
door lock switch with the driver and/or
passenger door open.
DOORS WARNING! WARNING!

MANUAL D OOR L OCKS  Do not leave children or animals inside parked  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup or in a location accessible to children, and do
The power door locks can be manually locked from may cause serious injury or death. not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
lock each door, push the door lock knob on each  For personal security and safety in the event
operate power windows, other controls, or
door trim panel downward. To unlock the front of an collision, lock the vehicle doors as you
move the vehicle.
doors, pull the inside door handle to the first drive as well as when you park and leave the
detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock vehicle.
knob on the door trim panel upward. If the lock  Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the auto- POWER D OOR L OCKS — IF EQUIPPED
knob is down when the door is closed, the door will matic transmission into PARK, apply the The power door lock switches are located on each
lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock
the vehicle before closing the door. the key fobs from vehicle, and lock all doors. the doors.
and lock your vehicle.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
Door Lock Knob or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Power Door Lock Switches
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
(Continued)
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the  If wearing gloves or if it has been raining/
keys are detected inside the vehicle when the door snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
lock button on the front door panel is used to lock unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a
the door. This will occur for two attempts. Upon the slower response time.
third attempt, the doors will lock even if the key is  If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
inside. no door is opened within 60 seconds, the 2
NOTE: vehicle will relock and if equipped will arm the
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, security alarm.
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless  The Vehicle Security system can be armed/
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door may disarmed by pushing the Passive Entry key fob
not unlock automatically. lock/unlock buttons (if equipped). Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition  The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle NOTE:
is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's door is open, Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
the doors will not lock.  Either the driver’s door only or all doors will
mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — these devices may block the key fob's wireless door handle, depending on the selected setting
signal and prevent the Passive Entry door in the Uconnect system Ú page 191.
P ASSIVE E NTRY (IF EQUIPPED) handle from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
 All doors will unlock when the front passenger
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to To Unlock From The Driver or Passenger Side: door handle is grabbed regardless of the
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft driver’s door unlock preference setting.
feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™. This feature (1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door Key Fob In Vehicle:
without having to push the key fob lock or unlock handle will unlock the driver’s door automatically.
buttons. Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock all To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
NOTE: doors automatically. The interior door panel lock locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle,
knob will raise when the door is unlocked. the Passive Entry system is equipped with an
 Passive Entry may be programmed on/off within
automatic door unlock feature which will function if
Uconnect Settings Ú page 191. the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door
panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all
open doors have been closed the vehicle checks
the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid AUTOMATIC UNLOCK D OORS ON E XIT —
Passive Entry key fobs. If one of the vehicle's
Passive Entry key fobs is detected inside the I F E QUIPPED
vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry key fobs The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry with power door locks after the following sequence
system automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and of actions:
chirps the horn three times (on the third attempt
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry key fob
enabled.
can be locked in the vehicle).
2. All doors are closed.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking 3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
placed in PARK.
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front NOTE:
door handles, push the door handle lock button to 4. Any door is opened.
 After pushing the door handle lock button, you
lock all doors.
must wait two seconds before you can lock or AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to check I F E QUIPPED
if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door The auto door lock feature default condition is
handle, without the vehicle unlocking. enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
 The Passive Entry system depends on a key fob automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
that is not fully discharged of its coin battery 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature is
capacity. enabled/disabled in the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 191.
 When the key fob battery is low, the instrument
cluster will display a message indicating that the
key fob battery is low Ú page 15.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the key fob lock button or the lock button located on
door handle lock button. This could unlock the the vehicle’s interior door panel Ú page 412.
door(s).
CHILD-P ROTECTION DOOR LOCK — WARNING!

I F EQUIPPED Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a
To provide a safer environment for children riding collision. Remember that the rear doors cannot
in the rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your be opened from the inside door handle when the
vehicle have the Child-Protection Door Lock Child Protection Door Locks are engaged. 2
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat NOTE:
blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate  After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock
the dial to engage and disengage the system, always test the door from the inside to
Child-Protection locks. When the system on a door Tilt Steering Lever
make certain it is in the desired position.
is engaged, that door can only be opened by using
the outside door handle even if the inside door lock  For emergency exit with the system engaged,
WARNING!
is in the unlocked position. move the door lock switch to the unlock posi-
tion, roll down the window, and open the door Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
with the outside door handle. Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
STEERING WHEEL cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
TILT STEERING COLUMN serious injury or death.
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column

upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on
the steering column, below the multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock
the steering column. With one hand firmly on the
Child Lock Control
steering wheel, move the steering column up or
down, as desired. Release the lever to lock the
steering column firmly in place.
HEATED S TEERING WHEEL — WARNING!

I F EQUIPPED  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
The steering wheel contains a heating skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
element that helps warm your hands in diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
cold weather. The heated steering wheel alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
has only one temperature setting. Once conditions must exercise care when using the
the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
will stay on until the operator turns it off. The even at low temperatures, especially if used
heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is for long periods.
already warm. Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
 Do not place anything on the steering wheel
The heated steering wheel control button is that insulates against heat, such as a blanket If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the
located on the center instrument panel below the or steering wheel covers of any type or mate- Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you
touchscreen, as well as within the climate or rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater have the Uconnect 5 NAV system. If not, you have
controls screen of the touchscreen. to overheat. a Uconnect 5 with 8.4-inch display system.
 Push the heated steering wheel button once to
turn the heating element on. BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
 Push the heated steering wheel button a second
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — The basic Voice Commands below can be given at
time to turn the heating element off. IF EQUIPPED any point while using your Uconnect system.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
I NTRODUCING V OICE RECOGNITION Push the VR button or for the Uconnect 5/5 NAV,
say the vehicle’s Wake Up word, “Hey Uconnect”.
steering wheel to operate. Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these After the beep, say:
For information on use with the Remote Start helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
 “Cancel” to stop a current voice session
system, see Ú page 21. Commands and tips you need to know to control
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.  “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
 “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the
touchscreen. © 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
NOTE: Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
On Uconnect 5 systems, the factory default Wake SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
Up word is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be repro- 2
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 412.
grammed through the Uconnect Settings.
For Uconnect system support, call
GET S TARTED 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
All you need to control your Uconnect system with
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition: 1 — For The Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display: Push
The Voice Recognition Button To Start A Phone
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
 Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger
Call, Begin Radio, Media, And Climate Functions, This feature allows the driver to save up to two
conversations are examples of noise that may
Or Send Or Receive A Text different memory profiles for easy recall through a
impact recognition.
1 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles memory switch. Each memory profile saves
 Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume desired position settings for the following features:
while facing straight ahead. Equipped With Navigation: Push The Voice
Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Media,  Driver seat position
 Each time you give a Voice Command, first push
Navigation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call,  Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (if equipped)
the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say
And Send Or Receive A Text  Side mirrors
your Voice Command. You can also say the
1 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles
vehicle “Wake Up” word and state your  Adjustable pedals (if equipped)
command. Some examples of “Wake up” words Not Equipped With Navigation: Push The Phone
Button To Answer An Incoming Phone Call  A set of desired radio station presets
include “Hey Uconnect” or “Hey Ram”.
2 — Push To Answer A Phone Call NOTE:
 A passenger can press the VR button shortcut
on the radio status bar to also issue a  If equipped with power convex mirrors, these
command. mirror positions will not set as part of a memory
profile.
 You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a  Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each
Voice Command from the current category. can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
The driver memory settings switch is located on the 3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch, 5. Push and release the lock button on the key
driver door, next to the door handle, and consists and then push the desired memory button (1 fob within 10 seconds.
of three buttons: or 2) within five seconds. The instrument
 The set (S) button, which is used to activate the cluster display will display which memory NOTE:
memory save function. position has been set. Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within
 The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall NOTE: 10 seconds, pushing the unlock button on the key
either of two saved memory profiles. Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in fob.
PARK.
MEMORY POSITION R ECALL
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE
NOTE:
KEYLESS ENTRY KEY F OB T O M EMORY The vehicle speed must be lower than 5 mph
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of (8 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall is
two saved memory profiles. attempted when the vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), a message will be displayed in the
NOTE: instrument cluster display.
Before programming your key fob you must select
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature
push the desired memory button number (1 or 2)
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 191.
or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the
Driver Memory Settings Buttons To program your key fob, perform the following: desired memory position.
PROGRAMMING T HE M EMORY FEATURE 1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
position. memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When
To create a new memory profile, perform the
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2. a recall is canceled, the driver's seat and the
following:
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and adjustable pedals (if equipped) stop moving. A
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN delay of one second will occur before another
release the set (S) button on the memory
position (do not start the engine). recall can be selected.
switch.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors,
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
adjustable pedals (if equipped), and radio
instrument cluster.
station presets).
SEATS Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment

The recline lever is located on the outboard side of
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly,
of the vehicle.
lift the lever, lean back to the desired position and
WARNING! release the lever. To return the seatback to its
normal upright position, lean forward and lift the 2
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside lever. Release the lever once the seatback is in the
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people upright position.
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Manual Seat Adjustment Bar
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or once you have reached the desired position. Then,
killed. using body pressure, move forward and rearward
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
and using a seat belt properly. latched.
WARNING!
MANUAL F RONT S EAT ADJUSTMENT Manual Recline Lever
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could WARNING!
result in loss of control which could cause a
Adjustment  Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
collision and serious injury or death.
Both front seats are adjustable forward or actuating the handle. The seatback may swing
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is  Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
forward and hit you causing injury.
located under the seat cushion at the front edge of seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a  To avoid injury, place your hand on the seat-
each seat.
poorly adjusted seat belt. back and actuate the handle, then position
the seatback in the desired position.
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
WARNING!
The seat is divided into three segments. The The seat can be adjusted both forward and
outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total rearward by using the power seat switch. The seat  Adjusting a seat while driving may be
width of the seat. On some models, the back of the will move in the direction of the switch. Release the dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
center portion (20%) easily folds down to provide switch when the desired position has been result in loss of control which could cause a
an armrest/center storage compartment. reached. collision and serious injury or death.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down  Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
POWER D RIVER SEAT ADJUSTMENT — seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
I F EQUIPPED The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Serious injury or death could result from a
by using the power seat switch. The seat will move poorly adjusted seat belt.
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
power driver's seat. The power seat switches are when the desired position has been reached.  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
located on the outboard side of the driver's seat the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
cushion. There are two power seat switches that Tilting The Seat Up Or Down your chest. In a collision you could slide under
are used to control the movement of the seat The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up the seat belt, which could result in serious
cushion and the seatback. or down using the power seat switch. The front of injury or death.
the seat cushion will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached. CAUTION!
Reclining The Seatback Do not place any article under a power seat or
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward impede its ability to move as it may cause
or rearward by using the power seat switch. The damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
seat will move in the direction of the switch. become limited if movement is stopped by an
Release the switch when the desired position is obstruction in the seat’s path.
reached.
Power Seat Switches

1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
Power Lumbar — If Equipped  When you place the ignition in the OFF position, HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED
the driver’s seat will move about 2.4 inches
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger On some models, the front and rear seats may be
(60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat position is
seats may also be equipped with power lumbar. equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions
greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm)
The power lumbar switch is located on the and seatbacks.
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to
outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch
forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the
its previously set position when you place the
WARNING!
2
ignition into the ACC or RUN position.
switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
 When you place the ignition in the OFF position,  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
the driver’s seat will move to a position skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
the driver’s seat position is between 0.9 inches alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
and 2.7 inches (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) condition must exercise care when using the
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
its previously set position when you place the temperatures, especially if used for long
ignition to the ACC or RUN position. periods of time.
 The Easy Entry/Exit feature is disabled when the  Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 inches that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
(22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this posi- or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
Lumbar Control Switch tion, there is no benefit to the driver by moving overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry. heated could cause serious burns due to the
Easy Entry/Exit Seat increased surface temperature of the seat.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory
positioning to enhance driver mobility when setting profile Ú page 29.
entering and exiting the vehicle.
NOTE:
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled
where you have the driver’s seat positioned when
through the programmable features in the
you remove the key fob from the ignition.
Uconnect system Ú page 191.
Front Heated Seats Rear Heated Seats VENTILATED S EATS — I F EQUIPPED

The heated seats control buttons are On some models, the two outboard rear
Front Ventilated Seats
located on the center instrument panel seats are equipped with heated seats. The
below the touchscreen, and are also heated seat switches for these seats are Located in the seat cushion are small
located within the climate or controls located on the rear of the center console. fans that draw the air from the passenger
screen of the touchscreen. compartment and move air through fine
There are two heated seat switches that allow the
perforations in the seat cover to help
 Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI rear passengers to operate the seats
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in
setting on. independently. You can choose from HI, MED, LO,
higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at
 Push the heated seat button a second time to or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
three speeds, HI, MED and LO.
turn the MED setting on. switch indicate the level of heat in use.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
 Push the heated seat button a third time to turn  Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI
located on the center instrument panel below the
the LO setting on. setting on.
touchscreen, and are also located within the
 Push the heated seat button a fourth time to  Push the heated seat button a second time to climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
turn the heating elements off. turn the MED setting on.
 Press the ventilated seat button once to choose
NOTE:  Push the heated seat button a third time to turn HI.
the LO setting on.
 The engine must be running for the heated  Press the ventilated seat button a second time
seats to operate.  Push the heated seat button a fourth time to to choose MED.
turn the heating elements off.
 The level of heat selected will stay on until the  Press the ventilated seat button a third time to
operator changes it. NOTE: choose LO.
For information on use with the Remote Start  The level of heat selected will stay on until the  Press the ventilated seat button a fourth time to
system, see Ú page 21. operator changes it. turn the ventilation off.
 Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt NOTE:
within two to five minutes. The engine must be running for the ventilated
 The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
seats to operate. For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 21.
HEAD R ESTRAINTS Front Head Restraints NOTE:

Four-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped Four-way head restraints have seven tilt/locking
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of positions. When pulling fully forward, the head
injury by restricting head movement in the event of Your vehicle may be equipped with front four-way restraint will spring back to the untilted, rearward
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted driver and passenger head restraints. most position when released.
so that the top of the head restraint is located To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the Two-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped 2
above the top of your ear. head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
Your vehicle may be equipped with front two-way
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
WARNING! driver and passenger head restraints.
head restraint, and push downward on the head
 All occupants, including the driver, should not restraint. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of
the head restraints are placed in their proper the adjustment button, located at the base of head
the head restraint toward the front of the vehicle
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck restraint, and push downward on the head
as desired and release. To adjust the head
injury in the event of a crash. restraint.
restraint rearward, pull the top of the head
 Head restraints should never be adjusted restraint to the forward most position and release.
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle The head restraint will return to the rear most
with the head restraints improperly adjusted position.
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of
your head. Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat,
Forward Adjustment the center head restraint is not adjustable or
removable.
WARNING! WARNING!
 All occupants, including the driver, should not  A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until collision or hard stop could cause serious
the head restraints are placed in their proper injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck Always securely stow removed head restraints
injury in the event of a crash. in a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
 Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle  ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
with the head restraints improperly adjusted the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
or removed could cause serious injury or Follow the reinstallation instructions above Release/Adjustment Buttons
death in the event of a collision. prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a 1 — Release Button
seat.
2 — Adjustment Button
Front Head Restraint Removal
Two-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped Rear Head Restraints NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and  The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab) has
button and the release button while pulling upward removable head restraints. To raise the head only one adjustment position that is used to aid
on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To in the routing of a tether Ú page 275.
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located on the base of the head restraint  Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
holes and adjust it to the appropriate height. to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain
and push downward on the head restraint.
Four-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped additional clearance to the back of the head.
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If
either of the head restraints require removal, see
an authorized dealer.
Rear Head Restraint Removal and accelerator pedals to move toward or away NOTE:
from the driver to provide improved position with  Always adjust the pedals to a position that
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment
the steering wheel. allows full movement of the pedal.
button and the release button while pulling upward
on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left  Further small adjustments may be necessary to
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the side of the steering column. find the best possible seat/pedal position.
holes and adjust it to the appropriate height. 2
 For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
NOTE: Settings, you can use your remote keyless entry
To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat key fob or the memory switch on the driver’s
bottom must be folded up. door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals
to saved positions Ú page 29.
WARNING!
 A loose head restraint thrown forward in a WARNING!
collision or hard stop could cause serious Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. moving. You could lose control and have an
Always securely stow removed head restraints accident. Always adjust the pedals while the
in a location outside the occupant compart- Adjustable Pedals Switch vehicle is parked.
ment.
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition in the
 ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
OFF position. CAUTION!
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is
Do not place any article under the adjustable
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a in REVERSE or when the Cruise Control system is
pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may
seat. on. If there is an attempt to adjust the pedals when
cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal
the system is locked out, the following messages
travel may become limited if movement is
will appear (on vehicles equipped with an
stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — instrument cluster display):
pedal's path.
IF EQUIPPED  Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control
Engaged
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow  Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse
a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel
tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake
MIRRORS This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight

glare from vehicles behind you.
button with a counterclockwise rotation and
requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head
I NSIDE REARVIEW M IRROR NOTE: can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
Manual Mirror — If Equipped the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view center on the view through the rear window.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, viewing. This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on glare from vehicles behind you.
on the view through the rear window. or off through the touchscreen. When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear, a
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be video display illuminates to display the image
reduced by moving the small control under the generated by the rear view camera. For the 3500,
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the 4500, and 5500 Chassis Cab vehicles, the Rear
vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in Backup Camera is shipped loose and not installed.
the day position (toward the windshield). Please refer to the Ram Body Builder’s Guide at
https://www.ramtrucks.com/ram-commercial/
body-builders-guide.html for more information.
The auto dimming feature is also disabled to
Automatic Dimming Mirror
improve rear view viewing.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
Camera Display — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle.
on the view through the rear window. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the
windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped Push the menu button next to the on/off control to I LLUMINATED VANITY MIRROR —
access the following mirror options:
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high I F E QUIPPED
definition, wide and unobstructed view of the road  Brightness
behind while driving. Illuminated vanity mirrors may be located on the
 Tilt
sun visors. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic
Dimming Mirror mode, then activate the Digital
 Tow Mode (if equipped) down and swing the mirror cover upward. The 2
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror
Rearview Mirror mode.
menu options. cover turns off the light.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the on/
When not in use, push the on/off forward toward
off control lever on the bottom of the mirror
the windshield to return the mirror to the regular
rearward toward the driver.
Automatic Dimming Mirror.
NOTE:
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective
during nighttime driving in low light applications.
Tow Mode
Your vehicle may be equipped with an additional
auxiliary trailer camera to be mounted on the rear
of a trailer. When the camera is connected, the
Digital Rearview Mirror display in the Digital Rearview Mirror automatically Lift Cover For Illuminated Mirror
switches to the trailer camera.
1 — On/Off Control
To return to the rear view camera display toggle
2 — Menu Button
through the menu options using the control
3 — Left Scroll Button buttons on the mirror.
4 — Right Scroll Button
For more information on trailer camera options,
see Ú page 165.
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — OUTSIDE MIRRORS POWER M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED

If Equipped To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside The controls for the power mirrors are located on
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic the driver's door trim panel.
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
block out the sun. inside mirror.
1. Fold down the sun visor. NOTE:
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip. If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window. under the outside mirrors, they can be turned off
through the Uconnect system Ú page 191.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun
blockage. WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying too
Power Mirror Controls
much on your passenger side convex mirror
could cause you to collide with another vehicle 1 — Left Mirror Selection
or other object. Use your inside mirror when 2 — Mirror Direction Control
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in 3 — Right Mirror Selection
the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles
will not have a convex passenger side mirror.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch.
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R
NOTE: (right) button to select the mirror that you want to
The sun visor can also be extended while the sun adjust.
visor is against the windshield for additional sun
blockage through the front of the vehicle.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the If the mirror does not fold automatically, check for To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold
four arrows for the direction that you want the ice or dirt buildup at the pivot area, which can them by pushing the button (this may require
mirror to move. cause excessive drag. multiple attempts). This resets them to their
normal driving position.
POWER C ONVEX M IRROR SWITCH —
2
I F E QUIPPED
The Power Convex Mirror Switch is located on the
door trim panel, above the power mirror controls.
The switch enables the movement of the convex
portion of both the driver and passenger outside
mirrors.
Power Mirror Movement Power Folding Mirror Switch
POWER F OLDING O UTSIDE M IRRORS Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
FOR STANDARD A ND TRAILER TOW — You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if
the following occurs:
I F EQUIPPED
 The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
The power folding mirrors can be folded rearward folding.
and unfolded into the normal driving position.
 The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located unfolded (by hand or by pushing the power
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R folding mirror switch). Power Convex Mirror Switch
(right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will
 The mirrors come out of the unfolded position. To adjust the convex portion of the outside mirrors,
fold in, push the switch a second time and the
mirrors will return to the normal driving position.  The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving push the Power Convex Mirror Switch. Then, select
speeds. the mirror you want to adjust by using the L (left) or
If the mirror is manually folded after a powered
R (right) buttons.
cycle, a potential extra button push is required to
get the mirrors back to the normal driving position.
To return the control to the large mirror, push the HEATED M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED
Power Convex Mirror Switch a second time.
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 54.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS I N REVERSE —
I F E QUIPPED
This feature provides automatic outside mirror
Trailer Towing Position positioning which will assist with the driver’s
ground visibility. The outside mirrors will move
NOTE: slightly downward from the present position when
Trailer Tow Power Convex Mirror Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
entering an automated car wash. mirrors will then return to the original position
NOTE: A small blindspot mirror is located next to the main when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. If the
If the Power Convex Mirror Switch is not pushed a mirror and can be adjusted manually. vehicle is equipped with Driver Memory Settings,
second time, the switch will automatically default
this feature will be linked to the programmable
back to the larger portion of the outside mirrors
settings.
after a period of time.
NOTE:
TRAILER TOWING MIRRORS The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable turned on and off using the Uconnect system
mirror head to provide a greater vision range when Ú page 191.
towing extra-wide loads. To change position
inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be
rotated (flipped in or out).
Blindspot Mirror
OUTSIDE MIRRORS FOLDING FEATURE UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER  To operate HomeLink®, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be
manually folded both forward and rearward to
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED buttons will activate the devices they are
programmed to with each press of the corre-
prevent damage. sponding HomeLink® button.
 The HomeLink® indicator light is located above 2
the center button Ú page 412.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
HOMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device that is being
HomeLink® Buttons programmed to the HomeLink® system. Make
Folding Mirror Use this QR code to access your sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to
digital experience. activate the device you are trying to program your
CAUTION! HomeLink® button to.
 HomeLink® replaces up to
three hand-held transmitters Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
that operate devices such as garage before you begin programming.
full rearward position to resist damage when
entering a car wash or a narrow location. garage door openers, motor- It is recommended that you erase all the channels
ized gates, lighting, or home of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is time.
powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
 The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the
three different HomeLink® channels.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® not be immediately visible when looking at the 3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
device. The name and color of the button may vary want to program while you push and hold the
C HANNELS slightly by manufacturer. garage door opener transmitter button you are
To erase the channels, follow this procedure: NOTE: trying to replicate.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
position. you normally use to operate the device. HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
Non-rolling Code Devices indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
Once this happens, release both buttons.
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes. have a rolling code. These devices will also not NOTE:
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. Make sure the garage door opener motor is
NOTE:
PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
Erasing all channels should only be performed
non-rolling code final steps.
when programming HomeLink® for the first time. GARAGE DOOR OPENER Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
Do not erase channels when programming addi-
tional buttons. To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to NOTE:
activate your garage door opener motor, follow the You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
I DENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A steps below: code final step 2, after completing rolling code
R OLLING C ODE OR N ON-R OLLING C ODE NOTE: final step 1.
DEVICE All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this 1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
Before programming a device to one of your when programming additional buttons. button. This can usually be found where the
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN hanging antenna wire is attached to the
the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code. position. garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
Rolling Code Devices 2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the 2. Return to the vehicle and push the
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, HomeLink® button you wish to program, while programmed HomeLink® button three times
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view. (holding the button for two seconds each
codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a time). If the garage door opener motor
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the operates, programming is complete.
antenna is attached to the device. The button may
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
confirm that the garage door opener motor until the HomeLink® Indicator light begins to
operates. If the garage door opener motor MISCELLANEOUS D EVICE flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
does not operate, repeat the final steps for the The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a button.
rolling code procedure. miscellaneous device follows the same procedure 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
as programming to a garage door opener Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A 2
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps Ú page 44. Be sure to determine if the device has Garage Door Opener” Ú page 44, and follow
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® a rolling code, or non-rolling code before beginning all remaining steps.
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator the programming process.
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays NOTE: CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
on constantly, programming is complete. Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter P ROGRAMMING
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds
confirm that the garage door opener motor of transmission, which may not be long enough for For programming transmitters in Canada/United
operates. If the garage door opener motor HomeLink® to pick up the signal during States that require the transmitter signals to
does not operate, repeat the steps from the programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some “time-out” after several seconds of transmission.
beginning. U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
same manner. The procedure may need to be signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds
WARNING! performed multiple times to successfully pair the of transmission – which may not be long enough
device to your HomeLink® buttons. for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
 Your motorized door or gate will open and close programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
while you are programming the universal trans- REPROGRAMMING A S INGLE U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people HOMELINK® B UTTON same manner.
or pets are in the path of the door or gate.
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
 Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or been previously trained, without erasing all the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
confined area while programming the trans- channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure to the garage door or gate motor.
ceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains determine whether the new device you want to 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
code, or non-rolling code.
when inhaled and can cause you and others to (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, you wish to program while keeping the
be severely injured or killed.
without starting the engine. HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button  Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door
button, while you press and release (cycle) (Canadian/Gate Operator) Opener to complete the training for a Rolling
your hand-held transmitter every two seconds To reprogram a channel that has been previously Code.
until HomeLink® has successfully accepted trained, follow these steps:  Did you unplug the device for programming and
the frequency signal. The indicator light will remember to plug it back in?
flash slowly and then rapidly when fully 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
trained. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button If you have any problems, or require assistance,
until the indicator light begins to flash after please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
flash rates. When it changes, it is 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
assistance.
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
longer in rare cases. The garage door may “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step WARNING!
open and close while you are programming. 2 and follow all remaining steps.
 Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light. SECURITY dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
garage while programming the transceiver.
NOTE: It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
 If the indicator light stays on constantly, turn in your vehicle.
 Your motorized door or gate will open and
programming is complete and the garage To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons close while you are programming the universal
door/device should activate when the for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
HomeLink® button is pressed. that all channels will be erased. Individual people, pets or other objects are in the path of
 To program the two remaining HomeLink® channels cannot be erased. the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with
buttons, repeat each step for each The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled a garage door opener that has a “stop and
remaining button. DO NOT erase the chan- when the Vehicle Security system is active. reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
nels. standards. This includes most garage door
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS opener models manufactured after 1982. Do
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device If you are having trouble programming not use a garage door opener without these
for programming, plug it back in at this time. HomeLink®, here are some of the most common safety features.
solutions:
 Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener
hand-held transmitter.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight

switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is on,
HEADLIGHT SWITCH the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and
instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn
The headlight switch is located on the left side of off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back
the instrument panel. This switch controls the to the O (off) position. 2
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
NOTE:
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight
panel light dimming, cargo light/trailer spotter
switch clockwise from the parking lights and
lights (if equipped), and fog lights (if equipped).
instrument panel lights position to the first detent
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada) to turn on headlights, parking lights, and
instrument panel lights. Rotate the headlight
1 — Rotate Headlight Control switch to the second detent for the AUTO position.
2 — Push Fog Light Switch
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control MULTIFUNCTION L EVER
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch the steering column.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
Headlight Switch light switch without the OFF position. In order to
turn the exterior lights off, the headlight switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control must be rotated to AUTO position.
2 — Push Fog Light Switch Multifunction Lever
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch
DAYTIME RUNNING L IGHTS (DRLS) AUTOMATIC HIGH B EAM HEADLAMP  To opt out of the Automatic High-Beam Sensi-
tivity Control (default) and enter Reduced
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on CONTROL — I F EQUIPPED High-Beam Sensitivity Control (not recom-
whenever the engine is running, and the low The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mended), toggle the multifunction lever six full
beams are not on. The lights will remain on until system provides increased forward lighting at night on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition ON.
the ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC position, or by automating high beam control through the use The system will return to the default setting
the parking brake is engaged. of a camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror when the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: or a windshield mounted camera. These cameras
detect vehicle specific light and automatically
FLASH-T O-P ASS
 For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate switch from high beams to low beams until the You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
when the front fog lights are turned on. approaching vehicle is out of view. by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
NOTE: This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
 If allowed by law in the country in which the
and remain on, until the lever is released.
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running  The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
Lights can be turned on and off using the can be turned on or off by selecting “ON” under AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED
Uconnect system Ú page 191. “Auto Dim High Beams” within your Uconnect
Settings Ú page 191, as well as turning the This system automatically turns your headlights on
 On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
headlight switch to the AUTO position. or off based on ambient light levels. To turn the
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side system on, rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on  Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and position.
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
the hazard warning lights are activated). cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc- is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
HIGH/LOW B EAM S WITCH tions on the windshield or camera lens will for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition
cause the system to function improperly. into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
headlights off, turn the headlight switch out of the
panel to switch the headlights to high beam.  If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Head- AUTO position.
Pulling the multifunction lever back toward the lamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must
steering wheel will turn the low beams back on. be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See NOTE:
a local authorized dealer. The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the Automatic mode.
DIRECTIONAL LED HEADLAMP NOTE: HEADLIGHT DELAY

For vehicles sold in Canada, the first headlight
SYSTEM — I F EQUIPPED switch position is the parking lights and instrument To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight
This is a system consisting of LED (low/high beam) panel lights position (instead of the OFF position). delay feature will leave the headlights on for up to
headlights that incorporate dynamic cornering with To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position while the
5-degree inboard/15-degree outboard swivel. The switch to the AUTO position. 2
headlights continuously and automatically adapt headlight switch is on, and then the headlight
to the driving conditions around bends or when
HEADLIGHTS O N WITH WIPERS switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be
cornering based on steering wheel angle. canceled by either turning the headlight switch on
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON
The system directs the headlights to light up the Headlights, it also has this
position.
road in the best way, taking into account the speed customer-programmable feature. When your
of the vehicle and the bend or corner angle, as well headlights are in the automatic mode and the NOTE:
as the speed of the vehicle while the steering engine is running, they will automatically turn on  This feature can be programmed through the
wheel is being turned. when the wiper system is on. This feature is Uconnect system Ú page 191.
programmable through the Uconnect system
The adaptive lights are automatically activated  The headlight delay feature is automatically
Ú page 191.
when the vehicle is traveling above approximately activated if the headlight switch is left in the
5 mph (8 km/h). If your vehicle is equipped with the Rain Sensing AUTO position when the ignition is placed in the
Wiper system Ú page 54, and it is activated, the OFF position.
This system can be turned on/off through the
headlights will automatically turn on after the
Uconnect Settings under “Steering Directed
wipers complete five wipe cycles within LIGHTS-O N R EMINDER
Lights” Ú page 191.
approximately one minute, and they will turn off If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are
PARKING LIGHTS approximately four minutes after the wipers left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
completely stop. position, a chime will sound and a message will
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To NOTE: appear in the instrument cluster display when the
When your headlights come on during the daytime, driver’s door is opened.
turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (off) position. the instrument panel lights will automatically dim
to the lower nighttime intensity.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED TURN SIGNALS

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking Move the multifunction lever up or down to
lights or low beam headlights and push the fog activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
light switch located within the headlight switch. of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
Pushing the fog light switch a second time will turn operation.
the front fog lights off. NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
Cargo Lights Button On Headlight Switch
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically turn
off.
CARGO LIGHTS/TRAILER SPOTTER
Fog Light Switch
LIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED
The cargo lights (if equipped) and trailer spotter
lights (if equipped) are turned on by pushing the
cargo lights button located on the lower half of the
headlight switch. Cargo Lights Button (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
The cargo lights will turn on for approximately
60 seconds when a key fob unlock button is
pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.
When these lights are activated using the button
on the headlight switch, the trailer spotter lights
will remain illuminated when the vehicle
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
transmission is in PARK, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE. vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry,
The trailer spotter lights will turn off when the and the unlock button is pushed on the key fob, the
vehicle transmission is placed in DRIVE. courtesy, dome, and cargo lights will turn on.
BATTERY SAVER Courtesy/Reading Lights
The overhead console lights can also be operated
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior
individually as reading lights by pushing the
2
lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
corresponding buttons.
If the ignition is OFF, the interior lights will
automatically turn off when:
 Any door is left ajar for 10 minutes.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
 The Dome Off button is pushed.
1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button
 The cargo and spotter lights are manually acti-
vated by the headlight switch. 2 — Dome Off Button
3 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button
NOTE:
4 — Dome On Button
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will NOTE:
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the Front Courtesy/Reading Lights On vehicles equipped with an LED overhead
headlights are turned on and left on for eight console, if both the Dome On and Dome Off
1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button buttons are pushed, the Illuminated Entry with
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights
will automatically turn off. 2 — Dome Off Button door ajar feature will be disabled, but the Dome
3 — Dome On Button Lights inside the vehicle will turn on.
INTERIOR LIGHTS 4 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button Three types of Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights are
available for your vehicle:
COURTESY LIGHTS  Push button on/off
The courtesy, dome, and cargo lights are turned on  Push lens on/off
when any door is opened or the Dome On button is  No on/off button, just Courtesy Light
pushed on the overhead console. Also, if your
NOTE: I LLUMINATED ENTRY

The Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights will remain on
until the switch is pushed a second time, so be The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
sure they have been turned off before exiting the key fob to unlock the doors (if the vehicle is
vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after the equipped with remote power door locks) or open
ignition is turned off, they will automatically turn off any door.
after 10 minutes. This feature also turns on the puddle lamps
Dimmer Controls located beneath the outside mirrors (if equipped).
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight The lights will fade to off after approximately 30
switch and are located on the left side of the seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once
instrument panel. Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only) the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the
OFF position.
1 — Ambient Light Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control The front courtesy overhead console and door
courtesy lights will not turn off if the Dome On
button on the overhead console is pushed.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
the right dimmer control upward will increase the
Dome Off button on the overhead console is
brightness of the instrument panel lights. Rotating
pushed.
the left dimmer control will adjust the interior and
ambient light levels. NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated
NOTE:
Approach lights under the outside mirrors, they will
The ambient lights are only active when the head-
Dimmer Controls also be turned off by pushing the Dome Off button.
lights or parking lights are on.
1 — Ambient Light Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Intermittent Wipers To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
The intermittent feature of this system was
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located designed for use when weather conditions make a that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
on the multifunction lever on the left side of the single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between your climate. This rating information can be found
steering column. The front wipers are operated by cycles, desirable. For maximum delay between on most washer fluid containers.
rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever. cycles, rotate the control knob upward to the first 2
detent. WARNING!
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
knob until it enters the low continual speed could lead to a collision. You might not see other
position. The delay can be regulated from a vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles, to icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
a cycle every one second. The delay intervals will warm the windshield with the defroster before
double in duration when the vehicle speed is and during windshield washer use.
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers Mist
To use the windshield washer, push the washer When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever, from a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer
inward to the second detent. Washer fluid will be knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever,
1 — Push End Inward (Hold For Washer Or Short
sprayed and the wiper will operate for two to three inward to the first detent and release. The wipers
Press For Mist)
cycles after the washer knob is released from this will cycle one time and automatically shut off.
2 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation position. NOTE:
If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay The mist feature does not activate the washer
WINDSHIELD WIPER O PERATION range, the wiper will operate for several seconds pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
after the washer knob is released. It will then the windshield. The wash function must be used in
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first
resume the intermittent interval previously order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed
selected. If the washer knob is pushed while in the For information on wiper care and replacement,
wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever
off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle see Ú page 351.
upward to the second detent past the intermittent
approximately three times after the wash knob is
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
released.
RAIN S ENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED The Rain Sensing system has protection features
for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate
CLIMATE CONTROLS
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the under the following conditions: The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
windshield and automatically activates the wipers. the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
 Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
five detent positions to activate this feature. located on the touchscreen (if equipped), on the
Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with sides of the touchscreen, or on the instrument
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is panel below the radio.
0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is
the least sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is
the most sensitive. Position 3 should be used for
greater than 32°F (0°C). AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
normal rain conditions. Positions 1 and 2 can be
 Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the
used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity.
NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
Positions 4 and 5 can be used if the driver desires
not operate until the wiper switch is moved,
more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h),
O (off) position when not using the system.
or the gear selector is moved out of the
NOTE: NEUTRAL position.
 The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when  Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed posi- equipped with the Remote Start system, Rain
tion. Sensing wipers are not operational when the
 The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop- vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. Once the
erly when ice, or dried salt water is present on operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
the windshield. ignition switch in the RUN position, Rain Sensing Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic
 Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili-
wiper operation can resume, if it has been Temperature Controls
cone may reduce Rain Sensing performance. selected, and no other inhibit conditions
(mentioned previously) exist.
 The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect system Ú page 191.
A/C Button In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may

lead to excessive window fogging. The
Press and release this button on the
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if
touchscreen, or push the button on the
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
faceplate to change the current setting.
inside of the windshield.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is
on. Auto Button 2
Recirculation Button Set your desired temperature and press
AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain
Press and release this button on the
your desired temperature by
touchscreen, or push the button on the
automatically adjusting the blower speed
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12–inch Display Automatic faceplate, to change the system between
and air distribution. A/C may be active during AUTO
Temperature Controls Recirculation mode and outside air
operation to improve performance. AUTO mode is
mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C
NOTE: highly recommended for efficiency.
indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon is pressed. Recirculation can be used when You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
vehicle equipment. outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or  Press and release this button on the touchscreen.
MAX A/C Button high humidity are present. Recirculation can be
 Push the button on the faceplate.
used in all modes. Recirculation may be
Press and release the MAX A/C button on Toggling this function will cause the system to
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
the touchscreen to change the current switch between manual mode and automatic
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on
setting to the coldest output of air. The mode Ú page 60.
the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX
deselected manually without disturbing the mode Front Defrost Button
A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the
control selection. Continuous use of the
MAX A/C operation to exit. Pressing other settings Press and release the Front Defrost
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
will also cause the MAX A/C to exit. button on the touchscreen, or push and
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
NOTE: this mode is not recommended. Recirculation release the button on the faceplate, to
mode may automatically adjust to optimize change the current airflow setting to
 MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
customer experience for warming, cooling, Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator
performance.
dehumidification, etc. illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes
 The MAX A/C button is only available on the from the windshield and side window demist
touchscreen. outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the
blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with SYNC Button
maximum temperature settings for best CAUTION!
Press the SYNC button on the
windshield and side window defrosting and  Keep all objects a safe distance from the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode window. on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates
button, the climate system will return to the
when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the
previous setting.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And passenger temperature setting with the driver
Rear Defrost Button Down Buttons temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s
Press and release the Rear Defrost temperature setting while in SYNC will
These buttons provide the driver and passenger automatically exit this feature.
button on the touchscreen, or push and with independent temperature control.
release the button on the faceplate, to NOTE:
turn on the rear window defroster and the Push the red button (or rotate knob if The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear equipped) on the faceplate or screen.
Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow Blower Control
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes. button on the touchscreen for warmer Blower Control regulates the amount of
temperature settings. air forced through the climate control
CAUTION! Push the blue button (or rotate knob if system. There are seven blower speeds
equipped) on the faceplate or available. Adjusting the blower will cause
Failure to follow these cautions can cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
touchscreen, or press and slide the
damage to the heating elements: The speeds can be selected using either the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
 Use care when washing the inside of the rear button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature blower control knob on the faceplate or the
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners settings. buttons on the touchscreen.
on the interior surface of the window. Use a Faceplate
NOTE:
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can  The numbers within the temperature display will
only appear if the system is equipped with an control knob clockwise from the lowest blower
be peeled off after soaking with warm water. setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn
automatic climate control system.
 Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or the blower control knob counterclockwise.
 Up and down buttons are only available on vehi-
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
cles equipped with a 12-inch display.
surface of the window.
(Continued)
Touchscreen Panel Mode Floor Mode

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower Air comes from the outlets in the Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
setting and the large blower icon to increase the instrument panel. Each of these outlets amount of air is directed through the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by can be individually adjusted to direct the defrost and side window demister
pressing the blower bar area between the icons. flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets.
Mode Control outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and 2
Mix Mode
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode There is a shut-off wheel located below the air Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
buttons on the touchscreen, or pushing vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow and side window demister outlets. This
the Mode button on the faceplate, to from these outlets. setting works best in cold or snowy
change the airflow distribution mode. conditions that require extra heat to the
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so Bi-Level Mode windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor Air comes from the instrument panel comfort while reducing moisture on the
outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets. outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount windshield.
Faceplate of air is directed through the defrost and
Climate Control OFF Button
side window demister outlets.
Push the Mode Button to change the airflow Press and release the OFF button on the
distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode NOTE: touchscreen, or push the OFF button on
can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi- the faceplate (if equipped) to turn the
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets Climate Control on/off.
demist outlets. and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Touchscreen
Press one of the “MODE” buttons to change the
airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution
mode can be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets and demist outlets.
MANUAL C LIMATE C ONTROL MAX A/C Setting On vehicles equipped with the Manual Climate
Controls system, the Recirculation mode is not
DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS Set the temperature control knob to the
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
MAX A/C setting to change the current
clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled
setting to the coldest output of air.
automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
Moving the temperature control knob
to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the
away from the MAX A/C setting causes the
LED in the control button to link, and then turn off.
MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button Front Defrost Setting
Turn the mode control knob to the Front
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
windshield and side window demist
illuminates when A/C is on.
outlets. When the defrost button is
Recirculation Button selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual Temperature Push the Recirculation button to change Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings
Controls the system between recirculation mode for best windshield and side window defrosting
and outside air mode. The Recirculation and defogging.
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate Rear Defrost Button
when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside Push and release the Rear Defrost
conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or Control button to turn on the rear window
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in defroster and the heated outside mirrors
all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
unavailable if conditions exist that could create illuminates when the rear window defroster is on.
fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C The rear window defroster automatically turns off
can be deselected manually without disturbing the after 10 minutes.
mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Uconnect 5 With 8.4-inch Display Manual Temperature Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
Controls and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
Blower Control Bi-Level Mode

CAUTION!
Blower Control regulates the amount of Air comes from the instrument panel
Failure to follow these cautions can cause air forced through the climate control outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
damage to the heating elements: system. There are seven blower speeds of air is directed through the defrost and
 Use care when washing the inside of the rear available. The blower speed increases as side window demister outlets.
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners you turn the blower control knob clockwise from NOTE:
2
on the interior surface of the window. Use a the lowest blower setting. The blower speed Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping decreases as you turn the blower control knob tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can counterclockwise. and warmer air from the floor outlets.
be peeled off after soaking with warm water. Mode Control Floor Mode
 Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or Turn the mode control knob to adjust Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
abrasive window cleaners on the interior airflow distribution. The airflow amount of air is directed through the
surface of the window. distribution mode can be adjusted so air defrost and side window demister
 Keep all objects a safe distance from the
comes from the instrument panel outlets.
window. outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets. Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
Temperature Control Panel Mode
and side window demister outlets. This
Air comes from the outlets in the setting works best in cold or snowy
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of
instrument panel. Each of these outlets conditions that require extra heat to the
the air forced through the climate system.
can be individually adjusted to direct the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
The temperature increases as you turn flow of air. The air vanes of the center comfort while reducing moisture on the
the temperature control knob clockwise. outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and windshield.
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
The temperature decreases as you turn There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
the temperature control knob vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
counterclockwise. from these outlets.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL To provide you with maximum comfort in the OPERATING T IPS
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower
(ATC) fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. NOTE:
The blower will increase in speed and transition Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
Automatic Operation
into Auto mode. suggested control settings for various weather
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the conditions.
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Manual Operation Override
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel. Summer Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like override features. The AUTO symbol in the front The engine cooling system must be protected with
the system to maintain by adjusting the driver ATC display will be turned off when the system is a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
and passenger temperature control buttons. being used in the manual mode. corrosion protection and to protect against engine
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
system will achieve and automatically
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION — MS.90032) is recommended.
maintain that comfort level. I F E QUIPPED Winter Operation
3. When the system is set up for your comfort Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
level, it is not necessary to change the everyone comfortable while you keep moving performance, make sure the engine cooling
settings. You will experience the greatest ahead. system is functioning properly and the proper
efficiency by simply allowing the system to amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
function automatically. used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
beep, say one of the following commands:
Winter months is not recommended, because it
NOTE:  “Set driver temperature to 70 degrees” may cause window fogging.
 It is not necessary to move the temperature  “Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees” Vacation/Storage
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may
automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, For information on maintaining the Climate Control
only be used to adjust the interior temperature of system when the vehicle is being stored for an
and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
as possible. extended period of time, see Ú page 393.
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
 The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or equipped.
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 191.
Window Fogging Operating Tips Chart INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS STORAGE
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase Set the mode control to
the front blower speed. Do not use the (Panel Mode), Glove Compartment
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, (A/C) on, and blower The glove compartment is located on the 2
as fogging may occur. Hot Weather And on high. Roll down the passenger side of the instrument panel and
Vehicle Interior Is Very windows for a minute features both an upper and lower storage area.
Outside Air Intake Hot to flush out the hot air. NOTE:
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of Adjust the controls as Not all vehicles are equipped with a door over the
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as needed to achieve upper storage area.
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may comfort.
reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they
Turn (A/C) on and
could plug the water drains. In Winter months,
Warm Weather set the mode control to
make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and
(Panel Mode).
snow.
Operate in (Bi-Level
Cabin Air Filter Cool Sunny
Mode).
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
Set the mode control to
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
Cool & Humid (Floor Mode) and
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
Conditions turn (A/C) on to
when needed.
keep windows clear.
Set the mode control to Glove Compartment
(Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging 1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button
Cold Weather (If Equipped)
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix 2 — Upper Glove Compartment
Mode). 3 — Lower Glove Compartment
If equipped with a covered upper glove

compartment, push the release button to open.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving with
the glove compartment open may result in injury
in a collision.
Center Storage Compartment Center Storage Compartment
Door Storage 1 — Upper Console Handle

WARNING!
2 — Lower Console Handle
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
 This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on
Storage areas and bottle holders (driver’s side the armrest could be seriously injured during
only) are located in the door trim panels. vehicle operation, or a collision.
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped  In a collision, the latch may open if the total
Storage compartments are located in both the weight of the items stored exceeds about
driver and passenger rear door trim panels. 10 lb (4.5 kg). These items could be thrown
about endangering occupants of the vehicle.
Center Console Storage — If Equipped
Items stored should not exceed a total of 10 lb
The center storage compartment is located (4.5 kg).
between the driver and passenger seats. The
storage compartment provides an armrest and
contains both an upper and lower storage area. Pull the upper handle on the front of the armrest to
raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a Upper Storage USB Port
USB port that can be used to power small electrical
devices.
With the upper lid closed, pull the lower handle to Premium Center Console — If Equipped
open the lower storage bin. The lower bin contains The premium center console is equipped with two
a power inverter. There is also a “fill line” located front storage bins located in front of the center
along the rear inside wall of the lower bin. Contents storage compartment. These storage bins may be
above the “fill line” may interfere with cupholder equipped with tandem doors. Push the front bin to
placement if equipped with a premium center access the cupholders, or push the rear bin to 2
console. access the coin holder/small storage bin.
Tandem Doors Open Position

1 — Front Bin Open
2 — Rear Bin Open
Push the release button at the front of the

cupholder bin to slide tray rearward to access the
front lower storage bin, or forward to access the
Forward Portion Of Lower Storage Bin Center Console Tandem Doors— If Equipped rear lower storage bin.
1 — Wireless Charging Pad 1 — Push Front Bin Access
2 — Power Inverter 2 — Push Rear Bin Access
3 — Storage Area
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
Push Release Button To Slide Tray
Overhead Sunglass Storage

At the front of the overhead console, a
compartment is provided for the storage of one
pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to
open the compartment.
Front Bench Seat Storage Location Storage Drawer Access Button

The console storage contains a USB port that can Seatback Storage — If Equipped
be used to power small electrical devices.
Located in the back of both the driver and
passenger front seats are pockets that can be
used for storage.
Overhead Sunglass Door

The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
Front Bench Seat Storage — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat,
storage can be found by folding down the center
seatback. A console storage area and cupholders
are available. With the seatback in the upright Bench Seat Storage USB Port
position, lifting the seat bottom also reveals a
If equipped, there is a storage drawer located in
storage location. Driver’s Side Seatback Storage
the lower center of the instrument panel. It can be
released by pushing the access button above it.
Pull drawer outward to the fully open position.
Storage Bin (Regular Cab) Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab 3. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward into position.
The storage bin is located behind the front seats
and runs the length of the cab. position.
Load Floor In Open Position

Storage Bin Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position 4. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped 2. Unfold both the legs using the straps.
Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access
Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat may be Under The Seat
equipped with a folding load floor. 1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward
position.
WARNING!
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items side of the load floor.
stored on the load floor. While driving or in an
accident you may experience abrupt stopping,
rapid acceleration, or sharp turns. Loose objects
stored on the load floor may move around with
force and strike occupants, resulting in serious
or fatal injury. Load Floor Legs In Opened Position
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under Below Rear Seat Storage (Crew Cab) USB/AUX C ONTROL
the load floor.
The Crew Cab models provide additional storage Located on the center stack, just below the
under the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the instrument panel, is the main media hub. There
WARNING!
storage compartment. are four total USB ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C)
Do not drive with the load floor in the up To open the storage compartments, unsnap the and two Standard USBs (Type A). There is also an
position. When stopping fast or in an accident, securing snap located at either side of the load AUX port located in the middle of the USB Ports.
the load floor could move to the down position floor and lift upward on the fold flat lid.
causing serious injury. Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information, refer
to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time,
and both ports will provide charging capabilities.
Only one port can transfer data to the system at a
time. A pop-up will appear and allow you to select
the device transferring data.
Crew Cab Storage For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A
USB port and another device is plugged into the
Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab NOTE: Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor For more information on storage and the fold flat you to select which device to use.
back in the secured down position before you floor, refer to “Fold Flat Load Floor” in the previous
operate the vehicle. section.
Third and fourth USB ports are located behind the If equipped, your vehicle may also contain a USB
center console, above the power inverter. These port located on the top tray of the vehicle’s center
USB ports are charge only. console.
Applicable to only Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch If equipped, two Mini-USB Ports (Type C), two
Display, and Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display Standard USB Ports (Type A), and one AUX port
radios, different scenarios are listed below when a may be located to the left of the center stack, just 2
non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and below the climate controls.
larger USB ports, and when a phone device is
plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports:
 “A new device is now connected. Previous
Center Stack USB/AUX Media Hub connection was lost”.
1 — USB Port #1  “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
2 — AUX Port connection was lost”.
3 — USB Port #2  “Another device is in use through the same USB
port. Please disconnect the first device to use
the second device”.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub
USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into 1 — Standard USB Type A Ports
a Media USB port, a message will display on the
2 — Mini-USB Type C Ports
touchscreen that the device is not supported by
the system. 3 — AUX Port
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be Some USB ports support media and charging. You
lost. can use features, such as Apple CarPlay®, Android
Rear USB Ports Auto™, Pandora®, and others while charging your
phone.
1 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 1
2 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 2
NOTE: Power Outlet Fuse Locations:

Plugging in a phone or another USB device may CAUTION!
 F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow UCI Port/ USB Rear
cause the connection to a previous device to be  Power outlets are designed for accessory Center Console
lost. plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
 F90 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel Power
For further information, refer to the Uconnect the power outlets as this will damage the
Outlet Battery Fed (If Equipped)
Owner’s Manual Supplement or visit outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
UconnectPhone.com. power outlet can cause damage not covered  F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel Power
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Outlet Ignition Fed (If Equipped)
ELECTRICAL P OWER OUTLETS  F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter/ Instrument
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet can An auxiliary power outlet can be found in the tray Panel Power Outlet (If Equipped)
provide power for in-cab accessories designed for on top of the center stack. This power outlet works When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug
use with the standard “cigarette lighter” style plug. when the ignition is in the ON/RUN, ACC, or OFF any equipment as to not drain the battery of the
The 12 Volt power outlets and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB position. vehicle. All accessories connected to the outlet(s)
port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the should be removed or turned off when the vehicle
outlet indicating “12V DC”, together with either a is not in use to protect the battery against
key symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol. discharge.
A key symbol indicates that the ignition must be in
the ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to WARNING!
provide power. The battery symbol indicates that To avoid serious injury or death:
the outlet is connected to the battery, and can
provide power at all times.  Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
CAUTION! outlet.
 Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts  Do not touch with wet hands.
Power Outlet — Top Of Center Stack
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts  Close the lid when not in use and while driving
(13 Amps) power rating is exceeded, the fuse the vehicle.
protecting the system will need to be replaced.
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
(Continued) electric shock and failure.
CAUTION! POWER I NVERTER — IF E QUIPPED All power inverters are designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
 Many accessories that can be plugged in draw If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum) 400 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter shuts
power from the vehicle's battery, even when inverter may be located inside the center console down. Once the electrical device has been
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu- towards the right hand side, just under the removed from the outlet the inverter should reset.
Wireless Charging Pad (if equipped). This inverter
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's 2
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade can power cellular phones, electronics and other
battery life and/or prevent the engine from low power devices requiring power up to
starting. 400 Watts. Certain video game consoles exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
 Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
discharge the battery even more quickly. Only
use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
 After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started Rear Center Console Power Inverter Outlet
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to NOTE:
allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's 400 Watts is the maximum for the inverter, not
battery. each outlet. If three outlets are in use, 400 Watts
Center Console Power Inverter Outlet is shared amongst the devices plugged in.
If equipped, there may be a 115 Volt (400 Watts
There is also a second 115 Volt (400 Watts
Maximum) inverter located to the right of the
Maximum) power inverter located on the rear of
center stack, just below the climate controls. This
the center console. This inverter can power cellular
inverter can power cellular phones, electronics and
phones, electronics and other low power devices
other low power devices requiring power up to
requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain video
400 Watts. Certain video game consoles exceed
game consoles exceed this power limit, as will
this power limit, as will most power tools.
most power tools.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi

WARNING! wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped
 Close the lid when not in use. with Qi wireless charging functionality, an
aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate can
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an be purchased from your mobile phone provider or
electric shock and failure. a local electronics retailer. Please see your
phone’s owner’s manual for further information.
WIRELESS C HARGING PAD — The wireless charging pad is equipped with an
I F E QUIPPED anti-slip mat to hold your mobile phone in place
and an LED indicator light.
Center Stack Power Inverter LED Indicator Status:
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the  No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a
device. The outlet turns off when the device is device.
unplugged.  Blue Light: Device is detected, and is charging.
NOTE:  Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign
 The power inverter only turns on if the ignition is object is detected.
in the ACC or ON/RUN position. NOTE:
 Due to built-in overload protection, the power Using a phone case may interfere with wireless
inverter shuts down if the power rating is charging.
exceeded. Wireless Charging Pad
CAUTION!
WARNING! Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
wireless charging pad located inside of the center The key fob should not be placed on the
To avoid serious injury or death: console. This charging pad is designed to charging pad or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it.
wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup and
 Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
is a standard that uses magnetic induction to damage to the fob. Placing the fob in close
 Do not touch with wet hands. transfer power to your mobile device. proximity of the charging pad blocks the fob from
(Continued) being detected by the vehicle and prevents the
vehicle from starting.
WINDOWS this feature. The timing is programmable within

Uconnect Settings Ú page 191.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period of time
POWER W INDOWS — I F EQUIPPED WARNING!
and release; the window will go up automatically.
The window controls on the driver's door control all To stop the window from going all the way up
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
the door windows. not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in 2
switch briefly.
a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the To close the window part way, lift the window
ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly switch briefly and release it when you want the
unattended children, can become entrapped by window to stop.
the windows while operating the power window If the window runs into any obstacle during
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
injury or death. back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW F EATURES — NOTE:

Any impact due to rough road conditions may
IF E QUIPPED trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
Power Window Switches
Auto-Down Feature during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch
The passenger door windows can also be operated lightly and hold to close the window manually.
by using the single window controls on the The driver and front passenger door power window
passenger door trim panel. The window controls switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the WARNING!
will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or window switch down for a short period of time,
then release, and the window will go down There is no anti-pinch protection when the
ON/RUN position. window is almost closed. To avoid personal
automatically.
To open the window part way (manually), push the injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers
window switch down briefly and release. To stop the window from going all the way down
and all objects from the window path before
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
NOTE: closing.
down on the switch briefly.
The power window switches will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
RESET A UTO-U P MANUAL S LIDING REAR WINDOW —

Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the I F E QUIPPED
window probably needs to be reset. To reset A locking device in the center of the window helps
Auto-Up: to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle.
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window Squeeze the lock to release the window.
completely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the WIND B UFFETING
window is closed. Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
the window completely and continue to hold Window Lockout Switch in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
the switch down for an additional two seconds with the windows down, or the sunroof (if
after the window is fully open. POWER S LIDING REAR WINDOW — equipped) in certain open or partially open
IF E QUIPPED positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
WINDOW L OCKOUT SWITCH — minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
The switch for the power sliding rear window is windows open, open the front and rear windows
I F EQUIPPED located on the overhead console. Push the switch together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim rearward to open the glass. Pull the switch forward occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
panel allows you to disable the window controls on to close the glass. opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
the rear passenger doors. To disable the window window.
controls, push and release the window lockout
button (the indicator light on the button will turn
on). To enable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn off).
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch

HOOD 2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of

the hood and push the safety latch lever to the
TO CLOSE THE H OOD
left to release it, before raising the hood. Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from
TO OPEN THE H OOD the point where the props no longer hold the hood
To open the hood, two latches must be released. open.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the
WARNING!
2
steering wheel at the base of the instrument
panel. Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
Safety Latch Location CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at
the front center of the hood to ensure that both
latches engage.
Hood Release
74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT C LUSTER 5. Speedometer

CAUTION!
DESCRIPTIONS  Indicates vehicle speed.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
6. Temperature Gauge
1. Tachometer damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
 The gauge pointer shows engine coolant reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
temperature. The pointer positioned within vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
per minute (RPM x 1000).
the normal range indicates that the engine the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
2. Voltmeter cooling system is operating satisfactorily. the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
 When the vehicle is in the RUN state, the  The gauge pointer will likely indicate a off immediately and call an authorized dealer for 3
gauge indicates the electrical system higher temperature when driving in hot service.
voltage. The pointer should stay within the weather, up mountain grades, or when
normal range if the battery is charged. If the towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to 7. Fuel Gauge
pointer moves to either extreme left or right exceed the upper limits of the normal oper-
and remains there during normal driving,  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
ating range.
the electrical system should be serviced. fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
WARNING! position.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
 The fuel pump symbol points to the
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
side of the vehicle where the fuel
display shows the instrument cluster others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
door is located.
display messages Ú page 81. coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
 The display always shows one of the main
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
menu item after the ignition is placed on. decide to look under the hood yourself, Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
4. Oil Pressure Gauge Cap paragraph Ú page 354.
 The pointer should always indicate the oil
pressure when the engine is running. A
continuous high or low reading under
normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Immediate
service should be obtained from an autho-
rized dealer.
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE

PREMIUM I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER 4. Temperature Gauge

CAUTION!
DESCRIPTIONS  The gauge pointer shows engine coolant
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
temperature. The pointer positioned within
1. Tachometer the normal range indicates that the engine damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions cooling system is operating satisfactorily. reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
per minute (RPM x 1000). vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
 The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
2. Instrument Cluster Display higher temperature when driving in hot
the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this
weather, up mountain grades, or when
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for 3
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
display shows the instrument cluster service.
exceed the upper limits of the normal oper-
display messages Ú page 81.
ating range.
 The display always shows one of the main 5. Fuel Gauge
menu item after the ignition is placed on. WARNING!  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
3. Speedometer A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
 Indicates vehicle speed. others could be badly burned by steam or boiling position.
coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized  The fuel pump symbol points to the
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you side of the vehicle where the fuel
decide to look under the hood yourself, Follow door is located.
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph Ú page 354.
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL

DIESEL I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER 3. Instrument Cluster Display 7. Fuel Gauge

 When the appropriate conditions exist, this  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
1. Tachometer
display shows the instrument cluster fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions display messages Ú page 81. ON/RUN position.
 The display always shows one of the main  The fuel pump symbol points to the
2. Engine Coolant Temperature menu item after the ignition is placed on. side of the vehicle where the fuel
 This gauge shows the engine coolant tempera- filler door is located.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
ture. The gauge pointer will likely show higher
 The pointer should always indicate some oil
3
temperatures when driving in hot weather, up NOTE:
mountain grades, or in heavy stop and go pressure when the engine is running. A
 The gauge may take up to five seconds to
traffic. If the red Warning Light turns on while continuous high or low reading under
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF to
driving, safely bring the vehicle to a stop, and normal driving conditions may indicate a
the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the
turn off the engine. DO NOT operate the lubrication system malfunction. Immediate
DEF system, the gauge may not update to the
vehicle until the cause is corrected. service should be obtained from an autho-
new level. See an authorized dealer for service.
rized dealer.
WARNING!  The DEF gauge may also not immediately
5. Speedometer
update after a refill if the temperature of the
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or  Indicates vehicle speed. DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
6. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid and
coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
allow the gauge to update after a period of run
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.  The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of
time. Under very cold conditions, it is possible
Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is
that the gauge may not reflect the new fill level
required to maintain normal vehicle opera-
CAUTION! for several drives.
tion and emissions compliance. If some-
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could thing is wrong with the gauge, a DEF
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge Warning Message or Malfunction Indicator
reads greater “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Light (MIL) will be displayed. More informa-
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned tion is available in the instrument cluster
off until the pointer drops back into the normal display section under the heading of DEF
range. If the pointer remains on the “h,” turn the Warning Messages.
engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL

DIESEL I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER 5. Fuel Gauge allow the gauge to update after a period of run
 The pointer shows the level of fuel in the time. Under very cold conditions, it is possible
1. Tachometer that the gauge may not reflect the new fill level
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions ON/RUN position. for several drives.
2. Instrument Cluster Display
 The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this filler door is located. Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display shows the instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the 3
display messages Ú page 81. NOTE: driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/
 The DEF tank on these vehicles is designed with closing of a door will activate the display for
 The display always shows one of the main
a large amount of full reserve. So the level viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers,
menu item after the ignition is placed on.
sensor will indicate a full reading even before in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
3. Speedometer the tank is completely full. To put it another way, designed to display important information about
 Indicates vehicle speed. there’s additional storage capacity in the tank your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver
4. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge above the Full mark that’s not represented in interactive display located on the instrument
the gauge. You may not see any movement in panel, your instrument cluster display can show
 The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of you how systems are working and give you
the reading, even after driving up to 200 miles
Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is (321 kilometers) in some cases. warnings when they are not. The steering wheel
required to maintain normal vehicle opera- mounted controls allow you to scroll through the
tion and emissions compliance. If some-  The gauge may take up to five seconds to
main menus and submenus. You can access the
thing is wrong with the gauge, a DEF update after adding a gallon or more of DEF to
specific information you want and make selections
Warning Message or Malfunction Indicator the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the
and adjustments.
Light (MIL) will be displayed. More informa- DEF system, the gauge may not update to the
tion is available in the instrument cluster new level. See an authorized dealer for service.
display section under the heading of Diesel  The DEF gauge may also not immediately
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning Messages. update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid and
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY AND  Down Arrow Button
CONTROLS Push and release the down arrow button to

scroll downward through the main menu items,
The instrument cluster display features a driver submenu screen, and vehicle settings.
interactive display that is located in the instrument
 Left Arrow Button
cluster.
Push and release the left arrow button to
access/select the information screens,
submenu screens of a main menu item, or to
return to the main menu.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
OIL L IFE R ESET
1 – Up Arrow Button
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
2 – Right Arrow Button indicator system. The “Oil Change Required”
3 – Down Arrow Button message will display in the instrument cluster
4 – Left Arrow Button display after a single chime has sounded, to
indicate the next scheduled oil change interval.
Instrument Cluster Display Location and Controls The engine oil change indicator system is duty
 Up Arrow Button
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls cycle based, which means the engine oil change
Push and release the up arrow button to interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen scroll upward through the main menu items, personal driving style.
submenu screen, and vehicle settings.
NOTE:
The system allows the driver to select information  Right Arrow Button Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display
by pushing the following instrument cluster display controls for the following procedure.
control buttons located on the left side of the Push and release the right arrow button to
steering wheel: access/select the information screens or
submenu screens of a main menu item. Push
and hold the right arrow button for two
seconds to reset displayed/selected features
that can be reset.
Oil Life Reset Procedure 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three Speedometer
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the times within ten seconds.
Push and release the up or down arrow
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the button until the speedometer menu item is
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
the engine). ignition to the OFF position.
and release the right arrow button to cycle the
2. Push and release the down arrow button to NOTE: display between mph and km/h.
scroll downward through the main menu to If the indicator message illuminates when you start Vehicle Info
“Vehicle Info.” the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not 3
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. Push and release the up or down arrow
3. Push and release the right arrow button to
button until the Vehicle Info menu item is
access the ”Vehicle Info” screen, then scroll up
or down to select “Oil Life.”
DISPLAY MENU ITEMS highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the right arrow button to enter the
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to Push and release the up or down arrow
submenus items of Vehicle Info. Follow the
select “Reset”. button until the desired selectable menu icon is
directional prompts to access or reset any of the
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
5. Push and release the down arrow button to following Vehicle Info submenu items:
The instrument cluster display menu items may
select “Yes,” then push and release the Transmission
consist of the following: Coolant
right arrow button to reset the Oil Life to Tire Pressure Temperature —
Off Road — Temperature
100%. Speedometer Vehicle Info If Equipped
If Equipped
6. Push and release the up arrow button to Oil Exhaust Brake
Driver Assist — Oil Pressure
exit the instrument cluster display screen. Fuel Economy Trip A/Trip B Temperature — If Equipped
If Equipped
Diesel
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life Vehicle Commercial Boost
Particulate
Screen Set Up Settings — Settings — Pressure — Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the Filter (DPF) —
If Equipped If Equipped If Equipped
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the If Equipped
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start Trailer Tow Audio Messages Fuel Filter Life Battery Gauge
the engine). — If Equipped Voltage Summary
Engine Hours
Off Road NOTE: Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
When vehicle speed becomes too high to display steering wheel) and the following will display in the
Push and release the up or down arrow the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in place of the instrument cluster display:
button until the Off Road menu icon is displayed in numbers, and the graphic will be greyed out. A
the instrument cluster display. Push and release ACC SET
message indicating the necessary speed for the
the left or right arrow button to scroll When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
feature to become available will also display.
through the information submenus. instrument cluster.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
 Drivetrain The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the activity occurs, which may include any of the
 Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical ACC system. following:
and numerical value of calculated average
front wheel angle from the steering wheel Push and release the up or down arrow  Distance Setting Change
orientation. button until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in  System Cancel
the instrument cluster display.
 Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock”  Driver Override
graphic only during 4WD High, 4WD High Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature
 System Off
Part Time, 4WD Low status. The instrument cluster display displays the current
ACC system settings. The information displayed  ACC Proximity Warning
 Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If
Equipped): displays front and rear or rear depends on ACC system status.  ACC Unavailable Warning
only axle locker graphic, and sway bar Push the ACC on/off button (located on the NOTE:
connection graphic with text message steering wheel) until one of the following displays The instrument cluster display will return to the last
(connected or disconnected). in the instrument cluster display: display selected after five seconds of no ACC
 Pitch And Roll Adaptive Cruise Control Off display activity Ú page 143.
 Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in When ACC is deactivated, the display will read LaneSense — If Equipped
the graphic with the angle number on the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” The instrument cluster display displays the current
screen. Adaptive Cruise Control Ready LaneSense system settings. The information
displayed depends on LaneSense system status
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed and the conditions that need to be met
setting has not been selected, the display will read Ú page 156.
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Fuel Economy Trailer Tow Audio

Push and release the up or down arrow Push and release the up or down arrow Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy menu item is button until the Trailer Tow menu item is button until the Audio Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push highlighted in the instrument cluster display. This
and Hold the right arrow button to reset and release the right or left arrow button to menu will display the audio source information,
Average Fuel Economy. cycle through the following trailer tow information: including the Song name, Artist name, and audio
source with an accompanying graphic.
 Current Fuel Economy Gauge  Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold
the OK button to reset the distance. Phone Call Status 3
 Average Fuel Economy Value
 Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM): When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status
 Range To Empty
pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up will
 Fuel Tank Levels — If Equipped  Braking Output
remain until the phone is answered or ignored.
 Trailer Type
Trip A/Trip B NOTE:
 ITBM Gain The call status will temporarily replace the
Push and release the up or down arrow
 Trailer Light Check: Push and hold the OK previous media source information displayed on
button until the Trip menu item is highlighted in the
button to begin the Trailer Light Test sequence the screen. When the pop-up is no longer
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
Ú page 181. displayed, the display will return to the last used
right arrow button to enter the submenus of screen.
Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B information  Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring: The Instrument
will display the following: Cluster Display will display the Trailer Tire Pres- Stored Messages
sure for a connected trailer with sensors that
 Distance Push and release the up or down arrow
match the active trailer profile. When a low tire
button until the Messages Menu item is
 Average Fuel Economy is present, the low tire value will be displayed in
highlighted. This feature shows the number of
 Elapsed Time red, and the affected low tire will have a red
stored warning messages. Push and release the
glow. “Trailer Tire Low“ will be displayed on the
Push and hold right arrow button to reset all center bottom of the Instrument Cluster Display right or left arrow button to cycle through
information. screen. stored messages.
Screen Setup Menu Item NOTE:

Center
Push and release the up or down arrow Menus with (Show/Hide) can push the right
arrow button to choose whether to show or hide None Outside Temp Compass
button until the Screen Setup menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push this menu in the instrument cluster display. Range To
Average Econ Time
Empty
and release the right arrow button to enter the Upper Left or Upper Right — If Equipped
Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature Current Econ Trip B Distance Trip A Distance
Compass —
allows you to change what information is displayed None Time Trailer Trip —
If Equipped Audio Speedometer
in the instrument cluster as well as the location If Equipped
that information is displayed. Outside Temp Range To
Average Econ Menu Title
— If Equipped Empty
Current Gear — If Equipped
 Off
Battery
Trailer Brake —
Current Econ Voltage — Left Side or Right Side — If Equipped
 On If Equipped
If Equipped
Odometer Fuel Filter Life
Coolant None Menu Icon
— If Equipped
 Unit Without Decimal Trip B Distance Temperature — Trip A Distance
If Equipped Oil
 Unit With Decimal Average Econ Range
Temperature
Oil
Favorite Menu Trailer Trip — If Oil Pressure — Coolant Transmission
Temperature — Oil Life
Equipped If Equipped Temperature Temperature
Speedometer Screen Setup Vehicle Info If Equipped
Driver Assist Commercial Transmission
Fuel Economy Oil Life — Turbo Boost —
(Show/Hide) — Settings — Temperature — Lower Left and Lower Right — If Equipped
(Show/Hide) If Equipped If Equipped
If Equipped If Equipped If Equipped
Range To
Trip Info Trailer Tow Exhaust Brake Fuel Filter Life None Compass
Messages Empty
(Show/Hide) (Show/Hide) — If Equipped — If Equipped
Outside Temp Time Average Econ
Vehicle
Audio Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Trailer Trip
Settings —
(Show/Hide) Coolant
If Equipped Current Econ Trailer Brake
Temperature
Restore Defaults Follow the prompts to display and set any of the
Lower Left and Lower Right — If Equipped following Vehicle Settings.
 Cancel
Oil Battery NOTE:
Oil Pressure  Restore
Temperature Voltage
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
Transmission Turbo Boost — Settings — If Equipped settings.
Oil Life
Temperature If Equipped Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall  If equipped with a base radio (Non-Touch-
Exhaust Brake Fuel Filter Life features when the transmission is in PARK. screen) Vehicle Settings will be included in the
— If Equipped — If Equipped Push and release the up or down arrow instrument cluster display. 3
button until Settings displays in the instrument  If equipped with a Touchscreen radio, the
cluster display. Vehicle Settings will be included in the radio
head unit.
Setting Names Abbreviated

Setting Names Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
(Left Submenu Layer)
Language Select Language English, Spanish, French, Arabic
Units Units U.S.; Metric
 Front Volume — Low; Medium; High
ParkSense ParkSense
 Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High
Tilt Mirror in Reverse Tilt Mirror in R On; Off
Rain Sensing Wipers Auto Wipers On; Off
Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist On; Off
Headlights Off Delay Lights Off Delay 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
Illuminated Approach Lights w/ Unlock 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
Headlights On with Wipers Lights w/ Wipers On; Off
Automatic High beams Auto High beams On; Off
Daytime Running Lights Daytime Lights On; Off

Flash Lights with Lock Lights w/ Lock On; Off
Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors On; Off
Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On; Off
Sound Horn with Remote Start Horn w/ Rmt Start On; Off
Sound Horn with Remote Lock Horn w/ Rmt Lock Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press
Remote Unlock Sequence Remote Unlock Driver Door; All Doors
Key Fob Linked to Memory Key in Memory On; Off
Passive Entry Passive Entry On; Off
Remote Start Comfort System Rmt Start Comfort Off; Remote Start; All starts
Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat On; Off
Key-off Power Delay Power Off Delay Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10 minutes
 Aux Switches
 Power Take-Off
Commercial Settings Commercial  PIN Setup

NOTE:
If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known, see an
authorized dealer to have the PIN reset.
Trailer Select Trailer Select Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3; Trailer 4
Brake Type Brake Type Light Electric; Heavy Electric; Light EOH; Heavy EOH

 Trailer # (# is equal to slot position)
 Boat
 Car
 Cargo
 Dump
3
 Equipment
 Flatbed
Trailer Name Trailer Name  Gooseneck
 Horse
 Livestock
 Motorcycle
 Snowmobile
 Travel
 Utility
 5th Wheel
Compass Variance Compass Var 1-15 increments of 1
Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Cancel; Calibrate
Fuel Saver Display Fuel Saver On; Off
Commercial Settings — If Equipped DIESEL M ESSAGES AND WARNINGS  Perform Service — Your vehicle will require emis-
sions maintenance at a set interval. To help
Commercial Settings allows the driver to set and
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages remind you when this maintenance is due, the
recall additional features when the transmission is
The Cummins® diesel engine meets all diesel instrument cluster display will display “Perform
in PARK.
emissions standards, resulting in one of the lowest Service”. When the “Perform Service” message
Push and release the up or down arrow emitting diesel engines ever produced. To achieve is displayed in the instrument cluster display it is
button until Commercial Settings displays in the these emissions standards, your vehicle is necessary to have the emissions maintenance
instrument cluster display. equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and performed. Emissions maintenance may
Follow the prompts to enter the required PIN and exhaust system. These systems are seamlessly include replacing the Closed Crankcase Ventila-
enter the Commercial Settings submenu. integrated into your vehicle and managed by the tion (CCV) filter element. The procedure for
Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM clearing and resetting the "Perform Service"
NOTE: indicator message is located in the appropriate
manages engine combustion to allow the exhaust
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen Service Information.
system’s catalyst to trap and burn Particulate
radio, “Commercial Settings” will replace “Vehicle
Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input or interaction  Exhaust System — Regeneration Required
Settings” in the instrument cluster display. The
on your part. Now — "Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at
Commercial Settings menu will only include the
settings below Ú page 191. Highway Speeds to Remedy" will be displayed in
WARNING! the instrument cluster display if the exhaust
Commercial Settings allows you to access the
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park particulate filter reaches 80% of its maximum
following features (if equipped):
over materials that can burn. Such materials storage capacity. Under conditions of exclusive
 Power Take Off (PTO) short duration and low speed driving cycles,
might be grass or leaves coming into contact
 Remote Ignition with your exhaust system. Do not park or your Cummins® diesel engine and exhaust
operate your vehicle in areas where your after-treatment system may never reach the
 Idle Control
exhaust system can contact anything that can conditions required to remove the trapped PM.
 Backup Alarm If this occurs, the “Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely
burn.
 ParkSense Drive at Highway Speeds to Remedy” message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster
 Aux Switches Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to display. If this message is displayed, you will
 PIN Setup additional maintenance required on your vehicle or hear one chime to assist in alerting you of this
NOTE: engine. The following messages may display in condition
If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known, see your instrument cluster display:
an authorized dealer to have the PIN reset.
By simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds  Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See  Engine Power Reduced During Warm-up — This
for as little as 45 minutes, you can remedy the Dealer — This message indicates the PCM has message will display during start-up when the
condition in the particulate filter system and derated the engine to limit the likelihood of ambient temperature is between 10°F (-12°C)
allow your Cummins® diesel engine and permanent damage to the after-treatment and -10°F (-23°C).
exhaust after-treatment system to remove the system. If this condition is not corrected and a  Engine Power Reduced Up To 30 Sec (Seconds)
trapped PM and restore the system to normal dealer service is not performed, extensive During Warm-up — This message will display
operating condition. exhaust after-treatment damage can occur. To during start-up when the ambient temperature
 Exhaust System — Regeneration In Process correct this condition it will be necessary to have is between -10°F (-23°C) and -25°F (-32°C).
Exhaust Filter XX% Full — Indicates that the DPF your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer. 3
 Engine Power Reduced Up To 2 Min (Minutes)
is self-cleaning. Maintain your current driving NOTE: During Warm-up — This message will display
condition until regeneration is completed. Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing during start-up when the ambient temperature
 Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed — your oil and resetting the oil change indicator by is -25°F (-32°C) and below.
This message indicates that the DPF 0 miles remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine warm
self-cleaning is completed. If this message is filter from performing it's cleaning routine. This will
up protection feature that may limit engine
displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in shortly result in a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
performance after cold starting at low ambient
alerting you of this condition. and reduced engine power. Only an authorized
temperatures. The length of time engine speed
dealer will be able to correct this condition.
 Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now — is limited is dependent upon engine coolant
This message indicates regeneration has been CAUTION! temperature. Engine speed may be briefly
disabled due to a system malfunction. At this limited to 1,000 RPM after starting with coolant
point the engine Powertrain Control Module See an authorized dealer, as damage to the temperature below freezing conditions, and
(PCM) will register a fault code, the instrument exhaust system could occur soon with continued may be limited to 1,000 RPM for up to approxi-
panel will display a MIL light. operation. mately two minutes under more severe cold
conditions.
CAUTION! Cold Ambient Derate Mode Messages  Coolant Low — This telltale will turn on to indi-
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the The vehicle will display messages when a derate cate the vehicle coolant level is low
exhaust system could occur soon with continued (engine power reduction) is activated to protect the Ú page 341.
operation. engine during start-up in cold ambient
temperatures.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning  5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or has experienced component failures, or when
Messages Refuel Refill DEF — This message will continu- tampering has been detected. The vehicle may be
ously display when the counter reaches zero, limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) if
There are four different messages which are and will be accompanied by a periodic chime. the DEF system is not serviced within less than
displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF 200 miles (322 km) of the fault being detected.
system has been filled with a fluid other than DEF, The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum
has experienced component failures, or when speed of 5 mph upon the first of the following When the DEF system needs to be serviced the
tampering has been detected. The vehicle may be conditions to occur: following warnings will display:
limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) if  If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted.  Service DEF System See Dealer — This message
the DEF system is not serviced within less than  If the vehicle is idled for an extended period will display when the fault is initially detected,
200 miles (322 km) of the fault being detected. of time, approximately one hour or greater. each time the vehicle is started, and periodically
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the during driving. The message will be accompa-
 If the system detects that the level of fuel in
following warnings will display: nied by a single chime. We recommend you
the tank has increased.
drive to the nearest authorized dealer and have
 DEF Low Refill Soon — This message will display Add a minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) of DEF your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
when the low level is reached, during vehicle to the tank in order to avoid vehicle operation at
start up, and with increased frequency during  5 MPH Max Speed in 150 mi Service DEF
a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
vehicle operation. It will be accompanied by a System See Dealer — This message will display
single chime. Approximately 5 gallons (19
NOTE: if the DEF system has not been serviced after
Liters) of DEF is required to refill the tank when A minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) may be the “Service DEF System – See Dealer”
this message is initially displayed on pickup required to restore normal vehicle operation. message is displayed. This message will contin-
applications, and approximately 7 gallons (26 Although the vehicle will start normally and can be uously display until the mileage counter reaches
Liters) are required on chassis-cab applications. placed in gear after this message has been initially zero, and will be accompanied by a periodic
displayed, extreme caution should be utilized since chime. The message will continue to countdown
 Speed Limited to 5 MPH in XXX mi Refill DEF — the vehicle will only be capable of maneuvering at until it reaches zero unless the vehicle is
This message will continuously display if the a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). serviced. We recommend you drive to your
“DEF Low Refill Soon” message is ignored, and nearest authorized dealer and have your vehicle
the frequency of occurrence of the chime will Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning
serviced immediately.
increase unless up to 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) of Messages
DEF is added to the tank. There are five different messages which are NOTE:
displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF Under some circumstances this mileage counter
system has been filled with a fluid other than DEF, may start with a value of less than 150 miles
(241 km). For example, if recurring faults are
detected in a time interval of less than 40 hours,  Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer — This When load reduction is activated, the message
the counter may restart at the value where it message will display when the fault is initially “Battery Saver On Some Systems May Have
stopped when a previous fault was temporarily detected, each time the vehicle is started, and Reduced Power” will appear in the instrument
remedied, or at a minimum of 50 miles (80 km). periodically during driving. The message will be cluster.
 5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or accompanied by a single chime. We recom- These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a
Refuel Service DEF See Dealer — This message mend you drive to the nearest authorized dealer low state of charge and continues to lose electrical
will continuously display when the mileage and have your vehicle serviced as soon as charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
counter reaches zero, and will be accompanied possible. sustain.
by a periodic chime. 3
BATTERY SAVER O N/BATTERY S AVER NOTE:
The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum
speed of 5 mph upon the first of the following
MODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL L OAD  The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diag-
conditions to occur: REDUCTION ACTIONS — I F EQUIPPED nostic on the charging system continuously.
 If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted. This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery  If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
 If the vehicle is idled for an extended period Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of indicate a problem with the charging system
of time, approximately one hour or greater. the electrical system and status of the vehicle Ú page 96.
battery.
 If the system detects that the level of fuel in The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
the tank has increased. In cases when the IBS detects charging system equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are affected by load reduction:
 5 MPH Max Speed Service DEF System See
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
Dealer — This message will continuously display,  Heated Seats/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
take place to extend the driving time and distance
and will be accompanied by a periodic chime.
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or  Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
Although the vehicle can be started and placed
turning off non-essential electrical loads.  HVAC System
in gear, the vehicle will only operate at a
maximum speed of 5 mph. Your vehicle will Load reduction is only active when the engine is  115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
require towing, see an authorized dealer for running. It will display a message if there is a risk
 Audio and Telematics System
service. of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle
may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not
NOTE:
restart after the current drive cycle.
When this message is displayed, the engine can
still be started. However, the vehicle will only
operate at a maximum speed of 5 mph.
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or

more of the following conditions:
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
“Battery Saver Mode”) The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
 The charging system cannot deliver enough
During a trip: instrument panel together with a dedicated
electrical power to the vehicle system because
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
the electrical loads are larger than the capability  Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible: These indications are indicative and precautionary
of charging system. The charging system is still
 Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte- and as such must not be considered as exhaustive.
functioning properly.
rior). Always refer to the information in this chapter in
 Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads the event of a failure indication. All active telltales
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior  Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volt AC, USB ports. will display first if applicable. The system check
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, menu may appear different based upon
115 Volt AC, USB ports) during certain driving  Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature). equipment options and current vehicle status.
conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stop-  Check the audio settings (volume). Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
ping).
After a trip: RED WARNING LIGHTS
 Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
 Check if any aftermarket equipment was
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
and similar devices. installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review This warning light indicates when the
 Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw driver or passenger seat belt is
long parking periods). currents). unbuckled. When the ignition is first
 The vehicle was parked for an extended period  Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
of time (weeks, months). driving time and parking time). position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
 The battery was recently replaced and was not
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
 The vehicle should have service performed if driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
charged completely. the message is still present during consecutive remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
 The battery was discharged by an electrical load trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
left on when the vehicle was parked. driving pattern did not help to identify the cause. will sound Ú page 275.
 The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances
like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and
similar devices.
Air Bag Warning Light been corrected. If the problem is related to the Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
This warning light will illuminate to
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
may be felt during each stop. failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
check when the ignition is placed in the
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the system is required.
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
3
fault is cleared. If the light is not on during startup,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system in the master cylinder has dropped below a illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as specified level. should then turn off unless the parking brake is
possible. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
Brake Warning Light NOTE: authorized dealer.
This warning light monitors various brake The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level The light also will turn on when the parking brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
conditions. The vehicle should have service is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
parking brake application. If the brake
performed, and the brake fluid level checked. position.
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is NOTE:
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock necessary. This light shows only that the parking brake is
Brake System reservoir. applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
WARNING! cation.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is Hood Open Warning Light
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates dangerous. Part of the brake system may have This warning light will illuminate when the
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / immediately.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this NOTE:
case, the light will remain on until the condition has If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — Battery Charge Warning Light Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
If Equipped This warning light will illuminate when the Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for battery is not charging properly. If it stays This warning light will illuminate to
approximately 15 seconds when the on while the engine is running, there may indicate a problem with the ETC system.
vehicle security system is arming, and be a malfunction with the charging If a problem is detected while the vehicle
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as is running, the light will either stay on or
disarmed. possible. flash depending on the nature of the problem.
This indicates a possible problem with the Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
electrical system or a related component. completely stopped and the transmission is placed
Light in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If
This warning light warns of an Oil Pressure Warning Light the light remains on with the vehicle running, your
overheated engine condition. If the This warning light will illuminate to vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
engine coolant temperature is too high, indicate low engine oil pressure. If the authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
this indicator will illuminate and a single light turns on while driving, stop the
NOTE:
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
pedals are pressed at the same time.
minutes or until the engine is able to cool, chime will sound when this light turns on.
whichever comes first. If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
running, immediate service is required and you
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
may experience reduced performance, an
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission checked under the hood.
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the Oil Temperature Warning Light when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
temperature reading does not return to normal, ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
turn the engine off immediately and call for service This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is check. If the light does not come on during starting,
Ú page 322. have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault

WARNING! YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Warning Light
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
This warning light will turn on when
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is Warning Light — If Equipped
there's a fault with the EPS system
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, This warning light will illuminate to
Ú page 140.
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust indicate a fault in the ACC system.
components and cause a fire. Contact a local authorized dealer for
WARNING! service Ú page 143. 3
Continued operation with reduced assist could Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
CAUTION!
Warning Light (MIL)
should be obtained as soon as possible. Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
eventually cause severe transmission damage Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light Diagnostic System called OBD II that
or transmission failure.
This warning light will illuminate when the monitors engine and automatic
Trailer Brake has been disconnected transmission control systems. This warning light
Ú page 173. Door Open Warning Light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
This indicator will illuminate when a door position before engine start. If the bulb does not
Transmission Temperature Warning is ajar/open and not fully closed. come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
Light — If Equipped to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
This warning light will illuminate to warn NOTE: Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
of a high transmission fluid temperature. If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
This may occur with strenuous usage chime. after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
such as trailer towing. If this light turns the light stays on through several typical driving
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK or normally and will not require towing.
NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
alert serious conditions that could lead to Warning Light — If Equipped Warning Light — If Equipped
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced This warning light will indicate when the This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator Each time the ignition is turned to ON/
occurs. Light in the instrument cluster will come RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/ will be on, even if it was turned off previously.
WARNING! RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine running. LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously The LaneSense system provides the
referenced above, can reach higher with the engine running, a malfunction has been driver with visual and steering torque
temperatures than in normal operating detected in the ESC system. If this warning light warnings when the vehicle starts to drift
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive remains on after several ignition cycles, and the out of its lane unintentionally without the
slowly or park over flammable substances such vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) use of a turn signal.
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an  When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
result in death or serious injury to the driver, authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
occupants or others. situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
problem diagnosed and corrected. from solid green to solid yellow.
 The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-  When the LaneSense system senses the lane
cator Light come on momentarily each time the has been approached and is in a lane departure
CAUTION!
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator RUN position. from solid white/green to flashing yellow
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking Ú page 156.
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
severe catalytic converter damage and power If Equipped
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is  This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event. This warning light will illuminate when the
required. windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 338.
Low Fuel Warning Light Should one or more tires be in the condition also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
mentioned above, the display will show the may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
When the fuel level reaches
indications corresponding to each tire. ability.
approximately 3.2 gal (12 L) this light will
turn on, and remain on until fuel is Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
CAUTION! proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
added.
Do not continue driving with one or more flat responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the even if underinflation has not reached the level to
Warning.
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
Low Coolant Level Warning Light telltale.
3
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
This telltale will turn on to indicate the the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
vehicle coolant level is low Ú page 341. authorized dealer as soon as possible. malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
If Equipped the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
This warning light will illuminate when the manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire and then remain continuously illuminated. This
fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
filler cap to disengage the light. If the a different size than the size indicated on the start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
light does not turn off, please see an vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
authorized dealer. should determine the proper tire inflation pressure system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) for those tires. pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
Warning Light — If Equipped As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
The warning light switches on and a equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
message is displayed to indicate that the pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
tire pressure is lower than the significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
recommended value and/or that slow low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
guaranteed. significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
CAUTION! is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
This warning light will illuminate to
The TPMS has been optimized for the original have the brake system inspected by an authorized
indicate the Cruise Control System is not
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures dealer.
functioning properly and service is
and warning have been established for the tire Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) required. Contact an authorized dealer.
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
Light — If Equipped YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
when using replacement equipment that is not This warning light will illuminate to
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket indicate a fault in the Forward Collision Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using Warning System. Contact an authorized Indicator Light — If Equipped
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire dealer for service Ú page 266. This indicator light illuminates to indicate
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to Service LaneSense Warning Light — that Forward Collision Warning is off
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket Ú page 266.
If Equipped
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your This warning light will illuminate when the TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
sensor function checked. LaneSense system is not operating and This indicator light will illuminate when
requires service. Please see an TOW/HAUL mode is selected.
authorized dealer.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light —
Light
This warning light will illuminate to signal If Equipped
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
a fault with the 4WD system. If the light
light will turn on when the ignition is This indicator light will illuminate to
stays on or comes on during driving, it
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN indicate when Trailer Merge Assist has
means that the 4WD system is not
position and may stay on for as long as been activated.
functioning properly and that service is required.
four seconds. Cargo Light — If Equipped
We recommend you drive to the nearest service
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while center and have the vehicle serviced immediately. This indicator light will illuminate when
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake the cargo light is activated by pushing the
system is not functioning and service is required as cargo light button on the headlight
soon as possible. However, the conventional brake switch.
system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
Snowplow Mode Indicator Light — together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate NOTE:
If Equipped at the same speed. Low range provides a greater The Wait To Start Light may not illuminate if the
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at intake manifold temperature is warm enough.
This indicator light will illuminate when the wheels Ú page 132.
Snowplow Mode has been activated Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 183. 4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped The Water In Fuel Indicator Light will
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator This light alerts the driver that the vehicle illuminate when there is water detected
is in the 4WD High mode. The front and in the fuel filter. If this light remains on,
Light — If Equipped rear driveshafts are mechanically locked DO NOT start the vehicle before you drain 3
This indicator light will illuminate when a together forcing the front and rear the water from the fuel filter to prevent engine
derate (engine power reduction) is wheels to rotate at the same speed. damage Ú page 347.
activated for protection of the turbo-
charger in cold ambient temperatures. NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light — power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
If Equipped mode and the front and rear driveshafts Target Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when are disengaged from the powertrain. This will display when the ACC is set and
the Diesel Exhaust Brake has been Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator a the vehicle in front is detected
activated, and is in full strength mode Ú page 143.
Ú page 120. Light — If Equipped
The Low DEF Indicator will illuminate if
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
4WD Lock Indicator Light the vehicle is low on DEF Ú page 351. Target Detected Indicator Light —
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle If Equipped
is in the 4WD LOCK mode. The front and
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped This light will turn on when the Adaptive
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
Cruise Control is SET and there is no
together, forcing the front and rear This indicator light will illuminate for vehicle in front detected Ú page 143.
wheels to rotate at the same speed Ú page 132. approximately two seconds when the
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped ignition is turned to the RUN position. Its
duration may be longer based on colder
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start
is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and until telltale is no longer displayed Ú page 108.
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Turn Signal Indicator Lights WHITE INDICATOR L IGHTS
Light — If Equipped When the left or right turn signal is
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
This indicator light will illuminate when activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the Light — If Equipped
the Diesel Exhaust Brake has been
activated, and has switched to Automatic corresponding exterior turn signal lamps This light will illuminate when the vehicle
mode Ú page 141. will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the equipped with ACC has been turned on
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up but not set Ú page 143.
ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped (right).
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This light will turn on when ECO mode is NOTE:
active. This indicator light will illuminate when
 A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is the cruise control is ready, but not set
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either Ú page 141.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light turn signal on.
Set Speed Display
This indicator light will illuminate when  Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
the parking lights or headlights are either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. The Set Speed Display indicator light
turned on. indicates the set speed for the Speed
 If equipped with fog lamps, the fog lamp on Control and ACC settings.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped the side of the activated turn signal will also
illuminate to provide additional light when LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
solid green when both lane markings turning. When the LaneSense system is ON, but
not armed, the LaneSense indicator light
have been detected and the system is Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
“armed” and ready to provide visual and illuminates solid white. This occurs when
If Equipped only left, right, or neither lane line has
torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure
occurs Ú page 156. This indicator light will illuminate when been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the
the cruise control is set to the desired system is ready to provide only visual warnings if
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped speed Ú page 141. an unintentional lane departure occurs on the
This indicator light will illuminate when detected lane line Ú page 156.
the front fog lights are on.
BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
WARNING!
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
High Beam Indicator Light dealer for service as soon as possible.  ONLY an authorized service technician should
This indicator light will illuminate to connect equipment to the OBD II connection
indicate that the high beam headlights CAUTION! port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
are on. With the low beams activated,  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause service your vehicle.
push the multifunction lever forward further damage to the emission control  If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high system. It could also affect fuel economy and
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
OBD II connection port, such as a 3
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high before any emissions tests can be performed.
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever  Be possible that vehicle systems,
toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to  If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is including safety related systems, could be
pass" scenario. running, severe catalytic converter damage impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate occur that may result in an accident
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II service is required. involving serious injury or death.
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated  Access, or allow others to access, infor-
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S YSTEM mation stored in your vehicle systems,
system monitors the performance of the (OBD II) CYBERSECURITY including personal information.
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent connection port to allow access to information
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine related to the performance of your emissions
emissions well within current government controls. Authorized service technicians may need
regulations. to access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II emissions system Ú page 190.
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,

but do not crank or start the engine.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS NOTE: vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions start this test over.
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
control system. Failure to pass could prevent 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the recheck with the above test routine may then
vehicle registration. ON position, you will see the Malfunction indicate that the system is now ready.
For states that require an Inspection and Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check. Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two normal vehicle operation you should have your
functioning and is not on when the things will happen: vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
ready for testing. then return to being fully illuminated until MIL is on with the engine running.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was This means that your vehicle's OBD II
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery system is not ready and you should not
or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system proceed to the I/M station.
should be determined not ready for the I/M test,  The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
your vehicle may fail the test. fully illuminated until you place the ignition
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, in the off position or start the engine. This
which you can use prior to going to the test station. means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, ready and you can proceed to the I/M
you must do the following: station.
105
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE— GASOLINE WARNING!
AUTOPARK — R OTARY S HIFTER AND
ENGINE  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
8-SPEED T RANSMISSION O NLY
or in a location accessible to children, and do AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/ on the following pages occur. It is a back up system
your seat belt.
RUN position. A child could operate power and should not be relied upon as the primary
The starter should not be operated for more than windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into 4
10-second intervals. Waiting a few seconds PARK.
between such intervals will protect the starter from  Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
overheating.
may cause serious injury or death. are outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
WARNING!
 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
 Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF posi-
Start the engine with the transmission in the PARK the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
tion, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
position. Apply the brake before shifting into any CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
lock the vehicle.
driving range. that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with NOTE: the instrument cluster display and near the
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil- gear selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking,
 This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or precaution, always apply the parking brake
be pressed to shift out of PARK.
others could be seriously or fatally injured. when exiting the vehicle.
Children should be warned not to touch the  If equipped with an 8-speed transmission,
(Continued)
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible
selector. unless the Manual Park Release has been acti-
vated. For the Manual Park Release operation
(Continued)
information Ú page 323.
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the

WARNING! vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may WARNING!
 AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not AutoPark. If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
designed to replace the need to shift your AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and are met: vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A
should not be relied upon as the primary vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As
 Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle an added precaution, always apply the parking
8-speed transmission
into PARK. brake when exiting the vehicle.
 Vehicle is not in PARK
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off  Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less 4WD Low — If Equipped
the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.  Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions  Driver’s door is ajar vehicle in 4WD LOW.
are met: The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
 Brake pedal is not pressed
 Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an displayed in the instrument cluster.
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
8-speed transmission Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster. Additional customer warnings will be given when
 Vehicle is not in PARK all of these conditions are met:
NOTE:
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be  Vehicle is not in PARK
 Ignition is switched from ON/RUN to ACC displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the  Driver’s door is ajar
“AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear” to
NOTE:  Vehicle is in 4WD Low range
not be seen. In these cases, the shifter must be
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
returned to “P” to select desired gear.
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
change to ACC position. After 30 minutes the If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark. chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into
ignition switches to OFF automatically, unless the PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
driver turns the ignition switch OFF. AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the “P” in the instrument
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to cluster display and near the shifter. As an added
P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if precaution, always apply the parking brake when
vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). exiting the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
TIP START F EATURE NOTE: position. If vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark
Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition obtained without pumping or pressing the accel- Ú page 105.
switch briefly to the START position and release it. erator pedal. ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
The starter motor will continue to run and will Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
automatically disengage when the engine is NEUTRAL Position)
Button
running.
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. to an ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF,
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position. ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition positions
This feature allows the driver to operate the
without starting the vehicle and use the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE 4
accessories, follow these directions:
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is START/STOP button must be held for two
in the passenger compartment. seconds or three short pushes in a row with 1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE before the engine will shut off. The ignition will place the ignition to the ACC position.
START/STOP B UTTON remain in the ACC position until the gear 3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/ selector is in PARK and the button is pushed second time to place the ignition to the ON/
STOP Button twice to the OFF position. RUN position.
1. The transmission must be in PARK. 4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the 4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once time to return the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the ENGINE START/STOP button once. the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle If Engine Fails To Start
3. The system takes over and attempts to start Not In Park” message and the engine will
If the engine fails to start after you have followed
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the “Normal Starting” procedure, it may be
starter will disengage automatically after the PARK position, or it could roll.
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to
10 seconds.
NOTE: the floor and hold it there while the engine is
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine cranking. This should clear any excess fuel in case
prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the the engine is flooded.
START/STOP button again.
vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
will shut off and the ignition will remain in the ACC 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs,
release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, The starter should not be operated for more than
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal but not have enough power to continue running 25-second intervals. Waiting a few minutes
Starting” procedure. when the ignition button/key is released. If this between such intervals will protect the starter from
occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator overheating.
WARNING! pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key once WARNING!
 Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the engine is running smoothly.
the throttle body air inlet opening in an  Do not leave children or animals inside parked
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result If the engine shows no sign of starting after a vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
in flash fire causing serious personal injury. 10 second period of engine cranking with the may cause serious injury or death.
accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to
 Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to  When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto- procedure. key fob and lock your vehicle.
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic COLD WEATHER OPERATION access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
(B ELOW –22°F OR −30°C) dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
 If the vehicle has a discharged battery, others could be seriously or fatally injured.
use of an externally powered electric engine block
booster cables may be used to obtain a start Children should be warned not to touch the
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
from a booster battery or the battery in parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
recommended.
another vehicle. This type of start can be selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 320. AFTER S TARTING the vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition of a
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in
CAUTION! will decrease as the engine warms up. the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE move the vehicle.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
your seat belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine the ENGINE START/STOP button once will turn
prior to the engine starting, remove your foot the engine off. The ignition will remain in the
Start the engine with the transmission in the from the brake pedal and push the ENGINE ACC position.
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake before START/STOP button again. 5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h),
shifting to any driving range.
the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
Tip Start Feature NOTE: for two seconds (or three short pushes in a
 Normal starting of either a cold or a warm row) to turn the engine off. The ignition will
Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing remain in the ACC position (NOT the OFF
switch briefly to the START position and release it.
the accelerator pedal. position) if the engine is turned off when the
The starter motor will continue to run and will
automatically disengage when the engine is  Under cold weather conditions, the engine may transmission is not in PARK.
running. not immediately crank if the "Wait to Start" tell- 4
tale is illuminated. This is normal operation. For NOTE:
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, If the ignition is left in the ACC or ON/RUN (engine
the vehicle will automatically crank when the not running) position and the transmission is in
This feature allows the driver to operate the
"Wait to Start" time has elapsed Ú page 111. PARK, the system will automatically time out after
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition return to
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is
TO TURN OFF THE ENGINE USING ENGINE the OFF position.
in the passenger compartment.
START/STOP BUTTON
Normal Starting ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON FUNCTIONS —
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push WITH DRIVER’S FOOT OFF THE BRAKE PEDAL
USING THE ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
(IN PARK OR NEUTRAL POSITION)
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
1. The transmission must be in PARK or The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
NEUTRAL. 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the to an ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF,
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition switch
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle positions without starting the vehicle and use the
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
Not In Park” message and the engine will accessories follow these steps:
3. The system takes over and attempts to start remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the the PARK position, or it could roll. 1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
starter will disengage automatically after 25 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the
seconds. change the ignition to the ACC position.
vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a 3. While the "Wait to Start" telltale is on, the NOTE:
second time to change the ignition to the RUN instrument cluster will additionally display a  Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
position. gauge or bar whose initial length represents 1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third the full "Wait to Start" time period. Its length Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to
time to return the ignition to the OFF position. will decrease until it disappears when the improve engine warm-up.
"Wait to Start" time has elapsed.
 The engine will not automatically crank after the
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Starting Procedure — engine "Wait to Start" telltale goes off if a door
CAUTION!
Engine Manifold Air Temperature 0°F To or the hood is ajar.
66°F (–18°C to 19°C) If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
 If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left
DO NOT START the engine before you drain the
NOTE: ON for more than two minutes after the “Wait to
water from the fuel filters to avoid engine
The temperature displayed in the instrument Start” telltale goes out, reset the intake air
damage Ú page 347.
cluster does not necessarily reflect the engine heater by turning the ignition switch to the OFF
manifold air temperature Ú page 81. When position for at least 5 seconds and then back
engine temperatures fall below 66°F (19°C) the 4. After the engine “Wait to Start” telltale goes ON. Repeat steps 1 through 6 of “Keyless
“Wait To Start” telltale will remain on indicating the off, the engine will automatically crank. Enter ‘n Go™ Starting Procedure – Engine Mani-
intake air heater system is active. fold Air Temperature 0°F To 66°F (–18°C to
CAUTION! 19°C).”
Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting”
procedure except: Do not crank engine for more than 25 seconds EXTREME COLD WEATHER
1. Pushing the engine start button with the at a time or starter motor damage may result.
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine is equipped
driver’s foot on the brake will move the
wait at least two minutes for the starter to cool with several features designed to assist cold
ignition from OFF or ACC to RUN, and will
before repeating start procedure. weather starting and operation:
illuminate the "Wait to Start" telltale. The
engine will not immediately crank, this is  The engine block heater is a resistance heater
normal operation. 5. After engine start-up, check to see that there is installed in the water jacket of the engine just
oil pressure. above and behind the oil filter. It requires a
2. The “Wait to Start" telltale will remain on for a
110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
period of time that varies depending on the 6. Release the parking brake and drive.
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
engine temperature.
NOTE: 4. Place the ignition switch in the START position 1. The “Wait to Start” telltale will remain on for a
The engine block heater cord is a factory installed and crank the engine. Do not press the period of time that varies depending on the
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords accelerator during starting. engine temperature.
are available from an authorized Mopar® dealer. 2. While the “Wait to Start” telltale is on, the
 A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter housings CAUTION! instrument cluster will additionally display a
aid in preventing fuel gelling. It is controlled by a Do not crank engine for more than 25 seconds gauge or bar whose initial length represents
built-in thermostat. at a time or starter motor damage may result. the full “Wait to Start” time period. Its length
 An intake air heater system both improves Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and will decrease until it disappears when the
engine starting and reduces the amount of wait at least two minutes for the starter to cool “Wait to Start” time has elapsed.
white smoke generated by a warming engine. before repeating start procedure.
CAUTION! 4
NORMAL STARTING PROCEDURE — If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
5. Check that the Oil Pressure Warning Light has
ENGINE MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE turned off. DO NOT START the engine before you drain the
ABOVE 66°F (19°C) 6. Release the parking brake. water from the fuel filters to avoid engine
damage Ú page 347.
Observe the instrument panel cluster lights when
starting the engine. STARTING PROCEDURE — ENGINE
3. After the “Wait to Start” telltale goes off, place
1. Always apply the parking brake. MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE 0°F T O the ignition switch in the START position. Do
2. Shift into PARK for an automatic transmission. 66°F (–18°C TO 19°C) not press the accelerator during starting.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN NOTE:
position and watch the instrument panel CAUTION!
The temperature displayed in the instrument
cluster lights. cluster does not necessarily reflect the engine Do not crank engine for more than 25 seconds
manifold air temperature Ú page 81. When at a time or starter motor damage may result.
CAUTION! engine temperatures fall below 66°F (19°C) the Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, “Wait To Start” telltale will remain on indicating the wait at least two minutes for the starter to cool
DO NOT START the engine before you drain the intake air heater system is active. before repeating start procedure.
water from the fuel filters to avoid engine Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting”
damage Ú page 347. procedure except:
4. After engine start-up, check that the Oil STARTING PROCEDURE — ENGINE to Start” telltale turns off and the engine is
Pressure Warning Light has turned off. started, recycle the intake air heater by turning
MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE B ELOW the ignition switch to the OFF position for at
5. Release the parking brake and drive.
0°F (-18°C) least five seconds and then back to the ON/
NOTE: RUN position.
In extremely cold weather below 0°F (-18°C) it
 Engine idle speed will automatically increase to may be beneficial to cycle the intake air heater 3. If the vehicle is driven and vehicle speed
1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry twice before attempting to start the engine. This exceeds 19 mph (31 km/h) before the intake
Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to can be accomplished by turning the ignition to OFF air heater post-heat (after start) cycle is
improve engine warm-up. position for at least five seconds and then back to complete, the intake air heater will shut off.
 Automatic equipped vehicles with optional the ON/RUN position after the “Wait to Start” 4. If the engine is cranked for more than
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ – If the ENGINE START/ telltale has turned off, but before the engine is 10 seconds, the post-heat cycle will turn off.
STOP button is pushed once while in PARK with started. However, excessive cycling of the intake
the ignition off and driver’s foot on the brake air heater will result in damage to the heater NOTE:
pedal, the vehicle will automatically crank and elements or reduced battery voltage.  Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
start after the “Wait to Start” time has elapsed. NOTE: 1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry
If it is desired to abort the start process before it If multiple pre-heat cycles are used before starting, Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to
completes, the driver’s foot should be fully additional engine run time may be required to improve engine warm-up.
removed from the brake pedal prior to pushing maintain battery state of charge at a satisfactory  When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of
the start button again in order for the ignition to level. fuel or the fuel gels at low temperatures, air is
move directly to off. 1. If the engine stalls after the initial start, the pulled into the fuel system. If your engine has
 If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left ignition must be turned to the OFF position for run out of fuel Ú page 350.
on for more than two minutes after the “Wait To at least five seconds and then to the ON/RUN  If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left
Start” telltale goes out, reset the intake air position to recycle the intake air heater. on for more than two minutes after the “Wait to
heater by turning the ignition switch to the OFF NOTE: Start” telltale goes out, reset the intake air
position for at least five seconds and then back heater by turning the ignition switch to the OFF
Excessive white smoke and poor engine perfor-
to the ON/RUN position. Repeat steps 1 through position for at least five seconds and then back
mance will result if intake air heater is not recycled.
5 of “Starting Procedure – Engine Manifold Air to the ON/RUN position. Repeat steps 1 through
Temperature 0°F To 66°F (–18°C to 19°C).” 2. Heat generated by the intake air heater
dissipates rapidly in a cold engine. If more than 5 of “Starting Procedure – Engine Manifold Air
two minutes pass between the time the “Wait Temperature 0°F to 60°F (-18°C to 19°C).”
STARTING FLUIDS WARNING! NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE

 Do not leave children or animals inside parked Observe the following when the engine is
WARNING!
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up operating.
Starting fluids or flammable liquids must never may cause serious injury or death.  All message center lights are off.
be used in the Cummins® diesel engine (see
Warning label). Never pour diesel fuel,  When leaving the vehicle, always remove the  Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
flammable liquid, starting fluids (ether) into the key fob and lock your vehicle.  Engine oil pressure is above 10 psi (69 kPa) at
air cleaner canister, air intake piping, or  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with idle.
turbocharger inlet in an attempt to start the access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-  Voltmeter operation:
vehicle. This could result in a flash fire and dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
explosion causing serious personal injury and The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at 4
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
engine damage. various engine temperatures. This cycling
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
operation is caused by the post-heat cycle of the
Children should be warned not to touch the
intake manifold heater system. The number of
The engine is equipped with an automatic electric parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
cycles and the length of the cycling operation is
air preheating system. If the instructions in this selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near
controlled by the engine control module. Post-heat
manual are followed, the engine should start in all the vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
operation can run for several minutes, and then
conditions. dren), and do not leave the ignition of a
the electrical system and voltmeter needle will
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in
stabilize.
the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or The cycling action will cause temporary dimming of
move the vehicle. the headlamps, interior lamps, and also a
noticeable reduction in blower motor speed.
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS NOTE: Engine Oil Usage

 Use of Climatized ULSD or Number 1 ULSD Fuel For the correct engine oil viscosity Ú page 341.
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F
results in a noticeable decrease in fuel
(0°C) may require special considerations. The
economy. Winter Front Cover Usage
following charts suggest these options: A Winter front or cold weather cover is to be used
 Climatized ULSD Fuel is a blend of Number 2
Fuel Operating Range ULSD and Number 1 ULSD Fuels which reduces in ambient temperatures below 32°F (0°C),
especially during extended idle conditions. This
NOTE: the temperature at which wax crystals form in
cover is equipped with four flaps for managing
Use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) Fuels ONLY. fuel.
total grille opening in varying ambient
 The fuel grade should be clearly marked on the temperatures. If a Winter front or cold weather
pump at the fuel station. cover is to be used the flaps should be left in the
 The engine requires the use of ULSD Fuel. Use full open position to allow air flow to the charge air
of incorrect fuel could result in engine and cooler and automatic transmission oil cooler.
exhaust system damage Ú page 399. When ambient temperatures drop below 0°F
 If climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD Fuel is
(-17°C) the four flaps need to be closed. A suitable
not available, and you are operating below cold weather cover is available from a Mopar®
(20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions, dealer.
Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or Battery Blanket Usage
equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling A battery loses 60% of its cranking power as the
(see Fuel Operating Range Chart). battery temperature decreases to 0°F (-18°C). For
 Under some circumstances increased engine the same decrease in temperature, the engine
noise may be audible in the seconds following a requires twice as much power to crank at the same
cold start. This is most likely to occur when using RPM. The use of 120 Volt AC powered battery
Fuel Operating Range Chart fuel that isn't blended for the ambient tempera- blankets will greatly increase starting capability at
*Number 1 ULSD Fuel should only be used where ture present. This may occur on an unseasonably low temperatures. Suitable battery blankets are
extended arctic conditions (0°F/-18°C) exist. cold day or when a truck is fueled in a warmer available from an authorized Mopar® dealer.
climate and driven to a colder climate. The noise
can typically be prevented by using Mopar®
Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment as recom-
mended (see Fuel Operating Range Chart).
Engine Warm-Up  Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h). This operating mode may last for up to an hour of
 Applying the throttle will cancel fast idle. idle time, or around 20 minutes of driving time.
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is
cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the engine  Operating the exhaust brake at idle will greatly Your truck may have been ordered with an optional
up to operating speed slowly to allow the oil improve warm-up rate and will help keep the voltage monitoring idle up feature. If a load is
pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up. engine close to operating temperature during placed on the electrical system while the truck is in
extended idle. PARK, this feature will attempt to maintain normal
NOTE:
system voltage by automatically increasing engine
High-speed, no-load running of a cold engine can
result in excessive white smoke and poor engine
ENGINE IDLING idle speed. You may notice several consecutive
increases in idle speed, up to a maximum of
performance. No-load engine speeds should be Avoid prolonged idling. Long periods of idling may
1,450 RPM, as the system will attempt to utilize
kept under 1,000 RPM during the warm-up period, be harmful to your engine because combustion
especially in cold ambient temperature conditions. chamber temperatures can drop so low that the
the smallest increase in idle speed necessary to 4
maintain normal system voltage. The idle speed
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine warm-up fuel may not burn completely. Incomplete
will return to normal when either the electrical load
protection feature that may limit engine combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on
is removed, or when the brake pedal is applied.
performance after cold starting at low ambient piston rings, engine valves, and injector nozzles.
temperatures. The length of time engine speed is Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, NOTE:
limited is dependent upon engine coolant diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the For instrument cluster display messages related to
temperature. Engine speed may be briefly limited engine. the vehicle's exhaust system Ú page 81.
to 1,000 RPM after starting with coolant If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is driven Idle-Up Feature
temperature below freezing conditions, and may on low engine speed drive cycles for more than two The driver-controlled high idle speed feature will
be limited to 1,000 RPM for up to approximately hours, the system will automatically enter an help increase cylinder temperatures and provide
two minutes under more severe cold conditions. emissions operating mode that will increase the additional cab heat, however, excessive idling may
NOTE: engine idle speed to 900 RPM (1,050 RPM for still cause the exhaust after-treatment system to
If ambient temperatures are low and the coolant Chassis Cab). While in this mode, which is not properly regenerate. Extended periods of idle
temperature is below 180°F (82°C), the engine designed to help maintain the Diesel Particulate time should be avoided.
idle speed will slowly increase to 1,000 RPM after Filter, the engine idle speed will return to normal
The Idle-Up feature uses the Cruise Control buttons
two minutes of idle, if the following conditions are when the brake pedal is applied. A small change in
to increase engine idle speed and quickly warm the
met: engine tone or a slight change in engine
vehicle's interior.
performance while accelerating may also be
 Foot is off brake pedal and throttle pedal.
noticeable at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h).
 Automatic transmission is in PARK.
1. With the transmission in PARK, the parking NOISE directly into the SCR through an dosing module.
brake applied, and the engine running, turn This process will create a clicking sound and at
on the Cruise Control, then push the SET (-) Diesel engines can create noises that may seem times, will make noise even with the vehicle shut
button. as a concern. The nature of a diesel engine is off. This is normal as the DEF dosing module is
compression ignition where compressed air and purging DEF. If at any time the check engine light is
2. The engine RPM will go up to 1,100 RPM. To
fuel are mixed and ignited. Weather, barometric on, please visit an authorized dealer.
increase the RPM, push and hold the RES (+)
pressure, altitude and temperature will affect how
button and the idle speed will increase to STOPPING THE ENGINE
fuel is ignited in the engine. Engines will sound
approximately 1,500 RPM. To decrease the
different from day to day or previous model years.
RPM, push and hold the SET (-) button and the Idle the engine a few minutes before routine
Clicking, ticking, or light knocking is normal and will
idle speed will decrease to approximately shutdown. After full load operation, idle the engine
change from day to day, as the engine breaks in,
1,100 RPM. three to five minutes before shutting it down. This
and can vary with changes in ambient
3. To cancel the Idle–Up feature, either push the idle period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant
temperature; this is normal. Diesel equipped
CANCEL button, push the ON/OFF button, or to carry excess heat away from the combustion
vehicles also have an exhaust after treatment
press the brake pedal. chamber, bearings, internal components, and
system to reduce emissions utilizing a Diesel
turbocharger. This is especially important for
Particulate Filter (DPF) and a Selective Reduction
turbocharged, charge air-cooled engines. Refer to
Catalyst (SCR). The SCR reduces Nox using the
the following chart for proper engine shutdown:
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) system. DEF is injected
Idle Time (min.) Before Engine

Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature
Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool Less than One
Stop and Go Medium - One
Highway Speeds Medium Warm Two
City Traffic Maximum GCWR - Three
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR - Four
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot Five
I DLE SHUTDOWN OPERATING P RECAUTIONS COOLING SYSTEM T IPS

This feature can be enabled so that the truck will Avoid Overheating The Engine To reduce potential for engine and transmission
automatically shutdown when the truck has been overheating in high ambient temperature
The temperature of the engine coolant (antifreeze:
idling for a set period of time when the engine is at conditions, take the following actions:
a mixture of 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% water)
operating temperature. Idle time can be set in  City Driving — When stopped, shift the transmis-
must not exceed the normal range of the
5 minute increments between 5 and 60 minutes. sion into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle
temperature gauge 240°F (116°C) with a 21 psi
See an authorized dealer to enable this feature. speed.
(145 kPa) coolant pressure cap.
NOTE: Usually the engine coolant (antifreeze)  Highway Driving — Reduce your speed.
The idle shut down timer is disabled while the PTO temperature indicated during operation will be to  Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission
(Power Take-off) is active. the left of center in the normal range of the gauge. gear. 4
PROGRAMMABLE MAXIMUM VEHICLE Avoid Low Coolant Temperature Operation  Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily.
S PEED Continual operation at low engine coolant Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
(antifreeze) temperature below the normal range
This feature allows the owner to set a maximum Pressure
on the gauge 140°F (60°C) can be harmful to the
vehicle speed for the vehicle. The 2500 and When the engine is at normal operating
engine. Low engine coolant (antifreeze)
3500 Series maximum vehicle speed can be set temperature, the minimum oil pressures required
temperature can cause incomplete combustion
between 40 mph to 87 mph (64 km/h to are:
which allows carbon and varnish to form on piston
140 km/h). The 4500/5500 Series maximum
rings and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel Idle 700 to 800 RPM 10 psi (69 kPa)
vehicle speed can be set between 40 mph to
can enter the crankcase, diluting the lubricating oil
85 mph (64 km/h to 136 km/h). See an Full speed and load 30 psi (207 kPa)
and causing rapid wear to the engine.
authorized dealer to enable this feature.
NOTE:
DO NOT set the maximum vehicle speed to a value CAUTION!
greater than what the vehicle tires are rated for. If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings,
shut the engine off immediately. Failure to do so
could result in immediate and severe engine
damage.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
Parts
All engine failures give some warning before the
The engine block heater warms the engine, and GASOLINE ENGINE
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the
parts fail. Be on the alert for changes in cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical A long break-in period is not required for the engine
performance, sounds, and visual evidence that the outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
engine requires service. Some important clues are: vehicle.
The engine block heater cord is routed behind the
 Engine misfiring or vibrating severely. front bumper and accessible through the right hole Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
 Sudden loss of power. of the air dam. (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
 Unusual engine noises. The engine block heater must be plugged in at desirable.
 Fuel, oil or coolant leaks.
least one hour to have an adequate warming effect
on the engine. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
 Sudden change, outside the normal operating the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
range, in the engine operating temperature. It includes a removable cap that is secured by a break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
tethered strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
 Excessive smoke. storage when not in use for the Winter months.
 Oil pressure drop. During Winter months, remove the heater cord The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
wiring assembly from itself on the c-clip. is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
DIESEL P ARTICULATE F ILTER (DPF) Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
NOTE: climate conditions under which vehicle operations
MANUAL R EGENERATION — I F E QUIPPED The block heater will require 110 Volt AC and will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
On equipped Chassis Cabs, a manual regeneration 6.5 Amps to activate the heater element. quality grades Ú page 404.
can be enable through the instrument cluster. The Block Heater Usage
manual regeneration will allow the DPF to For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), CAUTION!
complete a regeneration, lowering the soot level engine block heater usage is recommended. Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
without having to drive the vehicle. The vehicle
For ambient temperatures below –20°F (-29°C), Oil in the engine or damage may result.
must be in PARK to access this feature, and the
fuel level must be over 12.5% full. A message engine block heater usage is required.
displaying the time left on the regeneration will NOTE:
appear on the instrument cluster, and the A new engine may consume some oil during its first
instrument cluster will display the soot level few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
Ú page 81. should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem. Please check For additional vehicle break-in requirements When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often Ú page 177. switch ON, the Brake Warning Light in the
during the break in period. Add oil as required. Because of the construction of the Cummins® instrument cluster will illuminate.
Turbo Diesel engine, engine run-in is enhanced by NOTE:
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — loaded operating conditions which allow the  When the parking brake is applied and the
DIESEL ENGINE engine parts to achieve final finish and fit during
the first 6,000 miles (10,000 km).
transmission is placed in gear, the Brake
Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine does not detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver.
require a break-in period due to its construction. PARKING BRAKE Fully release the parking brake before
Normal operation is allowed, providing the attempting to move the vehicle.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
following recommendations are followed:
 This light only shows that the parking brake is
4
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to
 Warm up the engine before placing it under leave the transmission in PARK. applied. It does not show the degree of brake
load. application.
The foot operated parking brake is located below
 Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
periods. apply the parking brake, firmly push the parking front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
 Use the appropriate transmission gear to brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, pull and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
prevent engine lugging. the parking brake release handle. the parking brake before placing the gear selector
in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
 Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
indicators.
the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
 Check the coolant and oil levels frequently. should always be applied whenever the driver is
 Vary throttle position at highway speeds when not in the vehicle.
carrying or towing significant weight.
WARNING!
NOTE:
 Never use the PARK position as a substitute
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or
no load operation will extend the time before the for the parking brake. Always apply the
engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy parking brake fully when parked to guard
and power may be seen at this time. against vehicle movement and possible injury
Parking Brake Release or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE

 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with (ENGINE BRAKING)
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unat-
tended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a The purpose of the exhaust brake (engine braking)
number of reasons. A child or others could be feature is to supply negative (braking) torque from
seriously or fatally injured. the engine. Typically, the engine braking is used
for, but not limited to, vehicle towing applications
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, where vehicle braking can be achieved by the
or in a location accessible to children, and do internal engine power, thereby sparing the
not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless mechanical brakes of the vehicle.
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Exhaust Brake Switch
Benefits of the exhaust brake are:
A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.  Vehicle driving control. Once the Exhaust Brake Indicator is illuminated
and the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph
 Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged  Reduced brake fade.
(8 km/h); the exhaust brake will automatically
before driving; failure to do so can lead to  Longer brake life. operate when the driver removes pressure from
brake failure and a collision. the accelerator pedal. Exhaust braking is most
 Faster cab warm-up.
 Always fully apply the parking brake when effective when the engine RPM is higher. The
The exhaust brake feature will only function when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause automatic transmission will downshift more
the driver toggles it on by pushing the exhaust
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave the aggressively in TOW/HAUL mode when the exhaust
brake button until the Exhaust Brake Indicator is
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may brake is enabled to increase brake performance.
illuminated. Normal (Full Strength) exhaust brake
cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or mode is indicated by a yellow Exhaust Brake
injury. WARNING!
Indicator.
Do not use the exhaust brake feature when
driving in icy or slippery conditions as the
CAUTION! increased engine braking can cause the rear
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around
with the parking brake released, a brake system with the possible loss of vehicle control, which
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system may cause an accident possibly resulting in
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. personal injury or death.
Indicator” in the instrument cluster display will

CAUTION! change from Yellow to Green when Automatic WARNING!
Use of aftermarket exhaust brakes is not recom- “Smart” Exhaust Brake is enabled. Pushing the  Unintended movement of a vehicle could
mended and could lead to engine damage. exhaust brake button again will toggle the exhaust injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
brake mode to off. vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
NOTE: the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
For optimum braking power it is recommended to
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
use the exhaust brake while in TOW/HAUL mode. You must press and hold the brake pedal while
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the
The exhaust brake feature can also be used to shifting out of PARK.
key fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF
reduce the engine warm-up time. To use the exhaust
brake as a warm-up device, the vehicle must be WARNING! (key removal) position, (or, with Keyless Enter 4
‘n Go™, when the ignition is in the OFF posi-
stopped or moving less than 5 mph (8 km/h), the  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or tion) the transmission is locked in PARK,
Exhaust Brake Indicator must be on, and the coolant NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than securing the vehicle against unwanted move-
temperature must be below 180°F (82°C) and idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing ment.
ambient temperature below 60°F (16°C). the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake technology key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
delivers smoother, less aggressive exhaust something. Only shift into gear when the
braking characteristics during downhill descents. engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly  Never use the PARK position as a substitute
Although it can apply full exhaust braking force if pressing the brake pedal. for the parking brake. Always apply the
needed, Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake may parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
 The transmission may not engage PARK if the
not apply obvious braking if the vehicle speed is guard against vehicle movement and possible
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
not increasing. Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake injury or damage.
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
is intended to maintain vehicle speed, while Full verify that the transmission gear position indi-  Your vehicle could move and injure you and
Exhaust Brake is intended to reduce vehicle speed. cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake can be enabled blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely move the gear selector out of PARK with the
by pushing the exhaust brake button (on the center stopped, and the PARK position is properly brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
stack) again anytime after the normal Full Exhaust indicated, before exiting the vehicle. mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
Brake has been turned on. The “Exhaust Brake (Continued) (Continued)
WARNING!
I GNITION PARK INTERLOCK (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must
be pressed.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
The BTSI will timeout if brake pedal is pressed for
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil- Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
three minutes or longer continuously while in park.
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF
It can be reset by releasing the brake for more then
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or position. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently
three seconds, then reapplying the brake pedal or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. leaving the vehicle without placing the
cycling the ignition.
Children should be warned not to touch the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis- transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in 8-SPEED A UTOMATIC T RANSMISSION —
the OFF position.
sion gear selector. I F E QUIPPED
NOTE:
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle The transmission is controlled using a rotary
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
(or in a location accessible to children), and do electronic gear selector located on the instrument
ignition is in the ACC position (even though the
not leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped panel. The transmission gear range (PRND) is
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) in the ACC or ON/ displayed both above the gear selector and in the
in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
RUN position. A child could operate power instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply
position) before exiting the vehicle.
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. rotate the gear selector. You must press the brake
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or
CAUTION! I NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
 Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the
the vehicle has come to a complete stop. holds the transmission gear selector in PARK gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
unless the brakes are applied. For vehicles with DRIVE range for normal driving.
 Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, 8-speed transmission, to shift the transmission out
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above NOTE:
of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
idle speed. In the event of a mismatch between the gear
pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also
selector position and the actual transmission gear
 Before shifting into any gear, make sure your be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
(for example, driver selects PARK while driving),
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
the position indicator will blink continuously until
low speeds. For vehicles with 6-speed
the selector is returned to the proper position, or
transmission, to shift the transmission out of
the requested shift can be completed.
PARK, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
The electronically controlled transmission adapts When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
with environmental and road conditions. The added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
transmission electronics are self-calibrating; curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may on an uphill grade.
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, NOTE:
and precision shifts will develop within a few On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
hundred miles (kilometers). transfer case is in a drive position.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when When exiting the vehicle, always:
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
 Apply the parking brake.
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake Electronic Transmission Gear Selector 4
pedal when shifting between these gears.  Shift the transmission into PARK.
Gear Ranges  Turn the engine off.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
 Remove the key fob.
downshifts can be made using the Electronic from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
Range Select (ERS) shift control. Pushing the GEAR NOTE: WARNING!
“-”/GEAR “+” switches (on the steering wheel) After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
while in the DRIVE position will select the highest  Never use the PARK position as a substitute
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
available transmission gear, and will display that for the parking brake. Always apply the
ating. This is especially important when the engine
gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
is cold.
Ú page 125. Some models will display both the guard against vehicle movement and possible
PARK (P) injury or damage.
selected gear limit, and the actual current gear,
while in ERS mode. This range supplements the parking brake by
 Your vehicle could move and injure you and
locking the transmission. The engine can be
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
move the transmission gear selector out of
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to ensure

WARNING! WARNING! that you have properly engaged the transmission
 The transmission may not engage PARK if the  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure into the PARK position:
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the  Look at the transmission gear position display
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P),
verify that the transmission gear position indi- and is not blinking.
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-  With the brake pedal released, verify that the
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is gear selector will not move out of PARK.
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or REVERSE (R)
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or Children should be warned not to touch the This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis- Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing sion gear selector. to a complete stop.
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate NEUTRAL (N)
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
control of the vehicle and hit someone or prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
something. Only shift into gear when the the parking brake and shift the transmission into
position. A child could operate power
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
pressing the brake pedal.
 Unintended movement of a vehicle could WARNING!
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all CAUTION! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, practices that limit your response to changing
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
always come to a complete stop, then apply traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
this can damage the drivetrain.
the parking brake, shift the transmission into of the vehicle and have a collision.
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the  Before moving the transmission gear selector
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis- out of PARK, you must start the engine, and
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
against unwanted movement. damage to the gear selector could result.
(Continued)
operation will resume once the transmission 1. Stop the vehicle.

CAUTION! temperature has risen to a suitable level. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any Transmission Limp Home Mode not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
Transmission function is monitored electronically 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
can cause severe transmission damage.
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected engine turns off.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 325. that could result in transmission damage, 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 185. Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this
5. Restart the engine.
mode, the transmission may operate only in
certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
DRIVE (D) performance may be severely degraded and the problem is no longer detected, the
This range should be used for most city and engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission will return to normal operation. 4
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator NOTE:
transmission automatically upshifts through all Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the Even if the transmission can be reset, we
forward gears. instrument cluster will inform the driver of the recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
more serious conditions, and indicate what actions your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading may be necessary.
condition of your transmission.
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong In the event of a momentary problem, the
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select transmission can be reset to regain all forward If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
TOW/HAUL mode or use the Electronic Range gears by performing the following steps: dealer service is required.
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear NOTE: Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
range Ú page 125. Under these conditions, using In cases where the instrument cluster message The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the
a lower gear range will improve performance and indicates the transmission may not re-engage after highest available gear when the transmission is in
extend transmission life by reducing excessive engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission
shifting and heat build-up. desired location (preferably, at an authorized gear limit to FOURTH gear, the transmission will
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F dealer). not shift above FOURTH gear (except to prevent
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be engine overspeed), but will shift through the lower
modified depending on engine and transmission gears normally.
temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in
any vehicle speed. When the transmission gear WARNING! the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL
selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will operate Do not downshift for additional engine braking mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a
automatically, shifting between all available gears. on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could second time restores normal operation. Normal
Tapping the GEAR “–” switch (on the steering lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, operation is always the default at engine start-up.
wheel) will activate ERS mode, display the current causing a collision or personal injury. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be
gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as pushed each time the engine is started.
the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping
the GEAR “–” or GEAR “+” switch will change the When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode WARNING!
top available gear. When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying
Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving
a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission
in icy or slippery conditions. The increased
shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to
engine braking can cause the rear wheels to
activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve
slide, and the vehicle to swing around with the
performance and reduce the potential for
possible loss of vehicle control, which may
transmission overheating or failure due to
cause an accident possibly resulting in personal
excessive shifting.
injury or death.
6-SPEED A UTOMATIC T RANSMISSION —

I F E QUIPPED
ERS Control Chassis Cab models may use either the AS66RC or
AS69RC transmission (which are equipped with a
1 — GEAR “+” Switch Power Take-Off (PTO) access cover on the side of
2 — GEAR “–” Switch the transmission case).
The transmission gear position display (located in
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission
GEAR “+” switch until the gear limit display TOW/HAUL Switch gear range. The gear selector is mounted on the
disappears from the instrument cluster. right side of the steering column. You must press
the brake pedal to move the gear selector out of Gear Ranges When exiting the vehicle, always:
PARK Ú page 122. Pull the gear selector toward  Apply the parking brake.
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.  Shift the transmission into PARK.
shifting out of PARK.
NOTE:  Turn the engine off.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
a precise shift schedule. The transmission  Remove the key fob.
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first
ating. This is especially important when the engine WARNING!
few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat
is cold.
abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision  Never use the PARK position as a substitute
shifts will develop within a few hundred miles PARK (P)
for the parking brake. Always apply the
(kilometers). This range supplements the parking brake by parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to 4
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when locking the transmission. The engine can be guard against vehicle movement and possible
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK injury or damage.
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.  Your vehicle could move and injure you and
pedal when shifting between these gears.
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. before shifting the transmission to PARK,
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
Manual downshifts can be made using the otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control. mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
Pushing the ERS (“-”/”+”) switches (on the steering selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
highest available transmission gear, and will grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as NOTE: the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
1, 2, 3, etc. Ú page 130. Some models will display On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
both the selected gear limit, and the actual current transfer case is in a drive position. control of the vehicle and hit someone or
gear, while in ERS mode. something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING! CAUTION!
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
 Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure  Before moving the transmission gear selector prolonged periods with the engine running. The
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the engine may be started in this range. Apply the
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine ON/RUN position, and also press the brake parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK
is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector if you must exit the vehicle.
come to a complete stop, then apply the could result.
parking brake, shift the transmission into WARNING!
 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key
removal) position (or, with Keyless Enter ‘n this can damage the drivetrain. ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
Go™, when the ignition is in the OFF position), practices that limit your response to changing
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing The following indicators should be used to ensure traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
the vehicle against unwanted movement. that you have properly engaged the transmission of the vehicle and have a collision.
 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
into the PARK position:
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the  When shifting into PARK, pull the gear selector
CAUTION!
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. toward you and move it all the way counterclock-
wise until it stops. Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
 Release the gear selector and make sure it is
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
fully seated in the PARK gate. can cause severe transmission damage.
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
for a number of reasons. A child or others could  Look at the transmission gear position display For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 325.
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P). For Recreational Towing Ú page 185.
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
 With the brake pedal released, verify that the
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
gear selector will not move out of PARK. DRIVE (D)
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
REVERSE (R) This range should be used for most city and
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped This range is for moving the vehicle backward. highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) in the ACC or ON/ Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
RUN position. A child could operate power to a complete stop. transmission automatically upshifts through all
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped in speeds, it will initially engage FIFTH gear, until the
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading heavy traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat vehicle slows to a speed where THIRD gear can be
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong generation. engaged. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select During cold temperatures, transmission operation continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator
TOW/HAUL mode or use the Electronic Range may be modified depending on engine and Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Transmission Limp
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear transmission temperature as well as vehicle Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
range Ú page 130. Under these conditions, using speed. This feature improves warm-up time of the authorized dealer for service without damaging the
a lower gear range will improve performance and engine and transmission to achieve maximum transmission.
extend transmission life by reducing excessive efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter In the event of a momentary problem, the
shifting and heat buildup. clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is transmission can be reset to regain all forward
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal warm Ú page 131. gears by performing the following steps: 4
operating limits, the powertrain controller will On trucks with AS66RC or AS69RC transmission, 1. Stop the vehicle.
modify the transmission shift schedule and expand FIFTH and SIXTH gears may be inhibited briefly on
the range of torque converter clutch engagement. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
cold starts below 41°F (5°C), and during very cold
This is done to prevent transmission damage due temperatures (-4°F [-20°C] or below), operation 3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
to overheating. may briefly be limited to third gear only. During this 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in condition, the ability of the vehicle to accelerate 5. Restart the engine.
danger of overheating, the Transmission under heavily loaded conditions may be reduced.
In all cases, normal operation will resume once the 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable problem is no longer detected, the
transmission may operate differently until the
level. transmission will return to normal operation.
transmission cools down.
NOTE: Transmission Limp Home Mode NOTE:
Use caution when operating a heavily loaded Transmission function is monitored electronically Even if the transmission can be reset, we
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
steep grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot that could result in transmission damage, your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
weather. In these conditions, torque converter slip Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
can impose a significant additional heat load on mode, the transmission remains in THIRD gear condition of your transmission.
the cooling system. Downshifting the transmission regardless of which forward gear is selected. If an If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
to the lowest possible gear (when climbing a AS66RC/AS69RC equipped truck enters dealer service is required.
Transmission Limp Home Mode at highway
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation NOTE:

The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the To select the proper gear position for maximum
highest available gear when the transmission is in deceleration (engine braking), simply push and
DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission hold the ERS “-” switch. The transmission will shift
gear limit to FOURTH gear, the transmission will to the range from which the vehicle can best be
not shift above FOURTH gear, but will shift through slowed down.
the lower gears normally.
CAUTION!
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at
any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the When using ERS for engine braking while
DRIVE position, the transmission will operate descending steep grades, be careful not to
automatically, shifting between all available gears. Electronic Range Select overspeed the engine. Apply the brakes as
Tapping the ERS “-” switch will activate ERS mode, needed to prevent engine overspeed.
1 — GEAR “+” Switch
display the current gear in the instrument cluster, 2 — GEAR “–” Switch
and set that gear as the top available gear. Once in Overdrive Operation
ERS mode, tapping “-” or “+” will change the top
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the The automatic transmission includes an
available gear.
ERS “+” switch until the gear limit display electronically controlled Overdrive (FIFTH and
disappears from the instrument cluster. SIXTH gears). The transmission will automatically
shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are
WARNING! present:
 The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could  The transmission fluid has reached an
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, adequate temperature.
causing a collision or personal injury.  The engine coolant has reached an adequate
temperature.
 Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
 The TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
 The driver is not heavily pressing the acceler-
ator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode operation is always the default at engine start-up. engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is
If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be not shifting properly when cold; this is normal.
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying
pushed each time the engine is started. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission
control, when the transmission is sufficiently
shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to
WARNING! warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is
activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve
able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
performance and reduce the potential for Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving
transmission overheating or failure due to in icy or slippery conditions. The increased  If the vehicle has not been driven for several
excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL engine braking can cause the rear wheels to days, the first few seconds of operation after
mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the slide, and the vehicle to swing around with the shifting the transmission into gear may seem
transmission will automatically downshift (for possible loss of vehicle control, which may sluggish. This is due to the fluid partially
engine braking) when the throttle is closed and/or cause an accident possibly resulting in personal draining from the torque converter into the 4
during steady braking maneuvers. injury or death. transmission. This condition is normal and will
not cause damage to the transmission. The
torque converter will refill within five seconds
Torque Converter Clutch after starting the engine.
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has
been included in the automatic transmission on AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter
engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This There can be up to six auxiliary switches located in
may result in a slightly different feeling or response the lower switch bank of the instrument panel
during normal operation in the upper gears. When which can be used to power various electronic
the vehicle speed drops or during some devices and Power Take Off (PTO). If equipped, it
accelerations, the clutch automatically will take the place of the sixth auxiliary switch.
disengages. Connections to the switches are found under the
TOW/HAUL Switch hood in the connectors attached to the auxiliary
NOTE: Power Distribution Center.
The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL  The torque converter clutch will not engage,
You have the ability to configure the functionality of
mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a until the transmission fluid and engine coolant the auxiliary switches via the instrument cluster
second time restores normal operation. Normal are warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) display. All switches can now be configured for
of driving). Because engine speed is higher setting the switch type operation to latching or
when the torque converter clutch is not
momentary, power source of either battery or 4WD HIGH

ignition, and ability to hold last state across key Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
cycles. provides torque to the front driveshaft (engages
NOTE: four-wheel drive) which allows front and rear
Holding last state conditions are met when switch wheels to spin at the same speed. This provides
type is set to latching and power source is set to additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces
ignition. only.
For further information on using the auxiliary 4WD LOW
switches, please refer to the Ram Body Builder’s Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides
Guide by accessing https://www.ramtrucks.com/ low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque
ram-commercial/body-builders-guide.html and Four-Position Transfer Case
(increased torque over 4WD High) to the front
choosing the appropriate links. This electronically shifted transfer case provides wheels, allowing front and rear wheels to rotate at
four positions: the same speed. This range provides additional
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —  Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) traction and maximum pulling power for loose,
IF EQUIPPED  Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)
slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h) in this range.
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a  Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) N (Neutral)
manually shifted transfer case or an electronically  N (Neutral)
shifted transfer case. N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front
For additional information on the appropriate use and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER of each transfer case position, see the information used for flat towing behind another vehicle
CASE (8-S PEED TRANSMISSION) — below: Ú page 185.
2WD
I F EQUIPPED
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
This is an electronically shifted transfer case and is normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer surfaced roads.
Case Switch), which is located on the instrument
panel.
When additional traction is required, the transfer If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
WARNING! case 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be 1. The current position indicator light will turn
 You or others could be injured or killed if you used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft, off.
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This is accomplished by pushing the 2. The selected position indicator light will flash
case in the N (Neutral) position without first
desired position on the four-wheel drive control until the transfer case completes the shift.
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (Neutral) position disengages both the switch. 3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light
front and rear drive shaft from the powertrain, For specific shifting instructions Ú page 137. for the selected position will stop flashing and
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the remain on.
The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions
should always be applied when the driver is
Driving in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions Are Not Met: 4
not in the vehicle.
on dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased
1. The indicator light for the current position will
 The transmission may not engage PARK if the tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
remain on.
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a NOTE:
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and 2. The newly selected position indicator light will
The transfer case N (Neutral) button is located in continue to flash.
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
the center of the four-wheel drive Control Switch
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without 3. The transfer case will not shift.
and is pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
object. The transfer case N (Neutral) position is to
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
be used for recreational towing only Ú page 185. NOTE:
indicated, before exiting the vehicle. Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD transfer case position have been met. To retry the
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed
and 4WD LOW) are located in the instrument selection, push the current position, wait five
to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD)
cluster and indicate the current and desired seconds, and retry selection Ú page 137.
for normal street and highway conditions on dry
transfer case selection. When you select a The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the
hard surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle in
different transfer case position, the indicator lights electronically shifted four-wheel drive system. If
two-wheel drive will have greater fuel economy
will do the following: this light remains on after engine start-up or
benefits as the front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. illuminates during driving, it means that the
four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
transfer case will not shift. The position indi- wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation,
WARNING! cator light for the previous position will remain the selected position indicator light will flash and
Always engage the parking brake when powering on and the newly selected position indicator the original position indicator light will remain on.
down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light light will continue to flash until all the require- At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake ments for the selected position have been met. wheels to complete the shift.
may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause  If all the requirements to select a new transfer
personal injury or death. 2WD OR 4WD HIGH TO 4WD LOW
case position have been met, the current posi-
tion indicator light will turn off, the selected posi- NOTE:
NOTE: tion indicator light will flash until the transfer When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front case completes the shift. When the shift is noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause complete, the position indicator light for the detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
damage to driveline components. selected position will stop flashing and remain Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling
on. 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of You can use either of the following procedures:
2WD TO 4WD HIGH
the two-wheel drive or 4WD HIGH positions at a Preferred Procedure
given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the Push the desired position on the four-wheel drive
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). control switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
between two-wheel drive and 4WD HIGH can be
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
depends on tires of equal size, type and the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will 3. While still rolling, push the desired position on
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in engage/disengage faster if you momentarily the transfer case control switch.
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain. release the accelerator pedal after turning the
4. After the desired position indicator light is on
Because four-wheel drive provides improved control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition
(not flashing), shift the transmission back into
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning switch must be in the ON/RUN position with the
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road gear.
engine either running or off. This shift cannot be
conditions permit. completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC Alternate Procedure
Shifting Procedure position.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
NOTE:
NOTE: 2. With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
 If any of the requirements to select a new between 2WD/4WD HIGH if the front and/or rear position and the engine running, shift the
transfer case position have not been met, the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Push the desired position on the transfer case the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
control switch. speed. This range provides additional traction for
4. After the desired position indicator light is on loose, slippery road surfaces only.
(not flashing), shift the transmission back into 4WD LOW
gear. Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides
low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to
NOTE: the front wheels, forcing the front and rear wheels
 If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alter- to rotate at the same speed. This range provides
nate Procedure are not satisfied prior to additional traction and maximum pulling power for
attempting the shift, then the desired position loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed
indicator light will flash continuously while the Four-Position/Part-Time Transfer Case 25 mph (40 km/h). 4
original position indicator light is on, until all
This electronically shifted transfer case provides N (Neutral)
requirements have been met.
four positions: N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front
 The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN posi-
 Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
tion for a shift to take place and for the position
 Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH) used for flat towing behind another vehicle
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
Ú page 185.
switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift  Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
will not take place and no position indicator
 N (Neutral) WARNING!
lights will be on or flashing.
For additional information on the appropriate use You or others could be injured or killed if you
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER of each transfer case position, see the information leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
CASE (6-S PEED TRANSMISSION) — below: case in the N (Neutral) position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The transfer case
I F EQUIPPED 2WD
N (Neutral) position disengages both the front
The electronically shifted transfer case is operated and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
by the four-wheel drive Control Switch (Transfer will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
surfaced roads.
Case Switch), which is located on the instrument transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
panel. 4WD HIGH should always be applied when the driver is not
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range in the vehicle.
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed different transfer case position, the indicator lights illuminates during driving, it means that the
to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) will do the following: four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
for normal street and highway conditions on dry, If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met: and that service is required.
hard surfaced roads.
1. The current position indicator light will turn WARNING!
When additional traction is required, the transfer off.
case 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be Always engage the parking brake when powering
used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft, 2. The selected position indicator light will flash
down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the until the transfer case completes the shift.
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake
same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the 3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light may allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause
four-wheel drive Control Switch to the desired for the selected position will stop flashing and personal injury.
position. remain on.
For specific shifting instructions Ú page 137. NOTE:
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions
The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are Are Not Met: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause
1. The indicator light for the current position will
Driving in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions damage to driveline components.
remain on.
on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
tire wear and damage to the driveline components. 2. The newly selected position indicator light will engine speed is approximately three times that of
continue to flash. the two-wheel drive or 4WD HIGH positions at a
NOTE:
The transfer case N (Neutral) button is located on 3. The transfer case will not shift. given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
the lower left hand corner of the four-wheel drive engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Control Switch. The transfer case N (Neutral) NOTE:
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
position is to be used for recreational towing only Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
depends on tires of equal size, type and
Ú page 185. the necessary requirements for selecting a new
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
transfer case position have been met. To retry the
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
selection, turn the control switch back to the
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD current position, wait five seconds, and retry Because four-wheel drive provides improved
and 4WD LOW) are located in the instrument selection Ú page 137. traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
cluster and indicate the current and desired and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the
transfer case selection. When you select a conditions permit.
electronically shifted four-wheel drive system. If
this light remains on after engine start-up or
Shifting Procedure control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition 4. After the desired position indicator light is on
switch must be in the ON/RUN position with the (not flashing), shift the transmission back into
NOTE: engine either running or off. This shift cannot be gear.
 If any of the requirements to select a new completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC
transfer case position have not been met, the position. Alternate Procedure
transfer case will not shift. The position indi- 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
cator light for the previous position will remain
NOTE:
ON and the newly selected position indicator The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts 2. With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
light will continue to flash until all the require- between 2WD/4WD HIGH if the front and/or rear position and the engine running, shift the
ments for the selected position have been met. wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, transmission into NEUTRAL.
To retry a shift: return the control switch back to the selected position indicator light will flash and 3. Push the desired position on the transfer case
the original position, make certain all shift the original position indicator light will remain on. control switch. 4
requirements have been met, wait five seconds At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the
wheels to complete the shift. 4. After the desired position indicator light is on
and try the shift again. (not flashing), shift the transmission back into
 If all the requirements to select a new transfer 2WD OR 4WD HIGH TO 4WD LOW gear.
case position have been met, the current posi-
NOTE: NOTE:
tion indicator light will turn OFF, the selected
When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
position indicator light will flash until the  If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alter-
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
transfer case completes the shift. When the nate Procedure are not satisfied prior to
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
shift is complete, the position indicator light for attempting the shift, then the desired position
the selected position will stop flashing and Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling indicator light will flash continuously while the
remain ON. 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. original position indicator light is on, until all
You can use either of the following procedures: requirements have been met.
2WD TO 4WD HIGH Preferred Procedure
 The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN posi-
Push the desired position on the four-wheel drive 1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to tion for a shift to take place and for the position
control switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
between two-wheel drive and 4WD HIGH can be switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With will not take place and no position indicator
the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will 3. While still rolling, push the desired position on
lights will be on or flashing.
engage/disengage faster if you momentarily the transfer case control switch.
release the accelerator pedal after turning the
MANUALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER C ASE — 4L either the 4H or 4L position. There is no light for the
2H or N (Neutral) positions on some models.
I F EQUIPPED Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks
the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine
The transfer case provides four positions: front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. speed is approximately three times that of the
 Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H) Additional traction and maximum pulling power for two-wheel drive or 4H positions at a given road
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and
 Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H)
25 mph (40 km/h). do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
 N (Neutral)
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
 Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L) 2H position for normal street and highway depends on tires of equal size, type and
For additional information on the appropriate use conditions such as dry, hard surfaced roads. circumference on each wheel. Any difference will
of each transfer case position, see the information When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to
below: positions can be used to lock the front and rear the drivetrain.
2H driveshafts together and force the front and rear NOTE:
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
accomplished by simply moving the gear selector or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
to the desired positions once the appropriate damage to driveline components.
surfaced roads.
speed and gear requirements are met Because four-wheel drive provides improved
4H Ú page 137. traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
locks the front and rear driveshafts together slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and conditions permit.
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the 4L positions on dry, hard surfaced roads may
same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery
NOTE:
cause increased tire wear and damage to the Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be expe-
road surfaces only. driveline components. rienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
N (Neutral) The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front instrument cluster will alert the driver that the temperatures.
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be vehicle is in four-wheel drive and that the front and
used for flat towing behind another vehicle rear driveshafts are locked together. This light will
Ú page 185. illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into
2H OR 4H TO 4L Transfer Case Position Indicator Light

WARNING!
NOTE: The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the
You or others could be injured or killed if you When shifting into or out of 4L some gear noise instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detri- the front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels
case in the N (Neutral) position without first fully mental to the vehicle or occupants. are driving.
engaging the parking brake. The transfer case
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h),
N (Neutral) position disengages both the front
and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), The limited-slip differential provides additional
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel,
position. Do not pause in transfer case Neutral. particularly when there is a difference between the
should always be applied when the driver is not 4
in the vehicle. NOTE: traction characteristics of the surface under the
 Pausing in transfer case N (Neutral) in vehicles right and left rear wheels. During normal driving
equipped with an automatic transmission may and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs
Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery
require shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear
Transfer Case clash while completing the shift. If difficulty surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of
occurs, shift the transmission into Neutral, hold the driving effort to the rear wheel having the
2H TO 4H better traction.
your foot on the brake, and turn the engine OFF.
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the Complete the range shift to the desired position. The limited-slip differential is especially helpful
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in during slippery driving conditions. With both rear
 Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
motion, shifts can be made up to 55 mph wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application of
vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty
(88 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer the accelerator will supply maximum traction.
may occur due to the mating teeth not being prop-
case will engage/disengage faster if you When starting with only one rear wheel on an
erly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after excessively slippery surface, slight momentary
teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
completing the shift. Apply a constant force when application of the parking brake may be necessary
The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling
shifting the transfer case lever. to gain maximum traction.
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to
engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving
faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
 Do not attempt to shift into or out of 4L while the
transmission is in gear.
information is available at the Ram Truck Body

WARNING! Builder’s web site: https://www.ramtrucks.com/ CAUTION!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip ram-commercial/body-builders-guide.html Prolonged operation of the steering system at
differential never run the engine with one rear the end of the steering wheel travel will increase
wheel off the ground since the vehicle may drive HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING the steering fluid temperature and it should be
through the rear wheel remaining on the ground. avoided when possible. Damage to the power
The standard power steering system provides
You could lose control of the vehicle. steering pump may occur.
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will
Care should be taken to avoid sudden provide mechanical steering capability if power POWER S TEERING FLUID C HECK
accelerations when both rear wheels are on a assist is lost.
slippery surface. This could cause both rear wheels Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, service interval is not required. The fluid should
to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under
the crowned surface of a road or in a turn. only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal
these conditions, you will observe a substantial noises are apparent, and/or the system is not
increase in steering effort, especially at very low
POWER TAKE OFF (PTO) OPERATION — vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
functioning as anticipated. Check fluid level when
the engine is cold and off. Coordinate inspection
IF EQUIPPED NOTE: efforts through an authorized dealer.
This vehicle when equipped with PTO Prep and the  Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not WARNING!
AS66RC/AS69RC automatic 6-speed, will allow for
an aftermarket upfit with a transmission driven indicate that there is a problem with the power Fluid level should be checked on a level surface
PTO (power take off). The customer will have the steering system. and with the engine off to prevent injury from
ability to operate the PTO in either a “stationary”,  Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level
“mobile” or “remote” mode. The vehicles will be steering pump may make noise for a short reading. Do not overfill. Use only manufacturer's
factory set to the “stationary” mode. To select a amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick recommended power steering fluid.
different mode, or to change any other PTO setting, fluid in the steering system. This noise should
you will need to enter the commercial vehicle be considered normal, and it does not in any
menu on the instrument cluster screen. Details of way damage the steering system.
the PTO selection modes and further PTO
is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system
CAUTION! unavailable, and vice versa. off, push the on/off button a second time. The
Do not use chemical flushes in your power cruise indicator light will turn off. The system
steering system as the chemicals can damage
CRUISE C ONTROL should be turned off when not in use.
your power steering components. Such damage When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited accelerator operations at speeds greater than WARNING!
Warranty. 20 mph (32 km/h). Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper side of the steering wheel. the system or cause it to go faster than you
indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled want. You could lose control and have an
fluid from all surfaces Ú page 407. accident. Always leave the system off when you 4
are not using it.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise To Set A Desired Speed
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
(ACC) system: reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button
 Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a and release. Release the accelerator and the
constant preset speed. vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a
speed has been set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the
Cruise Control Buttons SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating the set
vehicle speed up to the preset speed to main-
speed. A cruise indicator lamp, along with set
tain a distance with the vehicle ahead.
1 — On/Off Button speed will also appear and stay on in the
NOTE: 2 — CANCEL instrument cluster display when the speed is set.
 In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not 3 — RES (+) NOTE:
enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not 4 — SET (-) The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be and on level ground before pushing the SET (-)
aware of the feature selected. button.
 Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
To Activate
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument
To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing To Resume Speed

To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed While the Cruise Controls is set, press the To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
When Cruise Control is set, you can increase the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed by pushing the RES (+) button, or decrease is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS To Deactivate
U.S. Speed (mph) A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
The transmission may downshift on hills to
 Pushing the RES (+) button, or SET (-) button button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
maintain the vehicle set speed.
once will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. vehicle will deactivate the Cruise Control without
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and erasing the set speed from memory.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in an
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
adjustment of 1 mph. The following conditions will also deactivate the
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
 If the button is continually pushed, the set Cruise Control without erasing the set speed from
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
speed will continue to adjust until the button is memory:
without Cruise Control.
released, then the new set speed will be estab-  Vehicle parking brake is applied
lished. WARNING!  Stability event occurs
Metric Speed (km/h) Cruise Control can be dangerous where the  Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
 Pushing the RES (+), or SET (-) button once will system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
 Engine overspeed occurs
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
subsequent tap of the button results in an you could lose control and have an accident. Do Pushing the on/off button, or placing the ignition in
adjustment of 1 km/h. not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on the OFF position, erases the set speed from
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or memory.
 If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is slippery.
released, then the new set speed will be estab-
lished.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE C ONTROL (ACC) WARNING! WARNING!

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-  Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
convenience provided by Cruise Control while nience system. It is not a substitute for active while following a target vehicle and hold
traveling on highways and major roadways. driver involvement. It is always the driver’s the vehicle for approximately two seconds
However, it is not a safety system and not designed responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, in the stop position. At this point, there will
to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control function and weather conditions, vehicle speed, be an “ACC may cancel soon” chime and
performs differently if your vehicle is not equipped distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most warning to the driver. When ACC is
with ACC Ú page 141. importantly, brake operation to ensure safe cancelled, the system will release the
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged operation of the vehicle under all road condi- brakes and the driver must take over
in light to moderate traffic conditions without the tions. Your complete attention is always braking. The system can be resumed 4
constant need to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a required while driving to maintain safe control when the target vehicle drives off by
radar sensor and a forward facing camera of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn- releasing the brake and pushing the
designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you ings can result in a collision and death or resume button on the steering wheel.
to maintain a set speed. serious personal injury.
You should switch off the ACC system:
NOTE:  The ACC system:
 When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
 If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC  Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
exceed the original set speed) automatically to stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
maintain a preset following distance, while  When entering a turn lane or highway off
disabled vehicle).
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead. ramp; when driving on roads that are winding,
 Cannot take street, traffic, and weather icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep
 Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
conditions into account, and may be uphill or downhill slopes.
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
limited upon adverse sight distance condi-
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli-  When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
tions.
sion Warning system.
 When circumstances do not allow safe driving
 Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehi-  Does not always fully recognize complex
at a constant speed.
cles directly ahead of you. Always be aware of driving conditions, which can result in
the feature selected Ú page 412. wrong or missing distance warnings.
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation Push the ACC on/off button until one of the Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
following appears in the instrument cluster display:
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
operate the ACC system. Adaptive Cruise Control Off 20 mph (32 km/h).
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read When the system is turned on and in the ready
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” state, the instrument cluster display will read “ACC
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Ready.”
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed When the system is off, the instrument cluster
setting has not been selected, the display will read display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following condi-
When the RES (+) or the SET(-) button is pushed,
tions:
the display will read “ACC SET.”
 When in 4WD Low
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.  When brakes are applied
1 — Adaptive Cruise Control On/Off Button The ACC screen may display once again if any of  When the parking brake is applied
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off Button the following ACC activity occurs:  When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
3 — CANCEL  System Cancel REVERSE or NEUTRAL
4 — Distance Button  When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
 Driver Override
5 — RES (+) speed range
 System Off
6 — SET (-)  When the brakes are overheated
 ACC Proximity Warning
 When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu  ACC Unavailable Warning
 When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
The instrument cluster display will show the The instrument cluster display will return to the last speed
current ACC system settings. The information it display selected after five seconds of no ACC
display activity.  When Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full Off
displays depends on ACC system status. mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off NOTE:

button will result in turning on (changing to) Fixed  Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed Cruise Control mode. cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.” beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
WARNING! message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display
To turn the system off, push and release the
In the Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode (ACC not in the instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again.
At this time, the system will turn off and the enabled), the system will not react to vehicles  If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
instrument cluster display will show “Adaptive ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” not activate and no alarm will sound even if you be controlling the distance between your vehicle
are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will
WARNING! the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the only be determined by the position of the accel- 4
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure erator pedal.
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle
system on when not in use is dangerous. You and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which To Cancel
could accidentally set the system or cause it to mode is selected. The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
go faster than you want. You could lose control Speed Cruise Control systems:
and have a collision. Always leave the system off
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below  The brake pedal is applied.
when you are not using it.
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to  The CANCEL button is pushed.
20 mph (32 km/h).
 An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed NOTE:
 The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
position.
the SET (-) button and release. The instrument 20 mph (32 km/h).
cluster display will show the set speed.  The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
System (ESC/TCS) activates.
NOTE: above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without the current speed of the vehicle.  The vehicle parking brake is applied.
ACC enabled. To change between the different  Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns
 Driver door is opened at low speeds.
the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off.
 A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph To Vary The Speed Setting
 The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode. (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
being used.
 The braking temperature exceeds normal range After setting a speed, you can increase the set
(overheated). Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
speed by pushing the RES (+) button, or decrease
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
 The trailer brake is applied manually (if speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
equipped). NOTE: U.S. Speed (mph)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC  While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to
 Pushing the RES (+) button, or SET (-) button
system: a complete stop longer than two seconds, the
once will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment.
system will cancel. The driver will have to apply
 Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds Each subsequent tap of the button results in an
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
adjustment of 1 mph.
 Driver door is opened at low speeds  ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
 If the button is continually pushed, the set
To Turn Off vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in ments until the button is released. The new set
WARNING!
memory if: speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
 The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button The Resume function should only be used if display.
is pushed traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a Metric Speed (km/h)
set speed that is too high or too low for
 The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is prevailing traffic and road conditions could  Pushing the RES (+) button, or SET (-) button
pushed cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too once will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these Each subsequent tap of the button results in an
warnings can result in a collision and death or adjustment of 1 km/h.
 4WD Low is engaged
serious personal injury.  If the button is continually pushed, the set
To Resume speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h incre-
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (+) ments until the button is released. The new set
button and then remove your foot from the speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display display.
will display the last set speed.
When ACC Is Active The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
 When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if until:
the engine’s braking power does not slow the  The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the the set speed.
brake system will automatically slow the  The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
vehicle. view of the sensor.
 The ACC system applies the brake down to a full  The distance setting is changed.
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,  The system disengages.
your vehicle will release the brakes two seconds The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
after coming to a full stop. Distance Settings however, the driver can always apply the brakes 4
 The ACC system maintains set speed when 1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars) manually, if necessary.
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight 2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars) NOTE:
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In 3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars) The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
addition, downshifting may occur while climbing system applies the brakes.
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
uphill or descending downhill. This is normal A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
operation and necessary to maintain set speed. predicts that its maximum braking level is not
When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC To adjust the distance setting, push the Distance sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
system will cancel if the braking temperature Button and release. Each time the button is occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the
exceeds normal range (overheated). pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar instrument cluster display and a chime will sound
(longer). When the farthest distance is set, pushing while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
Setting The Following Distance In ACC the distance button again will reset to the shortest force.
The specified following distance for Adaptive distance.
Cruise Control (ACC) can be set by varying the NOTE:
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
distance setting between four bars (longest), three
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle display is a warning for the driver to take action
bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
is detected in the same lane, the instrument and does not necessarily mean that the Forward
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed,
cluster displays the ACC Set With Target Detected Collision Warning system is applying the brakes
ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
Indicator Light, and the system adjusts vehicle autonomously.
ahead. This distance setting displays in the
speed automatically to maintain the distance
instrument cluster display.
setting, regardless of the set speed.
Trailer Detect — If Equipped will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel This message can sometimes be displayed while
When a trailer is detected, the ACC system message will display on the instrument cluster driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow,
automatically defaults to the longest setting (four display and produce a warning chime. The driver or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC system will
bars). The setting can be overridden by pushing the must now manually operate the vehicle’s recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Distance Button on the steering wheel. accelerator and brakes. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
Overtake Aid WARNING! warning may temporarily occur.
When driving with ACC engaged and following a When the ACC system is resumed, the driver NOTE:
vehicle, the system will provide an additional must ensure that there are no pedestrians, If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is Failure to follow these warnings can result in a Control is still available.
triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn collision and death or serious personal injury. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
signal and will only be active when passing on the
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
left hand side.
Display Warnings And Maintenance or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
ACC Operation At Stop in the camera in the center of the windshield, on
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill “WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF the forward side of the rearview mirror.
while following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will VEHICLE” WARNING To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
resume motion, without any driver interaction, if important to note the following maintenance
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
the vehicle ahead starts moving within two items:
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill.
sound when conditions temporarily limit system  Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully clear
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within performance. the windshield.
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,  Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
brakes will release. A cancel message will display
also become temporarily blinded due to tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
on the instrument cluster display and produce a
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these  Do not attach or install any accessories near the
warning chime. The driver must now manually
cases, the instrument cluster display will display sensor, including transparent material or after-
operate the vehicle’s accelerator and brakes.
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” market grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a and the system will deactivate. system failure or malfunction.
standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the
driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system
When the condition that deactivated the system is This message can sometimes be displayed while unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
no longer present, the system will return to the driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/ later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left persists, see an authorized dealer.
function by simply reactivating it. these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
Precautions While Driving With ACC
NOTE: camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its
path this warning may temporarily occur. NOTE:
 If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver  Aftermarket add-ons such as snowplows, lift
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
should examine the windshield and the camera kits, and brush/grille bars can hinder module
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
located on the back side of the inside rearview performance. Ensure the radar/camera has no
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an obstructions in the field of view.
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
 Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an
obstruction.  Height modifications can limit module perfor- 4
When the condition that created limited mance and functionality.
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor functionality is no longer present, the system will  Do not put stickers or easy passes over the
and inhibit ACC/FCW operation. return to full functionality. camera/radar field of view.
NOTE:  Any modifications to the vehicle that may
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front obstruct the field of view of the radar/camera
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more are not recommended.
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, In certain driving situations, ACC may have
sound when conditions temporarily limit system mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
performance. This most often occurs at times of forward facing camera inspected at an authorized late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and dealer. and may need to intervene. The following are
fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily examples of these types of situations:
blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
ice on windshield, driving directly into the sun and If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster TOWING A TRAILER
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only
instrument cluster display will show “ACC/FCW or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, with an Integrated Trailer Brake Controller.
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and there may be an internal system fault or a Aftermarket trailer brake controllers will not
the system will have degraded performance. temporary malfunction that limits ACC activate the trailer brakes when ACC is braking.
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
OFFSET DRIVING NOTE: LANE CHANGING

ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle The driver must maintain control of the vehicle, in the lane in which you are traveling. In the
merging in from a side lane. There may not be remain alert, and be ready to apply the brakes if illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset needed. vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, USING ACC ON HILLS vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take
which can cause your vehicle to brake or action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
accelerate unexpectedly. When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be
traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, attentive and ready to apply the brakes if
ACC performance may be limited. necessary.
NOTE:
The driver must maintain control of the vehicle,
remain alert, and be ready to apply the brakes if
needed.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS

When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the Lane Changing Example
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original set ACC Hill Example
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NARROW VEHICLES STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST —
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer ACC does not react to stationary objects or
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in IF EQUIPPED
detected until they have moved fully into the lane. situations where the vehicle you are following exits The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your and audible indications of the distance between
ahead. lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a the rear, and/or front fascia/bumper, and a
stationary object as it did not previously detect detected obstacle when backing up or moving
movement from it. Always be attentive and ready forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver). For
to apply the brakes if necessary. limitations of this system and recommendations,
see Ú page 155.
ParkSense will retain the system state (enabled or
4
disabled) from the previous ignition cycle when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
Narrow Vehicle Example the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example instrument cluster display when the vehicle is in
REVERSE, indicating the vehicle is above
ParkSense operating speed. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS NOTE: PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY

If equipped as a dually, the ParkSense system has
For the 3500, 4500 and 5500 Chassis Cab six rear sensors to assist in detection around the The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
vehicles, the rear ParkSense sensors are shipped dually flares. the instrument cluster display Ú page 81. It
loose. Please refer to the Ram Body Builder’s provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
Guide for more information. between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
The four ParkSense sensors are to be located in fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
the rear fascia/bumper, and monitor the area sensors can detect obstacles from approximately PARKSENSE DISPLAY
behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from
of view. the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, The warning display will turn on indicating the
The sensors can detect obstacles from depending on the location, type and orientation of system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches the obstacle. when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the been detected.
horizontal direction, depending on the location, The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
type and orientation of the obstacle. showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear
regions based on the obstacle’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs

1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single
1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

Greater than 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than
Rear Distance (inches/cm)
79 inches (200 cm) (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 inches (30 cm)
Single 1/2
Audible Alert Chime None Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Second Tone
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

Front Distance Greater than 47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than 12 inches
(inches/cm) (120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) (30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts switch is pushed, and the system requires service, CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on. Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
SYSTEM Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are During vehicle start-up, when the Front/Rear PARKSENSE SYSTEM U SAGE
programmable through the Uconnect system ParkSense System has detected a faulted PRECAUTIONS
Ú page 191. condition, the instrument cluster display will show
the "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service NOTE:
ENABLING A ND DISABLING P ARKSENSE Required" or the "Front/Rear ParkSense  Ensure that the front and rear bumpers are free 4
Unavailable Wipe Sensors" message. of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
Front ParkSense can be enabled and
When the gear selector is moved into REVERSE, a ParkSense system operating properly.
disabled with the Front ParkSense
switch. vehicle graphic will show in the instrument cluster  Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
display, along with the display overlay “Wipe tions could affect the performance of Park-
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with Sensors.” If the system needs service, the display Sense.
the Rear ParkSense switch. overlay will read “Service.” Under this condition,  When you move the gear selector to the
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and ParkSense will not operate. REVERSE position and Front or Rear ParkSense
the Front or Rear system is disabled, the If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe is turned off, the instrument cluster display will
instrument cluster display will show a vehicle Sensors" appears in the instrument cluster display show "Off" on the vehicle graphic arcs. This
graphic with an “Off” message overlay over the make sure the outer surface and the underside of vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as
system that is off (Front or Rear system). This the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, the vehicle is in REVERSE.
vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle
vehicle is in REVERSE.  ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the ignition. If the message continues to appear, the radio when it is sounding a tone.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on see an authorized dealer.
when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service care not to scratch or damage them. The
requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense Required" appears in the instrument cluster
switch LED will be off when the Front or Rear sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
display, see an authorized dealer. slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
system is enabled. If the Front or Rear ParkSense
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle

behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it WARNING! LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
could provide a false indication that an obstacle  Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom- LANESENSE OPERATION
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper. mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
 Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense assembly be disconnected from the vehicle The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, when the vehicle is not used for towing. above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 18 inches Failure to do so can result in injury or damage (180 km/h). It uses a forward looking camera to
(45 cm) of the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball detect lane markings and measure vehicle
so can result in the system misinterpreting a will be much closer to the obstacle than the position within the lane boundaries.
close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the When both lane markings are detected and the
“Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service continuous tone. Also, the sensors could driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal has been
Required” message to be appear in the instru- detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, applied) OR the driver departs the lane on the
ment cluster display. depending on its size and shape, giving a false opposite side of the applied turn signal (if the left
indication that an obstacle is behind the turn signal is applied and the vehicle departs to the
WARNING! vehicle. right), the LaneSense system provides a haptic
warning in the form of torque applied to the
 Drivers must be careful when backing up even
steering wheel, as well as a visual warning in the
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully CAUTION! instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
 ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
remain within the lane boundaries.
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before unable to recognize every obstacle, including The driver may manually override the haptic
backing up. You are responsible for safety and small obstacles. Parking curbs might be warning by applying torque to the steering wheel at
must continue to pay attention to your temporarily detected or not detected at all. any time.
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in Obstacles located above or below the sensors When only a single lane marking is detected and
serious injury or death. will not be detected when they are in close the driver drifts across that lane marking (no turn
proximity. signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
(Continued)
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using visual warning through the instrument cluster
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time display to prompt the driver to remain within the
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom- lane.
mended that the driver looks over his/her When only a single lane marking is detected, a
shoulder when using ParkSense. haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE: LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE  When the LaneSense system senses the lane
When operating conditions have been met, the has been approached and is in a lane departure
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s The LaneSense system will indicate the current situation, the visual warning in the instrument
hands are on the steering wheel and provide an lane drift condition through the instrument cluster cluster display will show the left lane line
audible and visual warning to the driver if removed. display. flashing yellow (on/off). The LaneSense telltale
The system will cancel if the driver does not return When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
their hands to the wheel. are gray when both of the lane boundaries have
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR O FF not been detected and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display. 4
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch
Uconnect Display screen, the LaneSense button is
located above the display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With Yellow
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense
Telltale
On” message is shown in the instrument cluster
display. NOTE:
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the The LaneSense system operates with similar
LaneSense button again (LED turns on). Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected behavior for a right lane departure when only the
 When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane- right lane marking has been detected.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system Sense Telltale is solid white when only the
state (on or off) from the last ignition cycle when left lane marking has been detected and the
the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position. system is ready to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the left side.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected For example: If approaching the left side of the For example: If approaching the left side of the
 When the LaneSense system is on, and both the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
lane markings have been detected, the system
is "armed" to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display and a torque warning
in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane
departure occurs. The lane lines turn from gray
to white and the LaneSense telltale is solid
green.
Lane Approached (Solid Yellow Lane Line) With Solid Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With Flashing
Yellow Telltale Yellow Telltale
 When the LaneSense system senses the lane NOTE:
has been approached and is in a lane departure The LaneSense system operates with similar
situation, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/ behavior for a right lane departure.
off). The LaneSense telltale changes from
solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time
CHANGING LANESENSE S TATUS
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale torque is applied to the steering wheel in the The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the
 When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift opposite direction of the lane boundary. intensity (Low/Medium/High) of the torque
situation, the left lane line turns solid yellow. warning and the warning zone sensitivity (Early/
Medium/Late) that you can configure through the
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid
Uconnect system Ú page 191.
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite NOTE:
direction of the lane boundary.  When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
 Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Cargo Camera Icons — If Equipped
 The system will not apply torque to the steering camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is
wheel whenever a safety system engages exited and the previous screen appears. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera Backup Camera Touchscreen Button
(Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System,
Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision delay turned on), the camera image will continue to
Warning, etc.). be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the
following conditions occur: The vehicle speed Cargo Camera Touchscreen Button
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted
into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to OFF position, or the user presses image defeat “X”
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of to exit out of the camera video display. AUX Camera Touchscreen Button
4
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into Whenever the Rear View Camera image is
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the activated through the "Backup Camera" button in If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen
Uconnect display along with a caution note to the Controls menu, and the vehicle speed is button is made available to indicate the current
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a active Camera image being displayed whenever
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. display timer for the image is initiated. The image the Rear View Camera image is displayed.
The ParkView Camera is located in the center of will continue to be displayed until the display timer
the tailgate handle. If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen
exceeds 10 seconds. button to switch the display to Cargo Camera
NOTE: NOTE: image is made available whenever the Rear View
For the 3500, 4500, and 5500 Chassis Cab Camera image is displayed.
 If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
vehicles, the Rear Backup Camera is shipped
loose and not installed. Please refer to the Ram (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the
Body Builder’s Guide for more information. displayed continuously until deactivated via the camera image is made available when the vehicle
touchscreen button "X", the transmission is is not in REVERSE gear.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the
Camera: When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
OFF position. the backup camera image to illustrate the width of
 The touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on
1. Press the "Controls" button located on the the camera image is made available ONLY when the steering wheel position. The active guidelines
bottom of the Uconnect display. the vehicle is not in REVERSE. will show separate zones that will help indicate the
2. Press the "Back Up Camera" icon to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.
distance to the rear of the vehicle. These settings When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
can be adjusted within Uconnect Settings CAUTION! REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
Ú page 191.  To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should view will display the standard Backup Camera
A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a camera is unable to view every obstacle or gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
hitch/receiver. The following table shows the object in your drive path. automatically resume.
approximate distances for each zone:  To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
Distance To The Rear the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Zones to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
Of The Vehicle
recommended that the driver look frequently If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) over his/her shoulder when using ParkView. until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
1 ft - 6.5 ft REVERSE.
Yellow
(30 cm - 2m) NOTE: NOTE:
6.5 ft or greater If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds  If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
Green
(2 m or greater) up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the
lens. icon will appear gray.
WARNING! Zoom View  While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
Drivers must be careful when backing up even When the Rear View Camera image is visible.
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. being displayed, and the vehicle speed is For information on Auxiliary Cameras (if equipped),
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear see Ú page 168.
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other selector position, Zoom View is available.
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of upper left of the display screen, the image will
your surroundings and must continue to pay zoom in to four times the standard view. Pressing
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can the icon a second time will return the view to the
result in serious injury or death. standard Backup Camera display.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear
View and Top View is the default view of the
Modes Of Operation
Standard Rear View can be manually activated by
IF EQUIPPED system. selecting “Back Up Camera” through the Controls
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround If the camera delay is turned on, the camera image menu within the Uconnect system.
View Camera system that allows you to see an will display for up to 10 seconds after shifting out Top View
on-screen image of the surroundings and Top View of REVERSE. The camera image will not display for
10 seconds if the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put Rear View and Front View in a split screen display.
into REVERSE or manually activated via the (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. The “X” There are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image
Uconnect system. The Top View of the vehicle will at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will
show which doors are open. The image will be button on the touchscreen disables the display of
change color from yellow to red corresponding the
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a the camera image. 4
distance zones to the oncoming object.
caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across If the camera delay is turned off, the camera image
the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will close and display the previous screen after The fifth button of the ParkSense Camera View
will disappear. The Surround View Camera system shifting out of REVERSE. screen will change based on the features present
is comprised of three sequential cameras located in the vehicle. If not equipped with a Cargo Camera
If active guidelines are enabled, the lines are or Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Backup Camera
in the front grille and side mirrors, in addition to a overlaid on the image in the Rear View to illustrate
fourth Rear Back Up Camera. soft button will be displayed. If equipped with a
the width of the vehicle. The view will also include Cargo Camera but no Trailer Reverse Guidance,
NOTE: the side view mirrors and its projected back up the Cargo Camera soft button will be displayed. If
 For the 3500, 4500, and 5500 Chassis Cab path based on the steering wheel position. equipped with both a Cargo Camera and Trailer
vehicles, the Rear Backup Camera is shipped There are different colored zones to indicate the Reverse Guidance, the Cargo/Trailer Reverse
loose and not installed. Please refer to the Ram distance to the rear of the vehicle. Refer to the Guidance soft button will be displayed.
Body Builder’s Guide for more information. chart below:
 The Surround View Camera system has Distance To The Rear Of
programmable settings that may be selected Zone
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Press this button on the touchscreen to
enter the Surround View Camera menu in Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
the Uconnect system. 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or
Green
greater)
Rear View. The Top View will be disabled when this NOTE:
is selected. If the Cargo Camera view was selected through the
Top View Plus Front View Surround View screen, exiting out of the Cargo
Camera screen will return to the Surround View
The Front View will show you what is
screen. If the Cargo Camera was manually acti-
immediately in front of the vehicle and is
vated through the Controls menu of the Uconnect
always paired with the Top View of the
display, exiting out of the display screen will return
vehicle.
to the Controls menu.
Front Cross Path View Trailer Reverse Guidance
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key Pressing the Trailer Reverse Guidance
ParkSense Camera View will give the driver a wider angle view of soft key will provide a full screen view of
the Front View. The Top View will be the cargo area and trailer.
NOTE: disabled when this is selected.
 Front tires will display on the image when the Pressing the Left & Right Tow Mirror Split
Backup Camera View Screen View button within the Trailer
tires are turned.
Pressing the Backup Camera soft key will Reverse Guidance screen will display a
 Due to wide angle cameras in mirrors, the image provide a full screen rear view with Zoom split screen to allow the driver to see both
will appear distorted. View. sides of the trailer at the same time. This view
 Top View will show which doors are open. allows the driver to pan left/right to better frame
NOTE:
 Open front doors will cancel the outside image. If the Rear View Camera view was selected through the trailer in the image.
Top View Plus Rear View the Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the NOTE:
Rear View screen will return to the Surround View Trailer Reverse Guidance can only be selected
This is the default view of the system in
menu. If the Back Up Camera was manually acti- through the Surround View screen; exiting out of
REVERSE and is always paired with the
vated through the Controls menu of the Uconnect the Trailer Reverse Guidance screen will return to
Top View of the vehicle with optional
system, exiting out of the display screen will return the Surround View screen.
active guidelines for the projected path
to the Controls menu. Zoom View
when enabled.
Cargo Camera When the Rear View image is being displayed, and
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Cargo Camera soft key will the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key will provide a full screen view of the cargo in any gear, Zoom View is available. By pressing the
give the driver a wider angle view of the area. “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the
display screen, the image will zoom in to four times image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 NOTE:
the standard view. Pressing the icon a second time seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds  If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
will return the view to the standard Rear View. 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF posi- lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay tion. There is a touchscreen button “X” to cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
view will display the standard Back Up Camera disable the display of the camera image.
 If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE  When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE see an authorized dealer.
gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will (with camera delay turned off), the Surround
automatically resume. Cargo Camera Zoom View
View Camera mode is exited and the last known
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain screen appears again. When the Cargo Camera image is being
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as The system is deactivated in the following displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 4
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h). 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear
conditions if it was activated manually from the
selector position, Zoom View is available.
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available Uconnect controls menu via the Surround View
By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or Camera button, Backup Camera button, Cargo
upper left of the display screen, the image will
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph Camera button or Forward Facing Camera button:
zoom in to four times the standard view. Pressing
(13 km/h).  The "X" button on the display is pressed the icon a second time will return the view to the
NOTE:  Vehicle is shifted into PARK standard Cargo Camera display.
 If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,  Ignition is placed in the OFF position When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph  Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the 10 seconds view will display the standard Cargo Camera view.
icon will appear gray. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear
NOTE: from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
 While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
If the Surround View Camera, Cargo Camera, automatically resume.
visible. Backup Camera, or Forward Facing Camera is acti-
Deactivation Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
vated manually, and the vehicle is shifted into
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
The system is deactivated in the following REVERSE, deactivation methods for automatic
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
conditions if it was activated automatically: activation are assumed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually Zoom View is available until the gear selector is
 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds are at or
(with camera delay turned on), the camera through Uconnect Settings Ú page 191.
above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE: Deactivation Deactivation

 If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, The Forward Facing Camera is deactivated in the When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph following conditions: camera delay turned on), the camera image will
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the  The vehicle exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), except continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
icon will appear gray. when vehicle is in 4WD Low unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h),
 While in Zoom View, the dynamic centerline will the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is
 The “X” button on the display is pressed. placed in the OFF position. There is a touchscreen
not be visible.
 The vehicle is shifted into PARK. button “X” to disable the display of the camera
Forward Facing Camera With Tire Lines — image.
If Equipped  The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: If Trailer Reverse Guidance is selected through
The Forward Facing Camera displays a front view manually activated Surround View, Backup
image of the road ahead, along with tire lines to If the vehicle is in 4WD Low, the Forward Facing
Camera image will be displayed until the “X” button Camera, or Cargo Camera, the following
guide the driver when driving on narrow roads. Tire deactivation conditions apply:
lines can be activated/deactivated through the is pressed or the ignition is placed in the OFF
Uconnect Settings. position.  The “X” button on the display is pressed
Activation Trailer Reverse Guidance — If Equipped  The ignition is placed in the OFF position
The Forward Facing Camera can be activated in The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature assists the  The vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
the following ways: driver in backing up a trailer by providing 10 seconds
adjustable camera views of the trailer and
 Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button in surrounding area. The cameras are mounted on WARNING!
the Controls screen or Apps menu the side mirrors and the images will be displayed
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
 Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button side-by-side on the touchscreen. Left and right
when using the Surround View Camera. Always
located in the upper left corner of the Back Up camera images are swapped and mirrored on the
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
camera display touchscreen to show the equivalent area behind
to check for pedestrians, animals, other
Once activated, the camera image will remain on the vehicle as though the driver is using the side
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
as long as the vehicle speed is below 8 mph mirrors.
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
(13 km/h). Activation your surroundings and must continue to pay
The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature can be attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
activated by pressing the Trailer Reverse Guidance result in serious injury or death.
button on the Backup/Cargo Camera Display.
To access all camera options when the vehicle is in Set Up

CAUTION! REVERSE, select the "More Cams" button on the The Trailer Surround View Camera system includes
 To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View surround view screen. an installation kit with a Trailer Surround View
should only be used as a parking aid. The For information on Auxiliary Cameras (if equipped), Module and four Trailer Surround View Cameras
Surround View camera is unable to view every see Ú page 168. that must be installed on your trailer prior to
obstacle or object in your drive path. connecting to your vehicle. See the installation
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be TRAILER CAMERAS — IF EQUIPPED instructions included with the Trailer Surround
driven slowly when using Surround View to be View installation kit for more information. Once the
able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. TRAILER SURROUND VIEW C AMERA Trailer Surround View Module and cameras are
installed and the trailer is connected to the vehicle
It is recommended that the driver look SYSTEM — I F EQUIPPED
frequently over his/her shoulder when using via the 12-way connector, the Trailer Surround 4
Surround View. The Trailer Surround View Camera system allows View Camera settings can be accessed. The Trailer
you to see an on-screen image of the surroundings Surround View Camera settings can be accessed
and the Top View of a trailer using four mountable through Uconnect Settings by pressing the Trailer
NOTE: cameras. This occurs whenever the More Cams soft button in the Trailer Settings or the Camera
If the vehicle is not equipped with a Pickup Box: soft button is selected, or when enabled through Settings. The system requires input of the trailer
 The bottom wedge of the Top View will be the Uconnect system. The image will be displayed dimensions prior to use of the system.
displayed in black. on the Uconnect display along with a caution note NOTE:
 The Rear Cross Path soft button will be grayed “Check Entire Surroundings”. After five seconds,
 If a trailer is connected but the trailer dimen-
out. this note will disappear.
sions have not been entered in the Trailer
 The guidelines will not be overlaid on Top View/ NOTE: Surround settings page, the system will default
Rear View and Full Screen of Rear View.  Trailer Surround View Camera kit is only avail- to the settings page.
 Black video will be displayed for the right side of able for vehicles equipped with the Surround  If a trailer is not connected and any soft button
the Top and Rear View, and full screen of the View Camera system. is selected, a message will appear: “Connect
Rear View when the Rear View Camera is not  The Trailer Surround View Camera system has Trailer Equipped With Trailer Surround View
connected. programmable settings that may be selected System”.
Inputting Trailer Values Trailer Surround Camera soft button to access Top
For the Trailer Surround View Camera system to View and Rear View of the trailer.
function, all fields must be entered. When a value If the camera delay is turned on, the camera image
is needed the screen will display “Required”. will display for up to 10 seconds after shifting out
of REVERSE. The camera image will not display for
Setting Description 10 seconds if the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
Input the total length of (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the
Trailer Length
the trailer ignition is placed in the OFF position. The “X”
Input the total width of button on the touchscreen disables the display of
Trailer Width the camera image.
the trailer
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera image Trailer Top and Rear Camera View
Input the height of the
Camera Height will close and display the previous screen after
mounted camera NOTE:
shifting out of REVERSE. Due to wide angle cameras, the image will appear
Choose the trailer type
Trailer Type Modes Of Operation distorted.
from menu
The Trailer Surround View Camera system offers Rear View
two different camera displays: Pressing the Rear View soft button will
When the Trailer Type soft button is selected two
options are available: Conventional or Gooseneck/  Top View split screen with one selected show the Top View and Rear View in a
5th Wheel. mounted camera split screen display.
Activation  Full screen view of a selected mounted camera Front View
The Trailer Surround Camera can be activated Press the More Cams soft button on the Surround Pressing the Front View soft button will
through the Uconnect system when the vehicle is View screen and select the Trailer tab to access the show you what is immediately in front of
in PARK, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE. Trailer Cameras. Press Trailer Surround Camera the trailer and is paired with the Top View
soft button to access the default Top View and of the trailer.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE,
Rear View of the trailer. Left View
Surround View Camera showing the Top View and
Backup Camera is the default view of the system. Top View Pressing the Left View soft button will
Press the More Cams soft button and then press The Trailer Top View will show in the Uconnect give the driver a wider angle view of the
the Trailer tab to access the Trailer Cameras. Press system with Top View and Rear View in a split left side trailer camera and is paired with
screen display. the Top View of the trailer.
Right View Deactivation NOTE:

Pressing the Right View soft button will The system is deactivated in the following If the Trailer Surround Camera is activated
give the driver a wider angle view of the conditions if it was activated automatically: manually, and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE,
right side trailer camera and is paired deactivation methods for automatic activation are
 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
with the Top View of the trailer. assumed.
(with camera delay turned on), the camera
Full Screen Camera View image will continue to be displayed for up to The camera delay system is turned off manually
10 seconds, unless the vehicle speed exceeds through the Uconnect system Ú page 191.
To display a full screen image of the Trailer
Surround View mounted cameras, select one of 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into NOTE:
the following options from the Trailer Cameras PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-  If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
screen: Trailer Left, Trailer Right, Trailer Front, tion. There is a touchscreen button “X” to builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
disable the display of the camera image. lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
4
Trailer Rear. Exiting out of the full screen view will
return the system to the previous screen.  When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
NOTE: (with camera delay turned off), the Trailer  If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
If the Trailer Surround Camera was selected Surround View Camera mode is exited and the see an authorized dealer.
through the More Cameras menu, an option to last known screen appears again.
return to the More Cameras menu will display. If The system is deactivated in the following WARNING!
the Trailer Surround Camera was manually acti- conditions if it was activated manually from the Drivers must be careful when backing up even
vated through the Controls menu of the Uconnect Uconnect controls menu via the Trailer Surround when using the Trailer Surround View Camera.
system, exiting out of the display screen will return Camera soft button: Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
to the Controls menu.  The "X" button on the display is pressed be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
Trailer Reverse Guidance  Vehicle is shifted into PARK vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
Pressing the Trailer Reverse Guidance backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
 Ignition is placed in the OFF position your surroundings and must continue to pay
soft key will provide a split screen view of
the cargo area and trailer, and provides  Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
the option to pan left or right. For more 10 seconds result in serious injury or death.
information, see Ú page 161.
rearview display. On vehicles with Surround View out by pressing the “X” in the upper right hand
CAUTION! Camera (if equipped), the AUX Camera can be corner. This will return the display back to the
 To avoid vehicle damage, Trailer Surround activated when the vehicle is in REVERSE by first previously displayed screen.
View should only be used as a parking aid. The pressing the More Cams button in the Surround  Zoom View is not available with the AUX Camera
Trailer Surround View Camera is unable to view screen, followed by the AUX tab. The AUX feature.
view every obstacle or object in your drive camera can also be activated when the vehicle is
in REVERSE by pressing the AUX button.  The display will always default to the Trailer
path.
Camera display AUX 1.
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can switch
driven slowly when using Trailer Surround between each camera by pressing the AUX 1 or
AUX 2 buttons on the Trailer Camera display.
ENGINE RUNAWAY
View to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the Diesel engine runaway is a rare condition affecting
driver look frequently over his/her shoulder diesel engines, where the engine consumes its
AUX 1 Camera Button own lubrication oil and runs at higher and higher
when using Trailer Surround View.
RPM until it overspeeds to a point where it destroys
itself due to either mechanical failure or engine
AUX CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED AUX 2 Camera Button seizure through lack of lubrication.
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two AUX WARNING!
Cameras, which display a rearview image from the Deactivation
trailer on the touchscreen. In case of engine runaway due to flammable
The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the “X” fumes from fuel spills or turbocharger oil leaks
NOTE: in the upper right corner of the touchscreen. This being sucked into the engine, do the following to
Two Aux Cameras are only available on vehicles will return the display back to the previously help avoid personal injury and/or vehicle
with NAV equipped radios if the vehicle is not displayed screen. damage:
equipped with a Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) and Surround View Camera system. NOTE:  Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Activation  If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX Camera
 Using a CO2 or dry chemical type fire extin-
is connected, the touchscreen will display a blue
The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing the guisher, direct the spray from the fire extin-
screen along with the message “Camera
Backup Camera or Cargo Camera (if equipped) guisher into the grille on the passenger side so
System Unavailable.” The screen can be exited
button on the touchscreen, followed by the AUX that the spray enters the engine air intake.
button located in the upper left corner of the (Continued)
damaged, a loose gASCAP indicator will display in

WARNING! WARNING! the instrument cluster telltale display area
The inlet for the engine air intake is located  Never have any smoking materials lit in or Ú page 81. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and
behind the passenger side headlamp and near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed push the RIGHT button to turn off the message. If
receives air through the grille. or the tank is being filled. the problem continues, the message will appear
the next time the vehicle is started.
 Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine
REFUELING THE VEHICLE— GASOLINE is running. This is in violation of most state
and federal fire regulations and may cause REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE
ENGINE the MIL to turn on.
CAUTION!
CAUTION! To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top 4
NOTE:
off” the fuel tank after filling.
 Damage to the fuel system or emissions Tighten the gas cap a quarter turn until you hear
control system could result from using an one click. This is an indication that the cap is
improper fuel tank filler tube cap (fuel filler properly tightened. NOTE:
cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the  When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly-fitted after- Malfunction Indicator Light will come on. Be sure fuel tank is full.
market cap can cause the Malfunction Indi- the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is  Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a
cator Light (MIL) to illuminate due to fuel refueled.
vapors escaping from the system. “clicking” sound. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened.
 A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the WARNING!
 Make sure that the fuel filler cap is tightened
MIL to turn on. A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a each time the vehicle is refueled.
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
“top off” the fuel tank after filling. could be burned. Always place gas containers on WARNING!
the ground while filling.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
NOTE: portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel LOOSE FUEL F ILLER CAP MESSAGE could be burned. Always place gas containers on
tank is full. the ground while filling.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that
the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID  Electronically-heated DEF lines NOTE:

 DEF control module When working with DEF, it is important to know
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic that:
Reduction (SCR) system to meet the very stringent  NOx sensors
 Any containers or parts that come into contact
diesel emissions standards required by the  Temperature sensors with DEF must be DEF compatible (plastic or
Environmental Protection Agency.
 SCR catalyst stainless steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels or non-stainless steel should be avoided as they
 UQS Sensor
of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from engines) are subject to corrosion by DEF.
that are harmful to our health and the environment For system messages and warnings Ú page 81.
 If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up
to a near-zero level. A small quantity of Diesel NOTE: completely.
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is injected into the exhaust  Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection
upstream of a catalyst where, when vaporized, it system. You may occasionally hear an audible
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
converts smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into clicking noise. This is normal operation. The DEF gauge (located on the instrument cluster)
harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two will display the level of DEF remaining in the tank
natural components of the air we breathe. You can  The DEF pump will run for a period of time after
Ú page 81.
operate with the comfort that your vehicle is engine shutdown to purge the DEF system. This
contributing to a cleaner, healthier world is normal operation. NOTE:
environment for this and generations to come. Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage  Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load,
etc.) will effect the amount of DEF that is used in
System Overview Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very your vehicle.
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust Fluid stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is kept
in temperatures between 10° and 90°F (-12° and  Another factor is that outside temperature can
(DEF) injection system and a Selective Catalytic affect DEF consumption. In cold conditions,
Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the emission 32°C), it will last a minimum of one year.
12°F (-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge needle
requirements. DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest can stay on a fixed position and may not move
The DEF injection system consists of the following temperatures. For example, DEF may freeze at for extended periods of time. This is a normal
components: temperatures at or below 12°F (-11°C). The function of the system.
system has been designed to operate in this
 DEF tank environment.  There is an electric heater inside the DEF tank
 DEF pump that automatically works when necessary. If the
DEF supply does freeze, the truck will operate
 DEF injector
normally until it thaws.
DEF FILL PROCEDURE  The DEF gauge may also not immediately Refilling With Containers
update after a refill if the temperature of the Proceed as follows:
NOTE:
DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
For the correct fluid type Ú page 404.  Check the expiration date.
heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid and
Remove cap from DEF tank (located on drivers side allow the gauge to update after a period of run  Read the advice for use on the label before
of the vehicle or in fuel door). time. Under very cold conditions, it is possible pouring the content of the bottle into the DEF
that the gauge may not reflect the new fill level tank.
for several drives.  After the indication appears on the instrument
 At 40°F (4°C) you could see some increase in cluster display Ú page 81 fill the DEF tank with
the DEF gauge due to the tank thawing. The no more than 6 gallons (22 liters).
gauge and level sensor are working properly and 4
are just updating with proper thawed DEF. CAUTION!
 Excessive overfilling of the DEF tank can result  To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to
in a MIL lamp/fault code and inaccurate level the DEF tank from overfilling, do not “top off”
readings. the DEF tank after filling.
Refilling With Nozzles  DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12ºF
DEF Filler Cap And Fuel Fill Chassis Cab Models (-11ºC). The DEF system is designed to work in
You can fill up at any DEF distributor.
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location Proceed as follows: temperatures below the DEF freezing point,
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location however, if the tank is overfilled and freezes,
 Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler tube, start the system could be damaged.
refilling and stop refilling at the first shut-off (the
shut-off indicates that the DEF tank is full). DO  When DEF is spilled, clean the area immedi-
NOTE:
NOT proceed with the refilling, to prevent ately with water and use an absorbent mate-
 The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds to
spillage of DEF. rial to soak up the spills on the ground.
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF to
the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the  Extract the nozzle.  Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is
DEF system, the gauge may not update to the accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank as it
new level. See an authorized dealer for service. can result in severe damage to your engine,
including but not limited to failure of the fuel
pump and injectors.
(Continued)
Extra care should be taken when filling with Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
CAUTION! portable containers to avoid overfilling. Note the in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity
 Never add anything other than DEF to the tank level of the DEF gauge in your instrument cluster. (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
– especially any form of hydrocarbon such as You may safely add a maximum of 2 gallons suspension components sometimes specified by
diesel fuel, fuel system additives, gasoline, or (7.5 liters) of DEF from portable containers when purchasers for increased durability does not
any other petroleum-based product. Even a very your DEF gauge is reading ½ full. necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
small amount of these, less than 100 parts per
million or less than 1 oz. per 78 gallons VEHICLE LOADING TIRE SIZE
(295 liters) will contaminate the entire DEF The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
system and will require replacement. If owners GROSS V EHICLE WEIGHT RATING represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
use a container, funnel or nozzle when refilling (GVWR) Replacement tires must be equal to the load
the tank, it should either be new or one that has capacity of this tire size.
only been used for adding DEF. Mopar® The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
provides an attachable nozzle with its DEF for vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, RIM S IZE
this purpose. options and cargo. The label also specifies
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems
size listed.
(GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and
Stop filling the DEF tank immediately if DEF
splashes or wells back in the filler neck.
front and rear GAWR are not exceeded. I NFLATION P RESSURE
Reinstall cap onto DEF filler tube. PAYLOAD This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Filling The Def Tank In Cold Climates The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
Since DEF will begin to freeze at 12°F (-11°C), load weight a truck can carry, including the weight CURB W EIGHT
your vehicle is equipped with an automatic DEF of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
heating system. This allows the DEF injection
system to operate properly at temperatures below
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR) weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
12°F (-11°C). If your vehicle is not in operation for The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
an extended period of time with temperatures front and rear axles. The load must be distributed front and rear curb weight values are determined
below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in the tank may in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
freeze. If the tank is overfilled and freezes, it could not exceeded. before any occupants or cargo are added.
be damaged. Therefore, do not overfill the DEF
tank.
LOADING CAUTION!
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The actual total weight and the weight of the front The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 172.
ready for operation. change the way your vehicle handles. This could
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a cause you to lose control. Overloading can Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not shorten the life of your vehicle. The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of of all cargo, consumables and equipment
the vehicle should then be determined separately (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
to be sure that the load is properly distributed over TRAILER TOWING trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" 4
the front and rear axles. Weighing the vehicle may In this section you will find safety tips and condition.
show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axle information on limits to the type of towing you can The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
has been exceeded but the total load is within the reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from trailer, carefully review this information to tow your entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the load as efficiently and safely as possible. the scale.
specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and WARNING!
weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving. recommendations in this manual concerning If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg)
vehicles used for trailer towing. or more, it is recommended to use a
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
and the way the brakes operate.
The following trailer towing related definitions will weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of
assist you in understanding the following your vehicle and cause a collision.
information:
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) friction associated with the telescoping motion to Weights (TW) and may be required depending on
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
while traveling. with GAWR requirements.
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) swaying trailer and automatically applies individual WARNING!
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to  An improperly adjusted weight-distributing
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front attempt to eliminate the trailer sway. hitch system may reduce handling, stability
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not and braking performance and could result in a
exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 172. Weight-Carrying Hitch
collision.
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
WARNING! weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch  Weight-distributing systems may not be
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
It is important that you do not exceed the with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
small and medium sized trailers.
driving condition can result if either rating is additional information.
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle Weight-Distributing Hitch
and have a collision. A weight-distributing hitch system works by
applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They
Tongue Weight (TW) are typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
the load on your vehicle. more level ride, offering more consistent steering
Trailer Frontal Area and brake control, thereby enhancing towing
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer. control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that (TSC) and a weight-distributing (load equalizing)
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/

ADJUSTMENT 2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between
H2 and H1 above normal ride height [H1]).
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to
the trailer (do not connect the trailer). 6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and
weight-distributing hitch to confirm manufac-
2. Measure the height from the top of the front
turers’ recommendations have been met.
wheel opening on the fender to the ground,
this is height H1.
Measurement Example 2500/3500
Example Height (mm)
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct) H1 1,030 4
H2 1,058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1,044
NOTE:
Measuring Height (H) For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with TOW/HAUL mode engaged.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight-distribution bars connected. Fifth-Wheel Hitch
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch 4. Measure the height from the top of the front The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with
(Incorrect) wheel opening on the fender to the ground, a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow
this is height H2. vehicle in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and
fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars per the manufac- Your truck may be equipped with a fifth-wheel hitch
turers’ recommendations so that the height of option. Refer to the separately provided fifth-wheel
hitch safety, care, assembly, and operating
instructions.
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch
mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed.
TRAILER HITCH TYPE AND M AXIMUM T RAILER W EIGHT
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Fifth-Wheel/Gooseneck Greater than 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM T RAILER W EIGHT RATINGS)

NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website addresses:
 ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
 ramtruck.ca (Canada)
 rambodybuilder.com
TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT Consider the following items when computing the
CAUTION!
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight  Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
 The tongue weight of the trailer.
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
 The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
ment put in or on your vehicle.
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
 The weight of the driver and all passengers. of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional Servicing” Ú page 328. When towing a trailer,
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings. 4
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. For the maximum combined weight of WARNING!
occupants and cargo for your vehicle Ú page 380.
 Make certain that the load is secured in the
Weight Distribution TOWING REQUIREMENTS trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
CAUTION! drivetrain components, the following guidelines difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in are recommended. control of your vehicle and have a collision.
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads CAUTION!  When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
 Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
can cause the trailer to sway severely side to can cause a loss of control, poor performance
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
side which will cause loss of control of the The engine, axle or other parts could be
vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
damaged. or tires.
in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
(Continued) (Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires brake system, an electronic brake controller is

WARNING! not required.
 Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
 Safety chains must always be used between compact spare tire.  Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
 Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer towing while using a full size spare tire.
tongue and allow enough slack for turning  Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to WARNING!
corners. the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.  Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
 Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
a grade. When parking, apply the parking  Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation brake system and cause it to fail. You might
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle pressures before trailer usage. not have brakes when you need them and
transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive  Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire could have an accident.
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in damage before towing a trailer.
 Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer  For the proper tire replacement procedures.
wheels. distance. When towing, you should allow for
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying additional space between your vehicle and the
 GCWR must not be exceeded. capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
and GAWR limits. result in an accident.
 Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the  For further information Ú page 376.
following four ratings are not exceeded: Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
CAUTION!
 GVWR  Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
 GTW loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
 GAWR and possible personal injury. should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch  An electronically actuated trailer brake higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
utilized. controller is required when towing a trailer with distances.
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) — The user interface consists of the following: GAIN
If Equipped Manual Brake Control Lever The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake
Your vehicle may have an ITBM for Electric and Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to control for the specific towing condition and should
Electric Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes. activate power to the trailer's electric brakes be changed as towing conditions change. Changes
independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle
NOTE: load, road conditions and weather.
This module has been designed and verified with manual brake control lever is activated while the
electric trailer brakes and new electric over brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs Adjusting GAIN
determines the power sent to the trailer brakes. NOTE:
hydraulic systems. Some previous EOH systems
may not be compatible with ITBM. The trailer and the vehicle’s stop lamps will come This should only be performed in a traffic-free envi-
on when braking normally with the vehicle brake ronment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
pedal. Only the trailer stop lamps will come on
4
(30–40 km/h).
when the manual brake control lever is applied. 1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light working condition, functioning normally and
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection properly adjusted. See a trailer dealer if
status. necessary.
If no electrical connection is detected after the 2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical
ignition is turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment connections according to the trailer
button or sliding the manual brake control lever manufacturer's instructions.
will display the GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the 3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will not be plugged in, the trailer connected message
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
displayed. should appear in the instrument cluster
1 — GAIN - Adjustment Button If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the ITBM, display (if the connection is not recognized by
2 — GAIN + Adjustment Button the Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will flash. the ITBM, braking functions will not be
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
the correct type of trailer must be selected
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control from the instrument cluster display options.
power output to the trailer brakes in
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering
0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be increased
wheel until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the
to a maximum of 10 or decreased to a minimum of
screen.
0 (no trailer braking).
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to 8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a
enter “TRAILER TOW”. a dry, level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be
Brake Type appears on the screen. control lever completely. attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by 10.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or
DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the
Type appears on the screen. trailer wheels turn freely, increase the GAIN
setting.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH

Electric over Hydraulic Trailer Electric over Hydraulic Trailer
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Brakes Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Above 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Under 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Above 10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
* The suggested selection depends and may change depending on the customer preferences for braking performance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road state may also
affect the selection.
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument cluster display. Display messages, along with a single chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is
determined in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or on the trailer Ú page 81.
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in personal injury.
NOTE:
CAUTION! Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with harness.
the ITBM system may result in reduced or The electrical connections are all complete to the
complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
increase in stopping distance or trailer instability connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
which could result in damage to your vehicle,
NOTE:
trailer, or other property.
 Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
NOTE: device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
 An aftermarket controller may be available for into water.
Seven-Pin Connector 4
use with trailers with air or EOH trailer brake  Be sure to reconnect once clear from water 1 — Backup Lamps
systems. To determine the type of brakes on area. 2 — Running Lamps
your trailer and the availability of controllers,
3 — Left Stop/Turn
check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
4 — Ground
 Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it
5 — Battery
may cause damage to the electrical system and
electronic modules of the vehicle. See an autho- 6 — Right Stop/Turn
rized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be 7 — Electric Brakes
installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Trailer Light Check
Wiring This feature will run the trailer lights through a
sequence to check the trailer light function. It is
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
available in the instrument cluster under the
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are Four-Pin Connector Trailer Tow menu Ú page 85.
required for motoring safety.
1 — Ground
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved 2 — Park
trailer harness and connector. 3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
When activated the feature will enable all of the The sequence will only activate if the following TOWING TIPS
exterior lights sequentially for up to five minutes conditions are met:
allowing time to walk around and verify Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
 Vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow
functionality. The following exterior lights will stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
Package
remain on for the entirety of the sequence: located away from heavy traffic.
 Vehicle is in PARK
 Park/Running Lamps Automatic Transmission
 Vehicle is not in motion
 Side Marker Lamps (if equipped) The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
 Ignition in ACC or RUN transmission controls include a drive strategy to
 License Lamp
 Remote start is inactive avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
 Signature Lamp (if equipped) frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select
 Brakes are not applied
 Low Beams TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower gear range
 Left turn signal is not applied (using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
 Fog Lamps (if equipped)
 Right turn signal not applied control).
 Daytime Running Lamps
 Hazard switch is not applied NOTE:
During this time the following lights will sequence, Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear
each activating for three seconds: The sequence will cancel if any of the following
conditions occur: range (using the ERS shift control) while operating
1. Brake and CHMSL (third brake light) the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will
 Brakes are applied
2. Left turn signal improve performance and extend transmission life
 Vehicle is shifted from PARK by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
3. Right turn signal This action will also provide better engine braking.
 Vehicle is no longer stationary
4. Reverse Lamps 6-Speed Automatic Transmission Only
 Left turn signal activated from stalk
5. High Beam When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at
 Right turn signal is activated from stalk
low speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or below), holding
This light check sequence will continue for a total  Hazard switch is activated your vehicle in FIRST gear (using the ERS shift
of five minutes.
 Any button on the key fob is pushed control) can help to avoid transmission
 Ignition button is pushed overheating.
 High Beam stalk position is changed
 Sequence is canceled in the instrument cluster
If you regularly tow a trailer for more than

45 minutes of continuous operation, then change
SNOWPLOW — IF EQUIPPED BEFORE PLOWING
the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) as Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory  Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper
specified for "police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer installed option. These packages include fluid level.
towing." Ú page 329. components necessary to equip your vehicle with a  Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper
snowplow. tightness.
NOTE:
Check the automatic transmission fluid level NOTE:  Check the runners and cutting edge for exces-
before towing (6-speed automatic only). Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recom- sive wear. The cutting edge should be ¼ to
mended that the owner/installer obtain and follow ½ inches (6 cm to 1.2 cm) above ground in
Tow/Haul Mode
the recommendations contained within the current snow plowing position.
To reduce potential for automatic transmission Body Builder’s Guide. See an authorized dealer, 4
overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when  Check that snowplow lighting is connected and
installer or snowplow manufacturer for this infor-
driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range functioning properly.
mation. There are unique electrical systems that
(using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift must be connected to properly ensure operator SNOWPLOW PREP PACKAGE MODEL
control) on more severe grades. safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems.
AVAILABILITY
Cruise Control — If Equipped
WARNING! For Information about snowplow applications visit
 Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body
 When using the Cruise Control, if you experience Builder’s Guide.
adversely affect performance of the airbag
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
system in a collision. Do not expect that the 1. The maximum number of occupants in the
disengage until you can get back to cruising
airbag will perform as described earlier in this truck should not exceed two.
speed.
manual. 2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear
 Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
GAWR should never be exceeded.
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
CAUTION! 3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition
of options or passengers, etc.
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if
exterior lamps are not properly installed.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow OVER THE ROAD OPERATION W ITH GENERAL MAINTENANCE
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver,
passengers, options, and cargo, must not exceed S NOWPLOW ATTACHED Snowplows should be maintained in accordance
either the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and with the plow manufacturer's instructions.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). These weights causes the engine to operate at higher than Keep all snowplow electrical connections and
are specified on the Safety Compliance normal temperatures. Therefore, when battery terminals clean and free of corrosion.
Certification Label on the driver's side door transporting the plow, angle the blade completely When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and
opening. and position it as low as road or surface conditions drivetrain damage, the following precautions
NOTE: permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The should be observed.
Detach the snowplow when transporting operator should always maintain a safe stopping
 Operate with transfer case in 4WD LOW when
passengers. distance and allow adequate passing clearance.
plowing small or congested areas where speeds
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to OPERATING T IPS are not likely to exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At
specifications at the factory without consideration higher speeds operate in 4WD HIGH.
for the weight of the plow. Front end toe-in should Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph
(32 km/h) should be maximum operating speed.  Vehicles with automatic transmissions should
be checked and reset if necessary at the beginning
The operator should be familiar with the area and use 4WD LOW when plowing deep or heavy
and end of the snowplow season. This will help
surface to be cleaned. Reduce speed and use snow for extended periods of time to avoid
prevent uneven tire wear.
extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas or transmission overheating.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle
under poor visibility.  Do not shift the transmission unless the engine
is parked.
has returned to idle and wheels have stopped.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow Make a practice of stepping on the brake pedal
equipment following the recommendations while shifting the transmission.
provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND A NOTHER V EHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
 Automatic transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
 Transfer case in N (Neutral)
 Tow in forward direction
4
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE: dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow 6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable this procedure: towing, to secure the front wheels in the
state and provincial laws. Contact state and 1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, straight position.
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional following the dolly manufacturer's
details. instructions. CAUTION!
RECREATIONAL TOWING — T WO-W HEEL 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.  Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
DRIVE MODELS 3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place cause severe transmission damage. Damage
automatic transmission in PARK. from improper towing is not covered under the
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
drivetrain will result. 4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.  Do not disconnect the driveshaft because
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position and fluid may leak from the transmission, causing
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the
remove the key fob. damage to internal parts.
ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
RECREATIONAL TOWING — CAUTION!

Shifting Into N (Neutral)
F OUR-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS  Before recreational towing, the transfer case
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
NOTE: must be in N (Neutral). To be certain the
Both the manual shift and electronically shifted transfer case is fully in N (Neutral), perform WARNING!
transfer cases must be shifted into N (Neutral) for the procedure outlined under “Shifting Into N
recreational towing. Automatic transmissions must (Neutral)”. Internal transmission damage will You or others could be injured or killed if you
be shifted into PARK for recreational towing. Refer result, if the transfer case is not in N (Neutral) leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
to the following for the proper transfer case N during towing. case in the N (Neutral) position without first fully
(Neutral) shifting procedure for your vehicle. engaging the parking brake. The transfer case N
 The transmission must be placed in PARK for (Neutral) position disengages both the front and
CAUTION! recreational towing. rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and will
 Towing this vehicle in violation of the above allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic
 DO NOT dolly tow any four-wheel drive vehicle. transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
requirements can cause severe transmission
Towing with only one set of wheels on the should always be applied when the driver is not
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
ground (front or rear) will cause severe trans- in the vehicle.
improper towing is not covered under the New
mission and/or transfer case damage. Tow
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
with all four wheels either ON the ground, or
OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).  Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because CAUTION!
fluid will leak from the transfer case, causing
 Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain
damage to internal parts.
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage that the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral)
to the transfer case.  Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow before recreational towing to prevent damage to
(Continued) bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will internal parts.
be damaged.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level

ground, with the engine running. Firmly apply
the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transfer case into N (Neutral): 10. Shift the transmission into PARK. Shifting Out Of N (Neutral)
 With manual shift transfer case, shift the 11. Place the ignition in the OFF mode, and Use the following procedure to prepare your
transfer case lever into N (Neutral). remove the key fob. vehicle for normal usage:
 With electronically shifted transfer case, 12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving
push and hold the transfer case N (Neutral) suitable tow bar. it connected to the tow vehicle.
button. Some models have a small, 13. Release the parking brake. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
recessed "N" button (at the center of the
transfer case switches) that must be 3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
NOTE:
pressed using a ballpoint pen or similar With electronically shifted transfer case: 4. Start the engine, and shift the transmission
object. Other models have a rectangular N into NEUTRAL.
 Steps 2 through 3 are requirements that must 4
(Neutral) switch, below the rotary transfer  With manual shift transfer case, shift the
be met before pushing the N (Neutral) button,
case control knob. The N (Neutral) indicator transfer case lever to the desired position.
and must continue to be met until the shift has
light will blink while the shift is in progress.
been completed. If any of these requirements  With electronically shifted transfer case
The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
are not met before pushing the N (Neutral) with rotary selector switch, push and hold
when the shift to N (Neutral) is complete.
button or are no longer met during the shift, the the transfer case N (Neutral) button until
After the shift is completed and the N
N (Neutral) indicator light will flash continuously the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off. After
(Neutral) light stays on, release the N
until all requirements are met or until the the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off,
(Neutral) button.
N (Neutral) button is released. release the N (Neutral) button. After the N
5. Release the parking brake. (Neutral) button has been released, the
 The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE. shift to take place and for the position indicator transfer case will shift to the position indi-
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the cated by the selector switch.
ensure that there is no vehicle movement. ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and  With electronically shifted transfer case
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. with push-button selector switch, push and
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with automatic
transmission in DRIVE.  A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light hold the switch for the desired transfer case
indicates that shift requirements have not been position, until the N (Neutral) indicator light
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly
met. turns off and the desired position indicator
apply the parking brake. Turn off the engine.
light turns on.
For vehicles with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, push
and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until
the engine shuts off.
NOTE:
When shifting the transfer case out of N (Neutral),
NOTE:
With electronically shifted transfer case:
DRIVING TIPS
turning the engine off is not required, but may be  Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be DRIVING ON S LIPPERY S URFACES
helpful to avoid gear clash. With 8-speed auto- met before pushing the button to shift out of N
matic transmission, the engine must remain (Neutral), and must continue to be met until the Acceleration
running, since turning the engine off will shift the shift has been completed. If any of these Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
transmission to PARK (and the transmission must requirements are not met before pushing the slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to shift out of button or are no longer met during the shift, the pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
NEUTRAL). N (Neutral) indicator light will flash continuously occurs when there is a difference in the surface
5. Turn the engine off. Shift automatic until all requirements are met or until the button traction under the rear (driving) wheels.
transmission into PARK. On 8-speed is released.
transmissions the shifter will automatically  The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a WARNING!
select PARK when the engine is turned off. shift to take place and for the position indicator Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
6. Release the brake pedal. lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden
7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle. ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. of the vehicle and possibly have a collision.
8. Start the engine.
 A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. indicates that shift requirements have not been is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud,
10. Release the parking brake. met. loose sand, etc.).
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING! CAUTION!

Driving through water more than a few inches/  Driving through standing water limits your  Driving through standing water may cause
centimeters deep will require extra caution to vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. stopping distances. Therefore, after driving nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
Flowing/Rising Water through standing water, drive slowly and (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
lightly press on the brake pedal several times signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
WARNING! to dry the brakes. or foamy in appearance) after driving through
standing water. Do not continue to operate
Do not drive on or across a road or path where  Failure to follow these warnings may result in
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road passengers, and others around you.
as this may result in further damage. Such 4
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink
Limited Warranty.
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. CAUTION!  Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
Failure to follow this warning may result in cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
 Always check the depth of the standing water
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your serious internal damage to the engine. Such
before driving through it. Never drive through
passengers, and others around you. damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
Limited Warranty.
of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Shallow Standing Water  Determine the condition of the road or the
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through path that is under water and if there are any
shallow standing water, consider the following obstacles in the way before driving through
Warnings and Cautions before doing so. the standing water.
 Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
WARNING!
through standing water. This will minimize
 Driving through standing water limits your wave effects.
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed (Continued)
5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water.
(Continued)
190
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
computer or other devices, your vehicle may WARNING!
For detailed information about your Uconnect 3 With require software updates to improve the usability  As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
5-inch Display Ú page 211. and performance of your systems or to reduce the behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
For detailed information about your Uconnect potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access authorized dealer immediately.
5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display system or your to your vehicle systems.
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display system, refer The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to NOTE:
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
 FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
NOTE: most recent version of vehicle software (such as
directly regarding software updates.
Uconnect screen images are for illustration Uconnect software) is installed.
 To help further improve vehicle security and
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
WARNING! minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
for your vehicle.
vehicle owners should:
 It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
CYBERSECURITY possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems  Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may (Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
systems, including safety related systems,
be equipped with both wired and wireless able Uconnect software updates.
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
could occur that may result in an accident  Only connect and use trusted media
send and receive information. This information
involving serious injury or death. devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
USBs, CDs).
function properly.  ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
possibly contain malicious software, and if cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the intercept information and private communications
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached. without your consent Ú page 103.
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, (Continued)
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
MULTIMEDIA 191
UCONNECT SETTINGS CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE F EATURES For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, the
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display, and
The Uconnect system uses a combination of Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the For Uconnect 3, push the SETTINGS button on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument top on faceplate. In this menu, the Uconnect
panel. These buttons allow you to access and system allows you to access all of the available
change the Customer Programmable Features. programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
For Uconnect 5, push the Vehicle button, then
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or press the Settings tab on the top of the
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect system
instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/ allows you to access all of the available
Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn programmable features.
the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control NOTE: 5
knob one or more times to select or change a  Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
setting. time.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off  Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
and Mute buttons on the faceplate. settings may vary.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn When making a selection, press the button on the
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
tap the screen to turn the screen on. the desired menu, press and release the preferred
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu setting option until a check mark appears next to
or certain option on the Uconnect system. the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, press the
For the Uconnect 5 systems, push and hold the Vehicle button to exit to the screen. Pressing the
Power button on the radio’s faceplate for a Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio. Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display Touchscreen And screen will allow you to toggle up or down through
Faceplate Buttons the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
192 MULTIMEDIA
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument
Language
Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”.
Display Mode
“Manual” allows for more customization with the radio display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
Display Brightness Headlights On access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
Display Brightness Headlights Off access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
The available settings are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure”
Units
(psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), Power” (HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or
kW), and “Torque” (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
Instrument Cluster Display.
MULTIMEDIA 193

This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
Time Format
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male”
Voice Options
or “Female”.
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available
Wake Up Word
options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off.
This setting will allow the Command List to be shown. The options are “On”
Show Command List
and “Off”.
5
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your
Navigation Settings
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel
Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle
is started.
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
Radio Power Off turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the
Radio Off With Door
doors are opened.
This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings
Audio Settings
Ú page 207.
194 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off”
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups
options.
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups
“Off” options.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages.
New Text Message Pop-ups
Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting
Missed Calls Message
options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting
Navigation Pop-ups
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
Restore Settings to Default
default.
Trip B This setting will turn the Trip B feature in the cluster on or off.
Audio Info On Cluster This setting will turn the audio info on the cluster on or off.
Digital Speed On All Cluster Screens This setting will show the digital speedometer on all cluster screens.
Consumption Bar On Cluster Screen This setting will show the digital fuel consumption bar on all cluster screens.
This setting will allow you to customize the information displayed on the
Custom Areas On Cluster
cluster.
Audio Repetition This setting will turn the system audio repetition on or off.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
MULTIMEDIA 195
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument
Language
Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
Display Mode 5
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
The available settings are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure”
Units
(psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), Power” (HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or
kW), and “Torque” (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable
Keyboard keyboards are “ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY
Keyboard”.
196 MULTIMEDIA

Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after
Control Screen Timeout
five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
Instrument Cluster Display.
Fuel Saver Display This setting will enable fuel saver mode in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Ready To Drive Pop-ups
Display.
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a
subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:

This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
“Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at
a far distance from the vehicle.
MULTIMEDIA 197

This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide
Forward Collision Warning only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active
Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure
when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off.
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide
LaneSense Warning lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and
“Late”.
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a
LaneSense Strength 5
lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
ParkSense
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available
Front ParkSense Volume
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
Rear ParkSense Volume
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The
Blind Spot Alert “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside
mirrors and an audible chime.
This setting will auto detect the length of an attached trailer. The “Auto”
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert setting will have the system automatically set the trailer length. The “Max”
setting will always set the length to the maximum 39.5 ft (12 m).
198 MULTIMEDIA

Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
This setting will raise and lower or stow the Power Side Steps. The available
Power Side Steps options are “Automatic” to raise and lower the Power Side Steps and “Stow” to
deactivate the Power Side Steps.
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:

This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system
Sync Time With GPS
will control the time via the GPS location.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
Set Time And Format/Time Format
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
MULTIMEDIA 199

This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for
Set Time Hours this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-”
setting will decrease the hours.
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off
Set Time Minutes for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The
“-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio 5
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:

Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All settings menu. The available
Do Not Disturb All
This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The
Enable Two Active Phones
setting options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
Display.
200 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:

This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or
Voice Options
“Female”.
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available
Wake Up Word
options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement
Voice Barge-In
is completed by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
Show Command List
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
Navigation — If Equipped
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can
change which icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
MULTIMEDIA 201
Trailer Brake/Trailer
When the Trailer Brake/Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
NOTE:

Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, or “Trailer 4”. These trailer
Trailer Select
designations can be used to save different trailer settings.
This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available options
Trailer Brake Type are “Light Electric”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light Electric-Over-Hydraulic”, and
“Heavy Electric-Over-Hydraulic”. 5
This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of trailer
you are hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list: trailer, boat,
Trailer Name
car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock,
motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility, and 5th wheel.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:

This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting
Surround View Camera Delay
out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
202 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Mirrors & Wipers

When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:

This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the
transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and
“Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
MULTIMEDIA 203
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
 When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchased.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
Headlight Off Delay to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
5
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
Headlight Illumination On Approach to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
Flash Lights With Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
This setting will turn the headlights with the steering wheel. The available
Steering Directed Lights
204 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
Doors & Locks

When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:

This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the
Auto Door Locks
vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the
Auto Unlock On Exit
inside.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
Flash Lights With Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed.
Sound Horn With Lock The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed
once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
MULTIMEDIA 205

This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the
Sound Horn With Remote Start
key fob.
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob
are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting
will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n
Passive Entry
Go™) on or off.
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
been linked to the key fob.
5
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems
When the Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort
systems when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:

This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle
The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start”
Start
setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All
Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine
Easy Exit Seats
is shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
206 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options

When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings
will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:

Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
Key Off Power Delay/Engine Off Power Delay turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on
Headlight Off Delay after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of
time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Suspension/Air Suspension
When the Suspension/Air Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
NOTE:

This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display Suspension Messages Display. The “All” setting will display all available messages. The “Warnings
Only” setting will only display warning messages.
This setting will disable the air suspension system to assist in changing a
Tire Jack Mode
spare tire.
MULTIMEDIA 207

Transport Mode This setting will disable the air suspension system for flat towing.
This setting must be activated before performing a wheel alignment. Refer to
Wheel Alignment Mode
an authorized dealer for further information.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
5
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back
Balance/Fade and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio
location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
Speed Adjusted Volume the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the
AUX Volume Offset
AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
208 MULTIMEDIA
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:

This setting will turn off the Notification chime that plays when a new
Notification Sounds
notification is sent. The options are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any
New Text Message Pop-Ups
connected phone on or off.
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected
Missed Calls Message
phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 209
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used
to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
 A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a
Tune Start
music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will 5
display of the skipped channels.
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel
Subscription Information
Link is a separate subscription.
Software Updates — If Equipped

When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:

This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
options for the setting are “On” and “Off”.
210 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings.
These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:

Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel
the screen.
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
Restore Settings to Default
default.
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal
Clear Personal Data
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection projection. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can
also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
MULTIMEDIA 211
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM O VERVIEW
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display

1 — RADIO Button 6 — COMPASS Button
2 — MEDIA Button 7 — SETTINGS Button
3 — PHONE Button 8 — MORE Button
4 — VOLUME & On/Off Button 9 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL Knob
5 — MUTE Button 10 — SCREEN OFF Button
212 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
Feature Description
Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Radio/Media
Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources Ú page 213.
Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the
Phone
hands-free phone system Ú page 223.
Settings Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 191.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system
off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to
reset the radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from
freezing or being stuck.
Compass Push the COMPASS button to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Push the MORE button to access additional options.
MULTIMEDIA 213
SAFETY AND GENERAL I NFORMATION  Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a  If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
Safety Guidelines and emergency vehicles. alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu-
tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
WARNING! Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
manufacturer's precautions and directions
 The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec- Ú page 412.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the tronic device. Do not let young children use the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
system.
UCONNECT MODES
Uconnect features and applications in this  Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do your music or sound system at loud volumes. STEERING W HEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident Exercise caution when setting the volume on the
system. The remote sound system controls are located on
involving serious injury or death. the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three
 Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
away from the system. Besides damage to the
and nine o’clock positions. 5
Please read this manual carefully before using the
system. It contains instructions on how to use the system, moisture can cause electric shocks as
system in a safe and effective manner. with any electronic device.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. NOTE:

Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen. Many features of this system are speed
dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
Please read and follow these safety precautions. use some of the touchscreen features while the
Failure to do so may result in injury or property vehicle is in motion.
damage.
Care And Maintenance
 Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If
prolonged viewing of the screen is required,  Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
park in a safe location and set the parking sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), Remote Sound System Controls
brake. which could scratch the surface.
 Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.  Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens
the product. See an authorized dealer for repair. cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
214 MULTIMEDIA
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with goes to the beginning of the current track, or the 6 — Station Info
a push button in the center and controls the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight 7 — Audio Settings
volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing seconds after the current track begins to play.
8 — Seek Up
the top of the rocker switch will increase the Double pressing the bottom button switch will skip
volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker to the previous track if it is after eight seconds into
switch will decrease the volume. the current track. The radio is equipped with the following modes:
Pushing the center button will make the radio  AM
RADIO MODE
switch between the various modes available  FM
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.). Radio Controls  SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter
push button in the center. The function of the the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM,
left-hand control is different depending on which FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the
mode you are in. corresponding button in Radio Mode.
The following describes the left-hand control Volume & On/Off Control
operation in each mode:
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on
Radio Operation and off the Uconnect system.
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for the The electronic volume control turns continuously
next available station and pushing the bottom of (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
the switch will Seek Down for the next available Turning the VOUME & On/Off control knob
station. clockwise increases the volume, and
The button located in the center of the left-hand counterclockwise decreases it.
control will tune to the next preset station that you When the audio system is turned on, the sound will
have programmed in the radio presets. 1 — Preset Radio Stations be set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Mode 2 — All Preset Radio Stations Mute Button
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next 3 — Seek Down
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/ 4 — Radio Band (AM/FM) system.
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go 5 — Tune
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
MULTIMEDIA 215
Tune/Scroll Control NOTE: RADIO VOICE COMMANDS

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to Seek Down button will scan the different SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the frequency bands at a slower rate. to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM®
ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection. Info — If Equipped Satellite Radio trial required.)
Seek Press the Info button to display information related Push the VR button on the steering wheel and
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by to the currently playing song and radio station. wait for the beep to say a command. See an
pressing the double arrow buttons on the Direct Tune example below:
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio  “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
station display or by pushing the left steering wheel Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the
audio control button up or down. radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio  “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
station or channel. Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press the available number button on the what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, 5
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station. push the VR button and say “Help”. The system
Down button to tune the radio to the next Once a number has been entered, any numbers provides you with a list of commands.
available station or channel. During a Seek Up/ that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be
reached) will become deactivated/grayed out. SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band two
If Equipped
Undo
times, the radio will stop at the station where it You can backspace an entry by pressing the
began.
Back button on the touchscreen.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down GO
Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up Once the last digit of a station has been entered,
or Seek Down button to advance the radio press “Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and
through the available stations or channels at a the system will automatically tune to that station.
faster rate. The radio stops at the next available
station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
216 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct This functionality is only available for radios NOTE:
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content. receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service. outside with a clear view to the sky. The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might SXM button on the touchscreen.
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s have to change the vehicle’s position in order to When in Satellite Mode:
Manual kit for more information. receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio
 The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold does not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels. lighted.
separately after the trial included with the new
 The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your No Subscription
service at the end of your trial subscription, the of the screen.
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at  The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at radio does not have the necessary subscription, the center.
866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM® the radio is able to receive the Preview channel  The Program Information is displayed at the
Customer Agreement for complete terms at only. bottom of the Channel Number.
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription  The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed
(Canada).
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio below the Program Information.
All fees and programming subject to change.
subscription, US residents visit http:// Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
www.siriusxm.com/getallaccess or call: Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
US and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also 1-800-643-2112 In addition to the tuning operation functions
available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ common to all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio or call: 1-888-539-7474. Weather button, and Favorite button functions are
service is available throughout their satellite available in SiriusXM® Mode.
service area and in AK. © 2021 SiriusXM® Radio
Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
MULTIMEDIA 217
1 — Browse REPLAY
2 — Radio Bands Replay provides a means to store and replay up to
3 — Direct Tune 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk
radio. Once the channel is switched, content in
4 — Info Button
replay memory is lost.
5 — Next Button
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The
Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will
display at the top of the screen, along with the
replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the
touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
5
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of live or rewound content
Play/Pause
at any time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on the touchscreen.
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Rewind Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds rewinds the content.
The radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is released.
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five
seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be done when the content is previously rewound,
Forward and therefore, cannot be done for live content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at which
the press is released.
Live Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of live content.
218 MULTIMEDIA
FAVORITES This Screen contains many submenus. You can Remove Favorites
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to
pressing the Back arrow. screen. Press the Delete All button on the
activate the favorites menu, which will time out
within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction. All touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X
pressing the All button, the following categories deleted.
button.
become available: Alert Settings
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite
artist or song that is currently playing. The radio  Channel List: Press the Channel List to display Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
then uses this information to alert you when either all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows
the favorite artist or song is being played at any scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and you to choose from a visual alert or audible and
time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels. Down arrows, located on the right side of the visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating any of the SiriusXM® channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50. the TUNE/SCROLL knob. Game Zone
 Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touch- Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the screen to display a list of Genres. You can select the Browse screen. This feature provides you with
touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on any desired Genre by pressing the Genre List. the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and
the touchscreen. The radio tunes to a channel with the content in set alerts.
the selected Genre.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a On-Air
favorite song, press the Favorites button on the Favorites
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen. On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
the touchscreen. The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings, pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio
BROWSE IN SXM along with providing a list of Channels currently to that channel.
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to airing any of the items in the Favorites list.
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM® and Down arrows located at the right side of the
Channel List. screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
MULTIMEDIA 219
Add/Delete — If Equipped Setting Presets For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Press the Add/Delete button on the touchscreen to A set of four presets will appear on the screen.
activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen Press the All button to view all saved presets. To
league and a scroll list of all teams within the remove a saved preset, a new preset must be
league will appear, then you can select a team by saved over the old one.
pressing the corresponding box. A check mark
Audio Settings
appears for all teams that are chosen.
Press the Audio button within the settings main
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press
the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
deleted. 5
Alert Settings The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and
are activated by pressing any of the Preset
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. buttons, located at the top of the screen.
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
“Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert When you are on a station that you wish to save as
upon score update” or both when one or more of a preset, press and hold the numbered button on
your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM® the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
channels. The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Tune Start Radio Modes.
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music channel
using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs
the first time the preset is selected during that
current song.
220 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Setting Description

Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between
the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
Balance/Fade
Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker
icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Press the + or – button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease
Equalizer each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or
minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and
“3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
Speed Adjusted Volume
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction
Surround Sound — If Equipped
as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This alters the
AUX Volume Offset AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus
three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is
Auto Play — If Equipped connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press
“Off” to turn the setting off.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped driver or passenger door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay selected time
has expired.
MULTIMEDIA 221
MEDIA M ODE Audio Source Selection display will show the track number and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source
Operating Media Mode of track 1.
Select button on the touchscreen and the desired
mode button on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and BLUETOOTH® MODE
Bluetooth® are the Media sources available.
When available, you can select the Browse button Overview
on the touchscreen to be given these options: Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode
 Now Playing is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device,
containing music, to the Uconnect system.
 Artists
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
 Albums
paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate
 Genres with the Uconnect system.
 Songs On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the 5
 Playlists MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the Source button on the
 Folders
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media Ú page 223.
1 — Seek Down Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button
2 — Browse To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth®
located on the faceplate.
button on the left side of the touchscreen or under
3 — Source
Types of Media Modes the Source Select/Select Source button (if
4 — Pause/Play equipped).
5 — Info USB MODE
6 — More Options Overview
AUX MODE
7 — Seek Up USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into Overview
the USB port, or by pushing the MEDIA button on Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA the faceplate and then selecting the USB button. device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into
button located on the faceplate. On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you insert the AUX port, or by pushing the MEDIA button on
a USB device with the ignition in ON/RUN, the unit the faceplate, selecting the Source button and
will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The then the AUX button.
222 MULTIMEDIA
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you to return to the beginning of the current selection, the touchscreen to select the desired audio
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the or return to the beginning of the previous selection source: Bluetooth®.
radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode and if the Bluetooth® device is within the first second In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
begin to play. of the current selection. touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
Controlling The Auxiliary Device Browse AUX.
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the Repeat
playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be touchscreen to display the browse window. In USB In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
provided by the radio; use the device controls Mode, the left side of the browse window displays touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The
instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume button, a list of ways you can browse through the contents Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or the On/Off rotary of the USB device. If supported by the device, you when active. The Radio will continue to play the
knob, or with the volume of the attached device. can browse by Folder, Artist, Playlist, Album, Song, current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat is
NOTE: etc. Press the desired button on the touchscreen active. Press the Repeat button again to enter
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio on the left side of the screen. The center of the Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the browse window shows items and their current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat
volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too sub-functions, which can be scrolled through by function is active. To cancel Repeat, press the
low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the pressing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The Repeat button a third time.
radio unit to play the music on the device. TUNE/SCROLL knob can also be used to scroll.
Shuffle
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, select the
Seek Up /Seek Down In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the through and select a desired track on the device. touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you device in random order to provide an interesting
device. Press and release the Seek Down button wish to cancel the Browse function. change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.
Media Mode
the current selection, or to return to the beginning Audio
of the previous selection if the USB device is within In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source: Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
the first three seconds of the current selection.
USB. Audio button Ú page 214.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek
Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
MULTIMEDIA 223
Info MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS PHONE MODE

In USB Mode, press the Info button on the Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®,
touchscreen to display the current track Overview
and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only
information. Press the Info or X button on the available for connected USB and AUX devices. Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature. in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to
Push the VR button located on the steering dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
Tracks wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the The feature supports the following:
commands and follow the prompts to switch your
touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List. media source or choose an artist: Voice Activated Features
The song currently playing is indicated by an arrow  “Change source to Bluetooth®”  Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith
and lines above and below the song title. When in Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
the Tracks List screen you can rotate the TUNE/  “Change source to AUX”
 Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
SCROLL knob to highlight a track (indicated by the  “Change source to USB”
incoming SMS messages.
line above and below the track name) and then  “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest 5
push the ENTER/BROWSE knob to start playing  Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre
that track. one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
Classical”
incoming calls/text messages.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
supports this feature, press the Tracks button on  Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song device. Your Voice Command must match exactly  Calling Back the last incoming call number
List. The currently playing song is indicated by a red how the artist, album, song, and genre information (“Call Back”).
arrow and lines above and below the song title. is displayed.  Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up. Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
 Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for
John Smith Mobile”).
224 MULTIMEDIA
Screen Activated Features Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls Phone Button
 Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen. between the system and your mobile phone as you The Phone button on your steering wheel
enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute is used to get into the Phone Mode and
 Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks the system's microphone for private conversation.
displayed on the touchscreen. make calls, show recent, incoming or
outgoing calls, view phonebook, etc.
 Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they WARNING! When you push the button you will hear a BEEP.
are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen. The BEEP is your signal to give a command.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
 Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call steering wheel. You have full responsibility and Voice Command Button
logs. assume all risks related to the use of the
The Voice Command button on your
 Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Uconnect features and applications in this
steering wheel is only used for “barge in”
Messages. vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
and when you are already in a call or
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
 Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy want to make another call.
involving serious injury or death.
access to connect to them quickly. The button on your steering wheel is also used to
NOTE: access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect
The Phone feature is driven through your Voice Command features if your vehicle is
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. equipped.
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
properly.
global standard that enables different electronic Phone Operation
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through devices to connect to each other without wires or a
your vehicle’s audio system; the system will docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on OPERATION
automatically mute your radio when using the with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to the Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone. Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
For Uconnect customer support: devices are allowed to be linked to the system. structure. Voice commands are required after
 US visit UconnectPhone.com or call Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
877-855-8400 audio device can be used with the system at a general methods for how Voice Command works:
time.
 Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1. Say compound commands like “Call John
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call Smith mobile”.
800-387-9983 2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
MULTIMEDIA 225
You will be prompted for a specific command and system filters out certain non-word utterances and CANCEL COMMAND
then guided through the available options. sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The system handles
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel”
 Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait fill-in words such as “I would like to”.
and you will be returned to the main menu.
for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt The system handles multiple inputs in the same
You can also push the VR button or Phone button
or another prompt. phrase or sentence such as “make a phone call”
on your steering wheel when the system is listening
 For certain operations, compound commands and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in the
for a command and be returned to the main or
can be used. For example, instead of saying same phrase or sentence, the system identifies
previous menu.
“Call” and then “John Smith” and then “mobile”, the topic or context and provides the associated
the following compound command can be said: follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
“Call John Smith mobile.” call?” in the case where a phone call was PHONE
requested but the specific name was not
 For each feature explanation in this section, recognized. Use this QR code to access your
only the compound command form of the voice digital experience.
command is given. You can also break the The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
To begin using your Uconnect 5
commands into parts and say each part of the system requires more information from the user, it
will ask a question to which the user can respond Phone, you must pair your
command when you are asked for it. For compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
example, you can use the compound command without pushing the Voice Command button on the
steering wheel. mobile phone. Mobile phone
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” pairing is the process of
or you can break the compound command form establishing a wireless connection between a
HELP COMMAND
into two voice commands: “Search Contacts” cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
and when asked, “John Smith.” Please If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want
remember, the Uconnect Phone works best to know your options at any prompt, say “Help” To complete the pairing process, you will need to
when you talk in a normal conversational tone, following the beep. reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please
as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/ visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply
meters away from you. phone compatibility information.
push the Phone button (if active) on your steering
wheel and say a command or say “Help”. All Phone
NATURAL SPEECH sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Phone button.
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences. The
226 MULTIMEDIA
phone is currently connected with the 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
system, this pop-up will not appear. screen while the system is connecting.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. 7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
4. Search for available devices on your system, select “Uconnect.”
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. 8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
 Press the Settings button on your mobile the connection request from Uconnect.
phone. 9. When the pairing process has successfully
 Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is completed, the system will prompt you to
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone choose whether or not this is your favorite
will begin to search for Bluetooth® connec- phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
tions. the highest priority. This phone will take
NOTE: precedence over other paired phones within
NOTE: range and will connect to the Uconnect system
 You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a automatically when entering the vehicle. Only
phone to complete this procedure.
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth®
 The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill. sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the PIN audio device can be connected to the
Follow the steps below to pair your phone: from the pop-up on your mobile phone. Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN 5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile
position. pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and
or Settings button from the Uconnect Phone the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
2. Press the Phone button. main screen. Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:  Press the Paired Phones button or the Add NOTE:
 If there are no phones currently connected Device button. For phones which are not made a favorite, the
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking phone priority is determined by the order in which
 Search for available devices on your
if you would like to pair a mobile phone. it was paired. The most recent phone paired will
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
 This pop-up only appears when the user below). When prompted on the phone, have the higher priority.
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s) select “Uconnect” and accept the connec-
have previously been paired. If the system tion request.
has a phone previously paired, even if no
MULTIMEDIA 227
NOTE: 3. Press to select the particular phone or the 5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a particular audio device. A pop-up menu will Device button on the touchscreen.
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect appear; press “Connect Phone”. 6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
system to access your “messages” and “contacts”. 4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
with the Uconnect system. DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR FAVORITE
You can also use the following VR command to AUDIO DEVICE 1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen,
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen
press the Settings button located to the right
on the radio:
of the device name for a different phone or
 “Show Paired Phones” audio device than the currently connected
NOTE: device or press the preferred “Connected
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect Phone” from the list.
system may interfere with the Bluetooth® 2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. 5
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the 3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
pairing process. However, first make sure to delete touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
the device from the list of phones on your move to the top of the list.
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s 4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Bluetooth® settings. Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
button.
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the button. If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device the ability to download contact names and number
3. Press the Settings button located to the right entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
within range. If you need to choose a particular
of the device name for a different phone or Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
phone or audio device follow these steps:
audio device than the currently connected Access Profile may support this feature. Your
1. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen. device or press the preferred Connected mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources Phone from the list. permission for the Uconnect system to access your
button. 4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
228 MULTIMEDIA
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED Phone Call Features
will sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.
There are two ways you can add an entry to your The following features can be accessed through
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, favorites: the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available
for supported phones. and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
 To call a name from a downloaded mobile the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and service plan. For example, if your mobile service
phonebook, Ú page 232. then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
buttons that appears on the list. accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with
 Automatic download and update of a phone-
your mobile service provider for the features that
book, if supported, begins as soon as the 2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select you have.
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made “Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and
to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you then select the appropriate number. Press the Listed below are the phone options with Uconnect:
start the vehicle. Down Arrow button or the Settings Gear button  Redial
 A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four next to the selected number to display the  Dial by pressing in the number
numbers per contact will be downloaded and option’s pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to
Favorites”.  Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call
updated every time a phone is connected to the
by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call
Uconnect Phone. NOTE: Back)
 Depending on the maximum number of entries If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
 Favorites
downloaded, there may be a short delay before remove an existing favorite.
the latest downloaded names can be used. Until  Mobile Phonebook
then, if available, the previously downloaded TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED  Recent Call Log
phonebook is available for use. 1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from  SMS Message Viewer
 Only the phonebook of the currently connected the Phone main screen.
mobile phone is accessible. 2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the
 This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited Settings Gear icon next to the contact you want
or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can to remove from your favorites. This will bring
only be edited on the mobile phone. The up the options for that Favorite contact.
changes are transferred and updated to 3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.
MULTIMEDIA 229
CALL CONTROLS KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
The touchscreen allows you to control the following 1. Press the Phone button. NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
call features: 2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
touchscreen. Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio
system. Push the Phone button on the steering
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
wheel, press the Answer button on the
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreen.
touchscreens to enter the number and press
“Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED

You may browse a list of the most recent of each of
the following call types: 5
 All Calls
 Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display  Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
1 — Answer  Missed Calls
2 — Mute/Unmute These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
3 — Ignore Calls button on the phone main screen. Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
4 — Transfer You can also push the VR button on your steering
wheel and perform the above operation. For 1 — Answer Button
example, say “Show my incoming calls”. 2 — Caller ID Box
Other phone call features include:
 End Call
 Hold/Unhold/Resume
 Swap two active calls
230 MULTIMEDIA
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL — Automatic reply messages can be: TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS  “I am driving right now, I will get back to you
If a call is currently in progress and you have shortly”.
another incoming call, you will hear the same  Create a custom auto reply message up to
network tones for call waiting that you normally 160 characters.
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
NOTE:
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and
answer the incoming call. While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
NOTE: without being interrupted by incoming calls.
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
system in the market today do not support NOTE:
rejecting an incoming call when another call is in  Reply with text message is not compatible with If two calls are in progress (one active and one on
progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an iPhone® devices. hold), press the Swap Calls button on the phone
incoming call or ignore it.  Auto reply with text message is only available on main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold
phones that support Bluetooth® Message at a time.
DO NOT DISTURB Access Profile (MAP). You can also push the Phone button to toggle
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications between the active and held phone call.
from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold JOIN CALLS
your convenience, there is a counter display to button on the Phone main screen. When two calls are in progress (one active and one
keep track of your missed calls and text messages on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the
while Do Not Disturb is active. MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text CALL IS IN PROGRESS conference call.
message, a call, or both when declining an You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold
incoming call and send it to voicemail. button on the Phone main screen, then dial a
number from the keypad (if supported by your
mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
phonebooks.
MULTIMEDIA 231
CALL TERMINATION Advanced Phone Connectivity

WARNING!
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active PHONE wheel. You have full responsibility and assume
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
hold, it will become the new active call. transferred from your mobile phone without features and applications in this vehicle. Only
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to
REDIAL from your connected mobile phone to the do so may result in an accident involving serious
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer injury or death.
Push the VR button and after the
“Listening” prompt and the following button on the Phone main screen.
beep, say “Redial.” Things You Should Know About Uconnect Even though the system is designed for many
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that languages and accents, the system may not always
Phone work for some.
was dialed from your mobile phone. 5
VOICE COMMAND NOTE:
CALL CONTINUATION It is recommended that you do not store names in
For the best performance:
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in
on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition  Always wait for the beep before speaking motion.
has been switched to OFF.  Speak normally, without pausing, just as you Number and name recognition rate is optimized
NOTE: would speak to a person sitting a few feet/ when the entries are not similar. You can say “O”
meters away from you (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system
until the phone becomes out of range for the  Ensure that no one other than you is speaking Even though international dialing for most number
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to during a voice command period combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
press the Transfer button on the touchscreen  Low-To-Medium Blower Setting number combinations may not be supported.
when leaving the vehicle. Audio Performance
 Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
 Low Road Noise Audio quality is maximized under:
 Smooth Road Surface  Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
 Fully Closed Windows  Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
 Dry Weather Conditions  Low Road Noise

232 MULTIMEDIA
 Smooth Road Surface Voice Text Reply — If Equipped

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
 Fully Closed Windows Uconnect can announce incoming text messages. RESPONSES
 Dry Weather Conditions Push the VR button or Phone button and
I’ll call you I need See you in 5
 Operation From The Driver's Seat
say:
later. directions. <or 10, 15,
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and 1. “Listen” to have the system read an incoming 20, 25, 30,
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and text message. (Must have compatible mobile I’m on my way. Can’t talk right 45, 60>
network, and not the Uconnect Phone. phone paired to Uconnect system.) minutes.
now.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by 2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has I’m lost. Thanks.
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. been read.
Phone Voice Commands Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the NOTE:
beep, repeat one of the predefined messages Only use the numbering listed in the provided
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is and follow the system prompts.
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is message.
ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the
phone compatibility and pairing instructions. RESPONSES full implementation of the Message Access Profile
Stuck in (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to Yes. See you later. about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
say a command. See some examples below: traffic.
Start without Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
 “Call John Smith” No. I’ll be late. incoming text messages only. For further
me.
 “Dial 123 456 7890” information on how to enable this feature on your
Where are I will be 5 <or Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone® “User
 “Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number) Okay.
you? 10, 15, 20, Manual”.
 “Call back” (call previously answered incoming 25, 30, 45,
phone number) Are you there Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible
Call me. 60> minutes
yet? with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, late.
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a
push the Phone button and say “Call”, then text message.
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your
phonebook. When a contact has multiple phone
numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work”.
MULTIMEDIA 233
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — WARNING!

When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected
to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use IF EQUIPPED ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
your voice to send text messages, select media, the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your I S M Y VEHICLE CONNECTED? the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
natural language to understand what you mean and assume all risks related to the use of the
If equipped, vehicles with an ASSIST and an SOS
and responds back to confirm your requests. The features and applications in this vehicle. Only
button are connected vehicles. These buttons will
system is designed to keep your eyes on the road use the features and applications when it is safe
be located on either the rearview mirror or
and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you to do so. Failure to comply may result in an
overhead console, depending on the vehicle. If
perform useful tasks. accident involving serious injury or death.
these buttons are present in your vehicle, you have
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the a connected radio and can take advantage of the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the many connected vehicle features. NOTE:
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you For further information about the ASSIST and SOS SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, trans- 5
can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get buttons Ú page 312. mission and use of data from your vehicle
directions, read text messages, and many other Ú page 252.
useful requests. I NTRODUCTION TO C ONNECTED V EHICLE SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
SERVICES SiriusXM Guardian™/Care
Mobile phones may lose connection to the One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s  US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the Uconnect system is that you can now take nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html or call
connection can generally be re-established by advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected 1-844-796-4827
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is services. To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM  Canadian residents visit: https://www.driveuco-
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode. Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first need to nnect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call
activate SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services. 1-877-324-9091
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to
using the system Ú page 412.
234 MULTIMEDIA
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™? congestion, civil disturbances, actions of third Activation — If Equipped
parties or the government, Internet failure, and/
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device in To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™
or the physical location of your vehicle, such as
the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle, in your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM
in an underground parking structure or under a
which receives GPS signals and communicates Guardian™ connected services.
bridge.
with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
center via wireless and landline communications Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are available
in-vehicle touchscreen.
networks. Depending on the type of device in your for all models.
vehicle, some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
services require an operable LTE (voice/data) or of apps.
 The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote
3G or 4G (data) network compatible with your 3. For customers in the United States, select
start your vehicle from virtually anywhere by “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
device. SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on
using the Mobile App or your computer. Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will
equipped vehicles purchased within the
continental United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto  If equipped — Send & Go capability with the activate services in your vehicle, or select
Rico and Canada. Mobile App. Use the Mobile App to easily search, “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
map and send your locations directly to your For customers in Canada, enter your email ad-
NOTE:
Uconnect Navigation. dress to activate services in your vehicle.
 Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
 The ability to locate your vehicle, when you
services are dependent upon an operative
forget where you parked, using the Vehicle
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
telematics device, a cellular connection, naviga-
Finder function of the Mobile App. Your new vehicle may come with an included trial*
tion map data, and GPS satellite signal recep-
period for use of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
tion, which can limit the ability to reach the Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
services starting on the date of vehicle purchase.
response center or reach emergency support. easy-to-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM
To get started with your trial, enrollment in
Guardian™ connected services.
 Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
available everywhere at all times, particularly in The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
remote or enclosed areas. Rearview Mirror Or Overhead Console
 Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM If equipped, the ASSIST Button is used for
Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care,
delivery are hills, structures, buildings, tunnels, Uconnect Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™
weather, damage to the electrical system or Customer Care. The SOS Call button connects you
other important parts of your vehicle, network directly to SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for
assistance in an emergency.
MULTIMEDIA 235
Features And Packages  For customers in the United States, visit you will be able to log into the Mobile App
www.mopar.com, and click the Sign In/Register and the Owner’s Site.
After the trial period, you must purchase a
button in the upper right-hand corner to register
subscription to continue your services by calling a
your account online.  Once on the Remote screen and you have set up
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
your four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote
a. Click the Register button.
GETTING S TARTED WITH CONNECTED Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
b. Select the correct country and email activate your horn and lights remotely, if
V EHICLE SERVICES address then click “Register”. equipped.
Download The Mobile App c. You will then receive an email notification to  Press the Location button on the bottom menu
Once you have activated your services, you’re only confirm/verify your newly created account. bar of the app to bring up a map to locate your
a few steps away from using connected services. d. After clicking the email link, it will take you vehicle or send a location to your Mobile Naviga-
to a website and prompt you to assign your tion, if equipped.
 Download the Mobile App to your mobile device.
account with a password.  Press the Settings side menu in the upper left
 Use your Owner Account login and password to 5
e. Once you have added a password, the corner of the app to bring up app settings and
open the app and then set up a PIN. access the Assist Call Centers.
website will direct you to your homepage
where you can add in your VIN. Using Your Owner’s Site
 For customers in Canada, register your account Your Owner’s Site website https://
via your vehicle. www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents), or
www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides you
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu with all the information you need, all in one place.
bar. You can track your service history, find
b. Press the Activate Services button from the recommended accessories for your vehicle, watch
apps list. videos about your vehicle's features, and easily
access your manuals. It is also where you can
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confir-
manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account. This
mation email will be sent to the provided
section will familiarize you with the key elements of
email address.
the website that will help you get the most of your
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the confir- SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
mation email. It may take a short time
before remote services will be available, but
236 MULTIMEDIA
For customers in the United States, press the Sign text message, push notification, and/or E-mail to Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A
In/Register button and enter your email address notify you of the event. To set up the notifications, Button
and password. please follow these instructions.
Center Light Status Description
For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle 1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at https://
button. Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle Health www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents) Off No call activated
Report”, and “Recalls”. The website will then and select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca Green Active call in progress
prompt you to log in using your email address and (Canadian Residents), select “My Vehicle”
password. and then “Dashboard”. Red System error
 Edit/Edit Profile: 2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
To manage the details of your SiriusXM 3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™”
Features
Guardian™ account, such as your contact infor- where you can edit Notification Preferences.
mation, password and SiriusXM Guardian™ PIN, With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email
click on the Edit/Edit Profile button to access onboard assistance features located on the
address to notify you, and you can customize
the details of your account. rearview mirror or overhead console designed to
the types of messages.
enhance your driving experience if you should ever
 Connected Services Status:
need assistance or support.
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM USING S IRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
Description
Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
SOS Call — If Equipped SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact
 Remote Commands:
with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM Guardian™ WARNING! in the event of an emergency. When the
subscription, press one of these icons and enter connection between the vehicle and the live agent
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services,
your four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN is made, your vehicle will automatically transmit
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance
to remotely start (if equipped), lock/unlock location information. In the event of a minor
Call, will NOT work without a network connection
doors or sound the horn and flash the lights. collision, medical or any other emergency, press
compatible with your device.
Editing Your Notifications the SOS button to be connected to a call center
Notifications are an important element of your agent who can send emergency assistance to your
SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any vehicle’s location.
time you use your remote services (such as
Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a
MULTIMEDIA 237
NOTE: 2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a  An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is phone requires service. Please contact your
are dependent on an operational Uconnect made, the agent will stay on the line with you. dealer.”
system, cellular network availability that is NOTE: Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
compatible with the device in your vehicle, and Calls between the vehicle occupants and the factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
GPS network availability. Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may be or stop SOS Call system operation. These include,
SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere at recorded or monitored for quality assurance but are not limited to, the following factors:
all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas. purposes. Through your enrollment in and use of  The ignition key is in OFF position.
How It Works the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services, you
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light consent to being recorded.
will turn green indicating a call has been  The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
placed. SOS Call System Limitations disconnected during a vehicle crash.
NOTE: Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and  The SOS Call system software and/or hardware 5
that travel into Mexico and Canada may have is damaged during a vehicle crash.
 In case the SOS Call button is accidentally limited services. In particular, responses to SOS
pushed, there is a 10-second delay before  LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage
calls or other emergency services may be and/or GPS signals are unavailable or
the SOS call is placed. The system will unavailable or very limited. Vehicles purchased
verbally alert you that a call is about to be obstructed.
outside the United States and Canada are unable
made. To cancel the SOS Call connection, to receive SiriusXM Guardian™ connected  Network congestion.
push the SOS Call button on the rearview services.  Weather conditions.
mirror or overhead console or press the
Cancel button on the touchscreen within If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
10 seconds. of the following may occur at the time the tunnels.
malfunction is detected: If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason
 During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth®-paired
phone is disconnected so incoming or  The light will continuously be illuminated red. (including during or after an accident), the SOS Call
outgoing calls will go through your mobile  The screen will display the following message system, among other vehicle systems, will not
device versus the hands-free system which “Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact operate.
is not available due to the SOS Call. your dealer.”
238 MULTIMEDIA
Requirements
WARNING! WARNING!
 This feature is available only on vehicles sold in
the US or Canada.  Do not add any aftermarket electrical equip-  Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean
ment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This you will not have SOS Call services if needed.
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
may prevent your vehicle from sending a If the Rearview Mirror Light is illuminated,
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
interference that can cause the SOS Call Call system immediately.
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
system to fail, never add aftermarket equip-
includes the applicable feature.  If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat- conditions or location), do not wait for voice
system or modify the antennas on your
ible with your device. contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR
Care agent. All occupants should exit the
 Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
vehicle immediately and move to a safe loca-
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning AN ACCIDENT), NEITHER THE MOBILE APPS
tion.
electrical system. NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ CONNECTED
SERVICES WILL OPERATE.  Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
WARNING! and regular inspection of your vehicle may
 The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns
result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instru-
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) and GPS ment panel if a malfunction in any part of the
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) air bag system is detected. If the Air Bag Automatic SOS — If Equipped
or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can prevent your vehicle from placing an system may not be working properly and the can immediately connect you with help in the event
emergency call. SOS Call system may not be able to send a that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. After an
(Continued) signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer accident, a live agent will contact you through the
Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illu- Uconnect system and alert emergency services.
minated, have an authorized dealer service
your vehicle immediately.
NOTE:
An active SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is
(Continued) required for this feature to function.
MULTIMEDIA 239
After a crash where the airbags deploy: limit the ability to reach the response center or Remote Commands lets you send a request to your
1. Automatic SOS will initiate a call with an reach emergency support. vehicle in one of three ways:
agent.  Terms of service of the Uconnect and the  Anywhere using your mobile device and Mobile
2. An agent will receive the call and confirm the SiriusXM Guardian™ subscriber agreement App
location of the emergency. apply. See terms of services for complete  From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not
service limitation. available on all functions)
3. If needed, the agent will request the
assistance of emergency services. Remote Commands  Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
4. First responders will arrive on scene. The On the Remote Commands screen, you have (not available on all functions)
agent will remain on the call until emergency access to several vehicle features that can be Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile
services arrive. controlled remotely from your mobile device. These Device And The Mobile App
features include locking/unlocking, remote
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on
NOTE: starting, and activating the horn and lights of the
your mobile device. 5
 Agents are available 24/7 to assist you in the vehicle.
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
case of an emergency. Press this button to
Lock SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
 On your behalf, agents are able to notify family lock your vehicle. same four-digit code established when you
members about the collision. Press this button to activated your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
Vehicle Start services). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
 Agents can brief first responders of the situation start your vehicle.
before they arrive on scene. Security PIN on the keypad.
Press this button to
 In the event vehicle occupants are unable to Horn & Lights sound the horn and 3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the
speak, emergency services will be dispatched activate your lights. command to go through to your vehicle.
based on the last known GPS coordinates. Press this button to 4. A message will let you know if the command
 SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are
Unlock was received by your vehicle.
unlock your vehicle.
dependent upon an operative telematics
Press this button to
device, a cellular connection, navigation map Cancel Vehicle Start
cancel remote start.
data, and GPS satellite reception, which can
240 MULTIMEDIA
Using A Remote Command Through Your Owner’s Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care  Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
Site (for example, in case of an accidental lock-out): connection.
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the 1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Requirements
username and password you used when if you are unable to lock your vehicle through  Vehicle must be properly equipped with
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™ the Mobile App or your key fob. SiriusXM Guardian™.
connected services in your vehicle. 2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
NOTE: Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify or 3G or 4G (data) network connection. If using
If you forgot your username or password, links are your identity by asking for your four-digit the Mobile App to command your vehicle, your
provided on the website to help you retrieve them. SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN. device must be compatible and be connected to
2. If you have more than one vehicle registered 3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™ an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data)
into your Owner’s Site, select the vehicle you Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a network connection.
want to send the command to by clicking on its remote command.  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
image along the top. NOTE: Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote Anyone with access to your PIN may request includes the applicable feature.
commands. Press the desired icon to activate Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility  An ignition cycle is required for some remote
that feature. to protect your PIN appropriately. commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and
4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote
Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same Remote Door Lock/Unlock Horn & Lights activation.
four-digit code established when you activated Description  Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not
your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services). The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides be processed if the vehicle is in motion, the igni-
Please enter your SiriusXM Guardian™ you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your tion key is on or during an emergency call.
Security PIN. vehicle without the keys and from virtually any NOTE:
5. A message will appear on the screen to let you distance. All other remote services should be performed via
know if the command was received by your Working Vehicle Conditions your Owner’s Site or through the Mobile App on
vehicle.
 The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill. your compatible device.
 The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
MULTIMEDIA 241
Remote Vehicle Start  The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of Working Vehicle Conditions
fuel, along with oil and battery power.  The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
Description
 The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.  The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with
the ability to start the engine on your vehicle  If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic tower reception.
without the keys and from virtually any distance. transmission.  Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
Once started, the preset climate controls in your  The vehicle must be in an open area with cell connection.
vehicle can warm up or cool down the interior. tower reception. NOTE:
You can also send a command to turn off an  Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to
engine that has been started using Remote Vehicle connection. be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind the
Start. After 15 minutes, if you have not entered surroundings when using this feature. You are
 If the Panic button has been pressed, the
your vehicle with the key, the engine will shut off responsible for compliance with local laws, rules
vehicle must be started at least once after
automatically. and ordinances in the location of your vehicle
alarming the system. 5
This remote function requires your vehicle to be when using Remote Horn & Lights.
equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents Assist — If Equipped
system.
are not authorized for Remote Vehicle Start Description
You can set up push notifications every time a services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for
command is sent to activate or cancel Remote Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
assistance. connected services feature may contain an ASSIST
Start.
Remote Horn & Lights button in the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM
Working Vehicle Conditions Guardian™ connected services have been
Description
 The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode. activated, the ASSIST button can connect you
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or directly to a Customer Care call center (if
 The vehicle has been started with the key fob noisy parking area by activating the horn and
within the last 14 days. equipped). You will be directed to one of the four
lights. It may also help if you need to draw attention services below:
 The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill. to your vehicle for any reason.
 Roadside Assistance — If you get a flat tire or
 The vehicle’s security system has been armed If you want, you can set up push notifications every need a tow, you’ll be connected to someone
and not triggered since the last vehicle start. time a command is sent to turn on the horn and who can help anytime.
 The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed.
lights.
 Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
 The vehicle’s check engine light must be off. Guardian™ Customer Care call center to acti-
242 MULTIMEDIA
vate your services, renew after your trial has  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM How It Works
expired, for in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM Guardian™ and have an active subscription that 1. There are multiple ways to find a destination.
Guardian™ connected services, or help includes the applicable feature. After selecting the Location tab at the bottom
answering any general questions surrounding  Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC of the App, browse through one of the
your connected services. (Accessory) position with a properly functioning categories provided, or type the name or
 Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all electrical system. keyword in the search box. You can also
non-connected Uconnect system features, such Disclaimers select categories such as “Favorites” or
as radio and Bluetooth® connections. “Contact List”.
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your
 Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle. vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any 2. Select your destination from the list that
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance additional roadside assistance service costs that appears. Location information will then be
Features — If Equipped you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM displayed on the map.
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has Guardian™ connected services to you, we may From this screen, you will be able to:
onboard assistance features located on the record and monitor your conversations with  View the location on a map.
rearview mirror or overhead console designed to Roadside Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
Care, or SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care,  See the distance from your current location.
enhance your driving experience if you should ever
need assistance or support. whether such conversations are initiated through  Send the destination to the vehicle (Send &
the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services in Go).
How It Works your vehicle, or via a landline or mobile device, and 3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
Simply push the ASSIST button in the vehicle and may share information obtained through such Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call
you will be presented with your ASSIST options on recording and monitoring in accordance with the destination by pressing the Call button.
the touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree
the touchscreen. and consent to any recording, monitoring or 4. Confirm your destination in the vehicle through
sharing of information obtained through any such a notification or in the Navigation system.
Requirements
call recordings.
 This feature is available only on vehicles sold in Requirements
the US and Canada. Send & Go — If Equipped  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Description or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services. The Send & Go feature allows you to search for a ible with your device.
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) destination on your mobile device, and then send  Vehicle must have an active subscription that
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection. the route to your vehicle’s Navigation system. includes the applicable feature.
MULTIMEDIA 243
Vehicle Finder 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle
Description Description How It Works
The Vehicle Finder feature allows you to find the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides
location of your vehicle. connects your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G the vehicle passengers with an internet
(data) network that is ready to go wherever you are. access hotspot in the vehicle, using the
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to
After you've made your purchase, turn on your radio as an access point. The hotspot will
make finding your vehicle even easier.
device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices. allow Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle devices (such as a
How It Works laptop or any other portable-enabled media
 Enables all your passengers to be simultane-
Select the Vehicle Finder function within the device) to wirelessly connect to the internet.
ously connected to the web.
Mobile App and select the Location tab at the Uconnect offers a complimentary 3-month trial
bottom of the App. Then, press the Vehicle icon to  Connect several devices at one time. period that includes 1GB of total data. The trial can
find your vehicle.  Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop or be activated any time within the first year of new
Requirements any other portable-enabled media — can vehicle ownership. 5
connect over your private in-vehicle network. Use one of these three ways to purchase a
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.  A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone subscription to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
on your private network access the Web — great 1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select the
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) for working and relaxing.
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat- 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the How To
ible with your device. Purchase button and follow the instructions.
WARNING!
 Vehicle must have an active subscription that
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link to
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi the AT&T portal to get set up.
includes the applicable feature.
Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so
 Vehicle ignition must have been turned on
3. For existing Connected Car customers: Push
may result in an accident involving serious injury
within 14 days. the ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T
or death.
Customer Care agent who will assist you.
244 MULTIMEDIA
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can How It Works Requirements
change its name and the password by selecting the 1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing the Setup Wi-Fi enforcement as soon as possible. They will Uconnect system.
Hotspot button. You can also view the connected work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
devices from the app screen by pressing the View  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
Connected Devices button. 2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
Care that your vehicle has been stolen. ible with your device.
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Agent  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not required
will ask for the stolen vehicle report number Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
in order to purchase and use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot.
(as issued by your local law enforcement). If includes the applicable feature.
WARNING! you have downloaded the Mobile App, you can NOTE:
push the Settings menu button on your device, Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
Always drive safely with your hands on the select “Help”, and then select “SiriusXM
steering wheel and obey all applicable laws. You available everywhere at all times, particularly in
Guardian™ Customer Care” to make the call. remote or enclosed areas.
have full responsibility and assume all risks
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will Monthly Vehicle Health Report —
related to the use of the features and
authenticate that you are the owner of the
applications in this vehicle. Only use the If Equipped
vehicle and contact the law enforcement with
features and applications in this vehicle when it
whom you filed the stolen vehicle report. Description
is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in
an accident involving in serious injury or death. 4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will work Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect
with your local law enforcement to locate the service through which a summary of the
vehicle. You will be contacted by law performance of your vehicle’s key systems will be
Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If Equipped enforcement if your vehicle is recovered. While sent to you every month so you can stay on top of
Description the investigation is ongoing, you should also your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is provided
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™ contact your insurance company to inform it of as a convenience to you and does not substitute
Customer Care agent may be able to locate the the situation. for regular maintenance to your vehicle.
stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health
help recover it. Report, the Uconnect system in your vehicle may
collect and transmit vehicle data to SiriusXM
Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your vehicle’s
MULTIMEDIA 245
health and performance, your vehicle’s location, In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped Here are a few of the many questions you can ask
your utilization of the features in your vehicle, and Alexa:
Description
other data.  “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle
Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind
This data collection and transmission begins when name> with your Voice Code .”
you when services are needed, or to alert you of
you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will continue  “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle
other important information, such as recall
even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ name> with your Voice Code.”
notices. When you receive a notification through
subscription unless you call SiriusXM Guardian™
your touchscreen, press OK to dismiss the  “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to send
Customer Care and tell them to deactivate your
message, or press Call Care to speak with a 1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to
Uconnect Services.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent. my <vehicle name>.”
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
NOTE:  “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel
information, located at www.driveuconnect.com/
Pressing “OK” or the X button on the pop-up screen level of my <vehicle name>.”
connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or
will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is 5
Messages mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you
For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™ required. To use Amazon Alexa, first, register for
can reopen messages or delete messages.
private policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/ SiriusXM Guardian™ Ú page 234.
Amazon Alexa Skill — If Equipped Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to
privacy-policy.
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to Amazon Alexa:
Vehicle Health Alert —If Equipped command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa!
1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your
Description With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your mobile device (Apple® or Android™).
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses vehicle and remotely access key services and
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS.
a problem with one of your vehicle’s key systems. features.
For further information, go to your Owner’s 3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect
website. Enable.
Navigation, you can send a destination directly to
NOTE: your vehicle using Alexa. 4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa 5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle
and activate services. During this process you will for help, or complete a list of commands by saying: brand> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
be asked to provide an email address to which the “Alexa, ask <brand name> for help with my car.” 6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials.
reports will be sent. This will be the same user name and password
you used when registering for SiriusXM
246 MULTIMEDIA
Guardian™ connected services. There will be To link your Uconnect account with Google Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
additional settings to confirm on the following Assistant, follow these steps:
Description
screen. 1. Download and install the Google Assistant
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and
7. AUTHORIZE the account to return to the app on your smart phone from the App
give you peace of mind when your loved ones are
<vehicle brand> Skill. Store® or Google Play.
out on the road. You can set boundary limits,
2. After installation, log in to the Google Assistant monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your vehicle’s
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> Skill
app with your Gmail ID. Verify your account by location any time, any place. Use the Mobile App to
on Alexa!
pressing the icon in the upper right-hand set alerts:
Google Assistant — If Equipped corner.
 Boundary Alert
With the Google Assistant, you can get help and 3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left
Receive a notification the moment your vehicle
keep tabs on your car. Google Assistant is available corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle brand
is driven either out of or into a geographic
across your devices, including Android™ phones, name.
boundary that you set.
iPhone® devices, or voice-activated speakers, like 4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect
Google Home. If you need assistance, ask Google  Curfew Alert
account. Press “Link Uconnect to Google”.
for help, or for a complete list of commands by Receive a notification when your car is being
saying: “Hey Google, ask <brand name> for help 5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address driven outside of the curfew time.
with my car.” and password you created when you activated
 Speed Alert
SiriusXM Guardian™. There will be additional
Here are a few examples of commands: settings to confirm on the following screen. Receive a notification whenever your car
 “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my exceeds a speed limit you set.
6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the
<vehicle name> with your Voice Code.” linking process.  Valet Alert
 “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you: Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is
<vehicle name> with your Voice Code.” driven outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet
 Remotely start the engine, or cancel a remote
 “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send drop-off zone.
start
1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to
my <vehicle name>.”  Send a destination to your vehicle’s built-in
Uconnect Navigation system
 “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the
fuel level of my <vehicle name>.”  Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire pressure, fuel
level and oil life
 And more!
MULTIMEDIA 247
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped Market — If Equipped 9. The system will verify the phone number. Once
verified, Market will be available to use. Press
Description With Market, you can enjoy seamless and secure
the OK button.
SmartWatch Integration puts the Mobile App right transactions from the comfort of your vehicle.
on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. To get Make restaurant reservations, place food orders, From the online portal, https://
started, follow these steps: or pay for other goods and services right from the market.mopar.com/home, you can link loyalty
vehicle’s touchscreen. accounts and start receiving benefits from them
1. Download the Mobile App from the App
Store® or Google Play. To get started with Market on the touchscreen: while still using Market and view your purchase
1. Press the Market button in the App drawer. history.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using
the username and password you created when 2. Press “Get Started”. MANAGE M Y SIRIUSXM G UARDIAN™
you first set up your account. 3. Press “Text Me A Link” and enter your phone ACCOUNT
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are number to receive a text message with
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account,
connected through Bluetooth®. instructions on how to set up Market.
press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call
5
4. The Mobile App should appear on your NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
SmartWatch. If the text message does not come through, press
the Resend Text button. It might take a minute to NOTE:
Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch, receive the text message. It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or
you can enjoy these features: turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM Guardian™
4. Once you receive the text message, press the
 Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the
Care to remove your personal data.
link provided. You will be directed to a sign-in
remote lock button in the app and entering your screen. Enter your email and password. You
security PIN. will then be able to use Market. CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
 Remote start or stop your vehicle. 5. If you do not have an account, press “Register For additional information about SiriusXM
 View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level, Now” to create one. Guardian™, active subscribers can push the
vehicle location, tire pressure warning, and ASSIST button (if equipped) and then select
6. Accept the Market Terms of Service.
more. SiriusXM Guardian™ Call on your in-vehicle
7. Enter your credit card information, and press touchscreen to contact SiriusXM Guardian™. Your
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube channel “Next”. call will be directed to a SiriusXM Guardian™ agent
for SmartWatch Integration. 8. Enter your phone number, and press “Next”. or held in a queue until an agent is available. If you
248 MULTIMEDIA
do not have an active subscription, push the 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App? CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE
ASSIST button and press the Activate button on the Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more
touchscreen to activate services. quickly, however its range is limited and your ASSISTANCE FAQ S
Mobile App comes in handy for these and 1. What is the phone number for roadside
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS — other situations. assistance call? The phone number is:
IF EQUIPPED 3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device?  US: 1-800-521-2779
1. What happens if I accidentally push the SOS People sometimes lose their mobile devices,
 Canada: 1-800-363-4869
Call button on the mirror or overhead console? which is why security measures have been
engineered into the Mobile App. Asking for 2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™,
You have 10 seconds after pushing the SOS
your username, password and SiriusXM does it cover towing or other expenses
Call button to cancel the call. To cancel the
Guardian™ Security PIN are required for the incurred by using roadside assistance? No,
call, either push the SOS Call button again, or
activation of Remote services through your however your new vehicle may include
press the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
mobile device. It is your responsibility to Roadside Assistance Call services.
touchscreen.
protect your passwords and PINs.
2. What type of information is sent when I use the
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & G O
SOS Call button from my vehicle? Certain
vehicle information, such as make and model, App? The Mobile App is compatible with most FAQ S — IF E QUIPPED
is transmitted along with the last known GPS devices with the Apple® and Android™
1. How long does it take to send the route and
location. operating systems. The capabilities of these
destination to my vehicle? Depending on
devices allow us to remotely command your
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You can various conditions, it can take up to three
vehicle. Other operating systems may be
use the SOS Call button to make a call if you or minutes for the request to get through to your
supported in the future.
someone else needs emergency assistance. vehicle.
5. Why is the Mobile App running slow? The
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes,
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE D OOR Mobile App relies on a mobile network
once you enter your vehicle, and start the
connection from your device to send
LOCK/UNLOCK FAQ S commands to your vehicle which must have an
engine, the pop-up message stating that you
have a new route will appear. There is an exit
1. How long does it take to unlock or lock the operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G, 4G (data), or
button on the pop-up that will cancel the route
door? Depending on various conditions, it can 5G (data) network connection. If either your
if selected.
take up to three minutes or more for the device or your vehicle is in an area with below
request to get to your vehicle. average coverage, it may take longer to log in
and send commands.
MULTIMEDIA 249
3. Can I select a different route than the most CONNECTED S ERVICES S TOLEN VEHICLE connected services subscription to find out if
recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you the insurance provider can offer you a lower
enter the vehicle, and start the engine, the ASSISTANCE FAQ S — I F EQUIPPED rate.
pop-up message offers a “Locations” option. 1. Can someone locate my vehicle? To enhance NOTE:
Once “Locations” is selected, you can choose your privacy, and the privacy of others using Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance
from a list of recently sent destinations. your vehicle, a stolen vehicle police report is companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an
required for you to activate this service. You insurance product. You are responsible for
CONNECTED S ERVICES V EHICLE F INDER must involve local law enforcement to have obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle and
FAQ S SiriusXM Guardian™ locate your vehicle. We yourself.
may also locate the vehicle for other law
1. Can someone else locate my vehicle? Your
vehicle may be located by anyone who has
enforcement or government agencies, CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE V EHICLE
subject to a valid court order telling SiriusXM
your PIN and access to your account. It is your Guardian™ to do so. We will also provide the S TART FAQ S
responsibility to guard your PIN accordingly. service for FCA entities to locate a vehicle that 1. How long does it take to remotely start my
5
See the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ you have purchased through them. vehicle? Depending on various conditions, it
terms of service for more information. can take three minutes or more for the
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered?
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ request to get through to your vehicle.
flash the lights? Depending on various Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?
conditions, it can take three minutes or more report, the agent will work together with law Your key fob will remote start your vehicle
for the request to get through to your vehicle. enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If more quickly. However its range is limited. For
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn your vehicle is recovered, you will be contacted example, when you are leaving the stadium
them on? If you are close enough to the by law enforcement. after the game, you can use the Mobile App to
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the 3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my insurance remote start your vehicle and have the inside
horn and lights by pushing the red Panic rates? Some insurance providers offer lower of your vehicle comfortable by the time you get
button. rates on vehicles equipped with systems that to it.
can deter auto theft. When shopping for 3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless
insurance, be sure to inform the insurance device? People sometimes lose their wireless
provider of your SiriusXM Guardian™ devices, which is why security measures have
been engineered into the Mobile App. Asking
for your username, password and SiriusXM
250 MULTIMEDIA
Guardian™ Security PIN help to ensure that 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?  Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
nobody can start your vehicle if they happen to Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the menu. Enter your email on the touchscreen
find your device. lights quicker; however, its range is limited. and then follow the prompts from the
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle using 3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn provided email. You will receive an email
the App? No. Driving your vehicle still requires them on? If you are close enough to the with an activation link that will be good for
the keys to be in the vehicle. The Remote Start vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the 72 hours. Once you click the activation link,
feature simply starts the engine to warm up or horn and lights by pressing the red Panic you will be prompted to fill out your informa-
cool down the interior before you arrive. button. Otherwise, Remote Horn & Lights will tion and accept Terms and Conditions.
continue for a maximum of three minutes. Then, you will be directed to the SiriusXM
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with Guardian™ home page to complete your
the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command? 4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile profile and demo the remote services.
No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel App? The Mobile App has been designed to
Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop the work on most devices with the Apple® and 2. Why do I need an email address? Without an
vehicle. Android™ operating systems. The capabilities email address, customers cannot register for
of these devices allow us to remotely SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers need to
6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile register so they can subscribe to receive
App? The Mobile App has been designed to command your vehicle. Other operating
systems may be supported in the future. additional services and create a SiriusXM
work on most devices with the Apple® and Guardian™ Security PIN for remote command
Android™ operating systems. The capabilities requests.
of these devices allow us to remotely CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT
3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ security
command your vehicle. Other operating FAQ S — IF E QUIPPED PIN? Set up your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
systems may be supported in the future.
1. How do I register for my SiriusXM Guardian™ PIN during the registration process. The
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE H ORN account? There are three ways that you can SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN will be
register your SiriusXM Guardian™ Account: required to authenticate you when accessing
& L IGHTS FAQ S  Push the ASSIST button. A call will be placed your account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or
1. How long does it take to sound my horn and to an agent who can assist in registering performing any remote services, such as
flash the lights? Depending on various your new account. Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &
conditions, it can take three minutes or more Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
 Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
for the request to get through to your vehicle. menu. Select the button to speak with an 4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™
agent, who can assist in registering your security PIN? If you’ve already activated
new account. services and forgot your SiriusXM Guardian™
MULTIMEDIA 251
Security PIN, you can reset the PIN by selecting 9. What happens when my subscription comes You also can visit your Owner’s Site and
Edit Profile on your Owner’s Site. up for renewal? If you have added a credit card choose a subscription to view its expiration
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ to your account information, your subscription date. When your subscription is about to ex-
payment account address? Your SiriusXM will be automatically renewed for a term length pire, you will receive an email or letter of notifi-
Guardian™ Payment Account address can be in accordance with the service plan that you cation.
updated online, or by calling SiriusXM have selected at the then current subscription 14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire
Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in your rate and on every renewal date thereafter, subscription? Prorated refunds are provided
vehicle. To update online: login to your Owner’s unless you cancel your subscription by calling from the date of cancellation for annual plans
Site, and select Edit Profile > SiriusXM SiriusXM Guardian™ Care. If you have not or longer. Please see the Uconnect and
Guardian™ Payment Account. added a credit card to your account, SiriusXM SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms & Conditions for
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter in refunds related to billing plans of other lengths
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ advance of your expiration date to remind you
profile? Your name, home address, phone and other circumstances.
that your subscription is ending soon.
number, email address and SiriusXM 15. Can I cancel a subscription before it expires? 5
Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated online 10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™ Yes. If you have an annual subscription, your
on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your Owner’s notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM subscription will be canceled the day you
Site then select Edit Profile to edit your Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your cancel. If you have a monthly subscription,
personal information. Make your edits and Owner’s Site and then update your your subscription will be canceled on the last
click Save. preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™ day of the month in which you choose to
customer web portal. cancel.
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy
them? Your new vehicle purchase may have 11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact 16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
come with an included trial period for certain SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner,
Apps and services. pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview you’ll want to remove your account
mirror or overhead console. information. This process removes all personal
8. Can I access every App and service while
driving? No, some applications and services 12. How do I update my credit card information? information, returns the Uconnect system to
are not available while driving. For your own Login to your Owner’s Site, and select Edit its original factory settings, removes all
safety, it is not possible to use some of the Profile, then select SiriusXM Guardian™ SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services and
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in Payment Account. account information. To remove your account
motion (e.g. key pad). 13. How do I find out how much longer I have on information from the Uconnect system,
my subscription? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
Customer Care.
252 MULTIMEDIA
17. What if I forgot to remove my account FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the REGULATORY AND SAFETY
information before I returned my lease vehicle Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and
or sold it? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ diagnostic information including location data may I NFORMATION
Customer Care. be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health US/CANADA
18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/ Report to you.
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
connection compatible with my device is subscription, this vehicle diagnostic health
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and information, including location data, may still be
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are not transmitted from your vehicle and you may still
will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
(20 cm) or further from the human body.
3G, 4G (data), 5G (data) network. Services that Use of any of the Connected Services including
required your smartphone only direct calls to The internal wireless radio operates within
SiriusXM Guardian™ is deemed to be your consent
Roadside Assistance Call may be functioning if guidelines found in radio frequency safety
to the collection, use and disclosure of this
you have an operable network. standards and recommendations, which reflect
information in accordance with the Uconnect
the consensus of the scientific community.
Privacy Policy. If you do not want this information to
DATA C OLLECTION & PRIVACY be collected, used, or shared, you must cancel your The radio manufacturer believes the internal
Uconnect services in their entirety by contacting us wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
The Uconnect system collects and transmits data
as referenced in the Uconnect Privacy Policy. level of energy emitted is far less than the
which may include information about your vehicle,
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
your vehicle’s health and performance, your
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the features in RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
your vehicle, and other data. The collection, use Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being situations or environments, such as aboard
and sharing of this information is required to on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected performance from your radio. This condition may encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
services and is further described by the Uconnect be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the on the wireless radio Ú page 412.
Privacy Policy, which can be found at mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/ not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
privacy.html (US Residents) or does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). This the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
information may be collected by SiriusXM® volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared with operation when not using the Uconnect system.
MULTIMEDIA 253
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED To access Off-Road Pages, press the Vehicle

button on the touchscreen, select the Off-Road
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road Pages Pages tab, and then select the Off Road button on
which display vehicle information related to the the main screen. Off-Road pages can also be
drivetrain, transfer case, and coolant/oil gauges. accessed through the app drawer.
Off-Road Button
254 MULTIMEDIA
OFF-R OAD P AGES S TATUS BAR 1 — Transfer Case Status

The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the 2 — Latitude/Longitude
bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of 3 — Altitude
the four selectable page options. It provides 4 — Hill Descent Control Status
information for the following items: 5 — Vehicle Speed
1. Transfer Case Status
2. Latitude/Longitude
3. Altitude of the vehicle
4. Status of Hill Descent Control and Speed in
MPH (km/h)
Status Bar 2WD/4WD

MULTIMEDIA 255
VEHICLE DYNAMICS 1 — Steering Angle

The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information 2 — Transfer Case Status
concerning the vehicle’s transfer case and 3 — Rear Axle Locker Status
steering angle. 4 — Rear Axle
The following information is displayed:
1. Status of Transfer Case
2. Status of Front Axles — If Equipped
3. Status of the Rear Axles
4. Steering angle in degrees
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD

256 MULTIMEDIA
ACCESSORY G AUGE 1 — Oil Temperature

The Accessory Gauge page displays the current 2 — Coolant Temperature
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil 3 — Oil Pressure
Temperature, Oil Pressure, Transmission 4 — Battery Voltage
Temperature, and Battery Voltage. 5 — Transmission Temperature
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD

MULTIMEDIA 257
PITCH & ROLL NOTE:

Pitch & Roll values may show upon startup. These
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current numbers will update once the vehicle is driven.
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to
side) in degrees.The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a
visualization of the current vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu

258 MULTIMEDIA
SUSPENSION FORWARD F ACING C AMERA

The Suspension page displays the current status of Your vehicle may be equipped with a Forward
the vehicle’s suspension system and the current Facing Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
ride height of the vehicle. The Suspension page will image of the front view of your vehicle. The image
also indicate when the vehicle’s height changes. will be displayed on the touchscreen along with a
caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across
the top of the screen.
To activate, press the Forward Facing Camera
button on the touchscreen.
Suspension Menu
259
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates: WARNING!
ANTI-L OCK BRAKE S YSTEM (ABS)  ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may  Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
continue to hear for a short time after the stop) their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
brake performance under most braking conditions.  Brake pedal pulsations
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and  A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the need to slow down or stop.
enhances vehicle control during braking. stop
 The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that The ABS is designed to function with the Original physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
is started and driven. During this self-check, you may result in degraded ABS performance. that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
related motor noises. WARNING! 6
 The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
The ABS is activated during braking when the  The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
system detects one or more wheels are beginning those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer- following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, ence caused by improperly installed or high
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops planing.
output radio transmitting equipment. This
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s). interference can cause possible loss of  The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of must never be exploited in a reckless or
such equipment should be performed by qual- dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
ified professionals. user’s safety or the safety of others.
(Continued)
260 SAFETY
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Brake System Warning Light
Light Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the Brake Assist System (BAS) when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
stay on for as long as four seconds. braking capability during emergency braking If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on maneuvers. The system detects an emergency comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion braking situation by sensing the rate and amount system is not functioning properly and that
of the brake system is not functioning and that of brake application and then applies optimum immediate service is required. If the Brake System
service is required. However, the conventional pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
brake system will continue to operate normally if braking distances. The BAS complements the is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
the ABS Warning Light is on. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes repaired as soon as possible.
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping EBD manages the distribution of the braking
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the ABS Warning torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
Light does not come on when the ignition is placed sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to
in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
soon as possible. longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released,
the BAS is deactivated. instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) entering ABS before the front axle.
SYSTEM WARNING! Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake nor can it increase the traction afforded by pre- the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force vailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent colli- that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle
Distribution (EBD), Hill Start Assist (HSA), sions, including those resulting from excessive and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
Stability Control (ESC), and Traction Control or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS- brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen
System (TCS). These systems work together to equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
enhance both vehicle stability and control in reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeop- reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during
various driving conditions. ardize the user's safety or the safety of others. severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
SAFETY 261
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as wheel(s) to counteract the above conditions.
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking Engine power may also be reduced to help the WARNING!
objects or other vehicles. vehicle maintain the desired path.  Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
NOTE:  Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” than appropriate for the steering wheel position. on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
mode (if equipped). For a complete explanation of afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC
 Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
the available ESC modes, see Ú page 261. cannot prevent accidents, including those
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
WARNING! ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares also cannot prevent accidents resulting from
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
conditions and driving conditions, influence the path does not match the intended path, ESC driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
especially those that involve leaving the roadway condition. vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
or striking objects or other vehicles. The dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light 6
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash user’s safety or the safety of others.
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The  Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
or the safety of others.
flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESC characteristics of your vehicle, and may nega-
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to tively affect the performance of the ESC system.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) flash during acceleration, ease up on the Changes to the steering system, suspension,
ESC enhances directional control and stability of accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. braking system, tire type and size or wheel size
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the may adversely affect ESC performance. Improp-
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the prevailing road conditions. erly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modifi-
cation or poor vehicle maintenance that
reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system
can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
262 SAFETY
ESC Operating Modes NOTE:

WARNING! The system may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.  When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function- “Partial Off” mode when the vehicle exceeds a
ality of ESC, except for the limited slip feature predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed
ESC On described in the TCS section, has been slows below the predetermined speed the system
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will will return to ESC “Full Off”.
system. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes (if
system will be in this mode. This mode should be the engine power reduction feature of TCS is equipped).
used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
modes should only be used for specific reasons as offered by the ESC system is reduced. WARNING!
noted in the following paragraphs.
 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when  In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
Partial Off the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. reduction and stability features are disabled.
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC Full Off — If Equipped by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emer-
thresholds for activation, which allows for more gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road not engage to assist in maintaining stability.
use only and should not be used on any public ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator off-highway or off-road use only.
turned off. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, hold the ESC OFF button for five seconds while the  The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After prevent the natural laws of physics from
OFF Indicator Light will turn off. five seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC OFF acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
NOTE: Indicator Light will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the message will display in the instrument cluster. To tions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,
push and release of the button will toggle the ESC turn ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF including those resulting from excessive
modes. Multiple attempts may be required to button. speed in turns, driving on very slippery
return to "ESC On" mode. surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent collisions.
SAFETY 263
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light NOTE: Enabling HDC

And ESC OFF Indicator Light  The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on following conditions must also be met to enable
Light in the instrument cluster will come momentarily each time the ignition is placed in HDC:
on when the ignition is placed in the ON the ON position.  The driveline is in 4WD Low.
mode. It should go out with the engine  Each time the ignition is placed in the ON posi-  The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the turned off previously.  The parking brake is released.
engine running, a malfunction has been detected  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking  The driver door is closed.
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after sounds when it is active. This is normal; the Activating HDC
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically
following the maneuver that caused the ESC if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer activation.
as soon as possible to have the problem set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and
diagnosed and corrected. Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
following summarizes the HDC set speeds: 6
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed HDC Target Set Speeds
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC while descending hills during various driving  P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively not activate.
when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/ controlling the brakes.
 R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during HDC Has Three States:
 N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your  D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
activate).
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.  1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates activation conditions are not met, or driver is  2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
that the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) actively overriding with brake or throttle  3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
is in a reduced mode. application).
 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
controlling vehicle speed).
264 SAFETY
 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h) Disabling HDC  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when
 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h) HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The
following conditions occur: flashing will stop and HDC will activate again
 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h) once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.
 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped  The driver pushes the HDC switch.
NOTE:  The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low. WARNING!

During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC  The parking brake is applied. HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
target speed selection, but will not affect the gear  The driver door opens. controlling vehicle speed when descending hills.
chosen by the transmission. When actively The driver must remain attentive to the driving
 The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
controlling HDC, the transmission will shift appro- conditions and is responsible for maintaining a
priately for the driver-selected set speed and corre- (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
safe vehicle speed.
sponding driving conditions.  The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
Driver Override (64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The driver may override HDC activation with  HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
throttle or brake application at any time. Feedback To The Driver complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
Deactivating HDC The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a
of the following conditions occur: to the driver about the state HDC is in. short period. If the driver does not apply the
 The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate throttle before this time expires, the system will
 Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or
and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
brake application.
activated. This is the normal operating condition down the hill as normal.
 Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but for HDC. The following conditions must be met in order for
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
 The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for HSA to activate:
 Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient several seconds then extinguish when the driver  The feature must be enabled.
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill pushes the HDC switch but enable conditions
grade.  The vehicle must be stopped.
are not met.
 Vehicle is shifted to PARK.  The parking brake must be off.
 The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when HDC  The driver door must be closed.
disables due to excess speed.  The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
SAFETY 265
 The gear selection must match vehicle uphill Disabling And Enabling HSA Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
change the current setting, proceed as follows: braking during emergency braking situations. It
 HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward anticipates when an emergency braking situation
 If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
gears. The system will not activate if the trans- may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is
display, see Ú page 81 for further information.
mission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles released by the driver. The Electronic Brake
equipped with a manual transmission, if the  If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see Control system will prepare the brake system for a
clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active. Ú page 191 for further information. panic stop.
Towing With HSA Traction Control System (TCS)
WARNING!
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of
There may be situations where the Hill Start back while towing a trailer. each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a WARNING! spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A
 If you use a trailer brake controller with your
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD)
is always the driver’s responsibility to be
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and 6
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
may not be enough brake pressure to hold
and objects, and most importantly brake wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle other, the system will apply the brake of the
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
under all road conditions. Your complete spinning wheel. This will allow more engine power
rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
attention is always required while driving to to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to may remain enabled even if TCS and Electronic
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
follow these warnings can result in a collision or Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
releasing the brake pedal.
serious personal injury.
 HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
Also, be certain to place the transmission in
PARK.
 Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
266 SAFETY
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS If an FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
FORWARD C OLLISION WARNING (FCW) the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. WITH MITIGATION — I F EQUIPPED Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle
NOTE: completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always standstill for two seconds and then release the
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the brakes.
instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake
trailer tongue weight recommendations
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
Ú page 173.
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/ are intended to provide the driver with enough time
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to NOTE:
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is FCW monitors the information from the forward
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Off” or “Full Off” modes. Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
WARNING! that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
be provided with audible and visual warnings as
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle FCW Message
well as a possible brake jerk warning.
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and When the system determines a collision with the
If the driver does not take action based upon these
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway. vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
progressive warnings, then the system will provide
a limited level of active braking to help slow the warning message will be deactivated Ú page 412.
vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
the system determines that the driver intends to
avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
SAFETY 267
NOTE: Turning FCW On Or Off FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity

 The minimum speed for FCW activation is The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display The FCW sensitivity and Active Braking status are
3 mph (5 km/h). in the control settings Ú page 191. programmable through the Uconnect system
 The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects NOTE: Ú page 191.
other than vehicles such as guardrails or sign  Far
 When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to
posts based on the course prediction. This is
warn the driver of a possible collision with the  When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
vehicle in front. “Far” setting and the system status is
and functionality.
 When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system “Warning and Braking”, this allows the
 It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent system to warn the driver of a possible more
from warning the driver of a possible collision
such misuse of the system, after four Active with the vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”, distant collision with the vehicle in front
Braking events within a key cycle, the Active “FCW OFF" will be displayed in the instrument using audible/visual warnings.
Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until cluster display.  More cautious drivers that do not mind
the next key cycle.
 When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
 The FCW system is intended for on-road use
prevents the system from providing limited  Medium
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW active braking, or additional brake support if the  When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
6
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec- driver is not braking adequately in the event of
essary warnings to the surroundings. “Medium” setting and the system status is
a potential frontal collision. “Warning and Braking”, this allows the
WARNING!  When FCW status is set to “Warning and system to warn the driver of a possible colli-
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the sion with the vehicle in front using audible/
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in visual warnings.
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW front using audible/visual warnings and it
detect every type of potential collision. The driver  Near
applies autonomous braking.
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by  When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.  The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full On” “Near” setting and the system status is
Failure to follow this warning could lead to from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system “Warning and Braking”, this allows the
serious injury or death. is turned off, it will reset to “Full On” when the system to warn the driver of a possible
vehicle is restarted. closer collision with the vehicle in front
using audible/visual warnings.
268 SAFETY
 This setting provides less reaction time than TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
allows for a more dynamic driving experi- (TPMS) is driven — this is normal and there should be no
ence. (Vehicles Under 10K Gross Vehicle Weight Rating adjustment for this increased pressure.
 More dynamic or aggressive drivers that (GVWR) Only) See Ú page 376 on how to properly inflate the
want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will vehicle’s tires.
this setting. warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
FCW Limited Warning vehicle recommended cold placard pressure. if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
NOTE: warning limit for any reason, including low
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the temperature effects and natural pressure loss
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when through the tire.
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that limits tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
drivable under normal conditions, the active display a graphic showing the pressure values of will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
braking may not be fully available. Once the each tire with the low tire pressure values in a the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the
condition that limited the system performance is different color, or the Uconnect radio will display a low TPMS Warning Light illuminates, you must
no longer present, the system will return to its full TPMS message. When this occurs you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
performance state. If the problem persists, see an increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
authorized dealer. cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system will
Warning Light to turn off. automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light
Service FCW Warning will turn off once the system receives the updated
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven
displays: means that when the outside temperature for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
 ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire order for the TPMS to receive this information.
 Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
pressure should always be set based on cold NOTE:
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
This indicates there is an internal system fault. pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile above the recommended cold placard pressure in
conditions, have the system checked by an (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
authorized dealer. order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
SAFETY 269
For example, your vehicle may have a  The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
recommended cold (parked for more than three CAUTION! maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the  Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a sensor to become inoperable. After using an has not reached the level to trigger illumination
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended of the TPMS Warning Light.
tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). that you take your vehicle to an authorized  Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn dealership to have your sensor function pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle checked. tire pressure in the tire.
may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
placard pressure value Ú page 412. sensor.
CAUTION! NOTE:
6
 The TPMS has been optimized for the original  The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures care and maintenance or to provide warning of
and warning have been established for the tire a tire failure or condition.
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable  If your vehicle is not equipped with the Tire Fill Example: Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
system operation or sensor damage may Alert feature the TPMS should not be used as a
result when using replacement equipment The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. wireless technology with wheel rim mounted
pressure.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
 Driving on a significantly underinflated tire Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
damage.
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
(Continued) failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi- receiver module.
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
270 SAFETY
NOTE: NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
and to maintain the proper pressure. above the recommended cold placard pressure in
The TPMS consists of the following components: order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light off.
 Receiver module
Service TPMS Warning
 Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
 Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and
messages, which display in the instrument
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
cluster Example: Low Tire Pressure Display addition, the instrument cluster will display a
 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
condition (those in a different color in the place of the pressure value to indicate which
Pressure Warnings
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s sensor is not being received.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
recommended cold placard pressure inflation If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
Warning Light will illuminate in the
value shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the
instrument cluster when tire pressure is
the system receives the updated tire pressures, system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure
low in one or more of the four active road
the system will automatically update, the graphic Monitoring System Warning Light will no longer
tires. The instrument cluster will display a graphic
display in the instrument cluster will return to its flash, and the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message
showing the pressure values of each tire with the
original color, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring will no longer display, and a pressure value will
low tire pressure values in a different color. An
System Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may display in place of the dashes. A system fault can
"Inflate to XX" message will also be displayed.
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above occur due to any of the following:
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive  Signal interference due to electronic devices or
this information. driving next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
 Installing aftermarket window tinting that
contains materials that may block radio wave
signals.
SAFETY 271
 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels  If you install the non-matching full size spare or  Once you repair or replace the original road tire
or wheel housings. compact spare tire in place of a road tire that and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
 Using tire chains on the vehicle. has a pressure below the low-pressure warning non-matching full size spare or compact spare,
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the the TPMS will update automatically. In addition,
 Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS TPMS Warning Light and a “LOW TIRE” message the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the
sensors. will remain on and a chime will sound. In addi- graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
A system fault may occur due to an incorrect TPMS tion, the graphic in the instrument cluster will new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as
sensor location condition. When a system fault still display a pressure value in a different color long as no tire pressure is below the low-pres-
occurs due to an incorrect TPMS sensor location, and an “Inflate to XX” message. sure warning limit in any of the four active road
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light  After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and order for the TPMS to receive this information.
chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
display a “Tire Pressure Temporarily Unavailable” cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message in place of the tire pressure display (TTPMS) — If Equipped
message for a minimum of five seconds and
screen. If the ignition switch is cycled, this The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sequence will repeat, providing the system fault
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
(TTPMS) is a feature that displays the trailer tire
6
value.
still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the pressure values and warns the driver of a low tire
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will  For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a pressure event based on the driver’s set target tire
no longer flash and the tire pressure display screen chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will pressure value, through TTPMS settings found in
will be displayed showing the tire pressure values flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain the radio.
in the correct locations. on solid, and the instrument cluster will display
a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a The TTPMS monitors the pressure of each tire and
Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or minimum of five seconds and then display warns the driver through the instrument cluster,
Compact Spare dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. when either a low tire pressure condition falls
 The non-matching full size spare or compact below 25% of the driver’s set pressure or if a
spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. There- system malfunction occurs. The instrument cluster
fore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in will display the actual tire pressure or dashes for
the non-matching full size spare or compact
spare tire.
272 SAFETY
each of the trailer tires in the correct trailer NOTE: Follow the on screen prompts to select the number
position, based on trailer configuration. The TTPMS The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing of axles (1 - 3), the number of trailer tires (2, 4, 6,
can support up to 12 trailer tires per configured process is complete. 8, or 12), and the set trailer tire pressure. The
trailer on up to four configurable trailers range is selectable anywhere between 25-125 psi
Ú page 191. (172-862 kPa).
Once psi (kPa) is programmed, the pairing screen
appears. Tire sensors must be paired in order
shown. Starting with Tire 1, deflate tire by 5 psi
(34 kPa) and wait for a horn chirp. It may take up
to three minutes for the chirp to occur, indicating
that the sensor has paired. Repeat process on
each tire, in order, until complete. Do not exit the
pairing screen until process is complete. If pairing
was unsuccessful, a double horn chirp will sound,
and a prompt on the touchscreen will allow you to
retry the procedure; “Retry” will only appear when
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System Trailer Tire Pressure Settings setup fails. Each tire must be successfully paired
during a single pairing process to receive the
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Pairing
success screen.
In order use this feature, the provided tire pressure
sensors must be installed in the desired trailer NOTE:
tires and the sensors must be paired to the truck. If the pairing process times out after three minutes
If the target trailer requires more than the provided of no communication with a sensor, a double horn
four sensors, additional sensors can be purchased chirp will occur indicating the pairing has failed and
at an authorized Ram dealership. a message will display on the radio indicating the
process was unsuccessful. Under certain circum-
With the sensors installed and the trailer near or stances, the double horn chirp may continue to
connected to your Ram truck, initiate the pairing happen every three minutes indicating the failed
process by entering the settings menu in the radio pairing. If this happens, the horn chirping may be
and select trailer. Select the desired trailer profile canceled by cycling the ignition button OFF and
to pair to, open the “Tire Pressure” menu, and hit then back to ON/RUN position.
“Set Up All Tires” Ú page 191. Trailer Tire Pressure Pairing
SAFETY 273
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low (24 km/h) in order for the TTPMS to receive the NOTE:
Pressure Warnings trailer tire pressure information. The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing
When a low tire pressure in one or more of the Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured process is complete.
active road tires is detected, the instrument cluster A “Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured” Tire Fill Alert — If Equipped
will display a message stating “Trailer Tire message will be displayed in the instrument This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
Pressure Low”. The instrument cluster will then cluster on the TTPMS instrument cluster graphic pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the
display the TTPMS graphic showing the pressure when a trailer number is selected that has not had tire.
values of each tire with the low tire pressure values trailer tire pressure sensors paired Ú page 191.
in a different color. The customer may choose to disable or enable the
Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active Tire Fill Alert feature through use of the customer
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as Trailer settings in the radio.
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those in a different color in the The “Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active NOTE:
instrument cluster graphic) to the customer Trailer” message will be displayed in the The Tire Fill Alert feature disables every time the
programmed target tire pressure value as shown instrument cluster when the trailer sensors being ignition is placed in the OFF position. The feature
at the top of the TTPMS instrument cluster graphic. received by the TTPMS module do not match the must be re-enabled through the radio each time
Once the tire(s) are inflated, the system will trailer sensors paired to the current trailer number the ignition is placed back in the ON/RUN position 6
automatically update the graphic display in the selected. This message will be displayed when the Ú page 191.
instrument cluster, returning to its original color. sensors being received completely match the
NOTE:
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to sensors paired to another trailer number
configured in the TTPMS module.  Only one tire can be filled at a time when using
10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the Tire Fill Alert system.
the TTPMS to receive the updated information. To correct this condition, the correct trailer number
must be selected in the radio Ú page 191.  The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
Service TTPMS Warning existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the
If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster System Limitations system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
will display a “Trailer Tire Pressure System Service The TTPMS may have difficulty transmitting The system will be activated when the TPMS
Required” message for a minimum of five seconds. through steel-walled tires or on trailers longer than receiver module detects a change in tire pressure.
Once the system fault is corrected the "Trailer Tire 30 ft. It is recommended to use standard tires and The ignition must be in the RUN mode, with the
Pressure System Service Required" message will trailers less than 30 ft long to avoid dropouts or transmission in PARK (P).
no longer be displayed. The vehicle may need to be difficulty when pairing.
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
274 SAFETY
NOTE: SELECTABLE TIRE FILL ALERT (STFA) — Once the customer selects the tire pressures for
It is not required to have the engine running to IF EQUIPPED the front and rear axles that they want to inflate or
enter Tire Fill Alert mode. deflate to, they can begin inflating or deflating one
The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the tire at a time.
optional feature that is included as part of the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system is NOTE:
If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating designed to allow the customer to select a The STFA system will only support inflating or
the tire, the TPMS sensor may be in a null spot pressure to inflate or deflate the vehicle's front and deflating one tire at a time.
preventing the TPMS sensor signal from being rear axle tires to and to provide feedback to the The customer may choose to disable or enable the
received. In this case, the vehicle may need to be customer while inflating or deflating the vehicle's STFA feature through use of the TFA settings in the
moved either forward or backward slightly to exit tires. radio. If STFA appears grayed out it must be turned
the null spot. In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is on prior to selecting.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire located in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, In order to use STFA, the Tire Fill Alert feature must
pressure display screen will be displayed in the the customer will be able to select a pressure be enabled through the radio Ú page 191.
instrument cluster. setting for both the front and rear axle tire The system will be activated when the TPMS
Operation: pressures by scrolling through a pressure range receiver module detects a change in tire pressure.
from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi increments for each axle The ignition must be in the RUN mode, with the
 The horn will chirp once to let the user know setting. XX = the vehicle’s cold placard pressure
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches transmission in PARK (P).
values for the front and rear axles as shown on the
recommended pressure. vehicle placard pressure label. The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
 The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over- vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
NOTE:
filled and will continue to chirp every five The Tire Fill Alert feature disables every time the If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating
seconds if the user continues to inflate the tire. ignition is placed in the OFF position. The feature or deflating the tire, the TPMS sensor may be in a
 The horn will chirp once again when enough air must be re-enabled through the radio each time null spot preventing the TPMS sensor signal from
is let out to reach proper inflation level. the ignition is placed back in the ON/RUN position being received. In this case, the vehicle may need
Ú page 191. to be moved either forward or backward slightly to
 The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is exit the null spot.
then underinflated and will continue to chirp The customer may also store the pressure values
every five seconds if the user continues to chosen for each axle in the radio as a preset When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
deflate the tire. pressure. The customer will be allowed to store up pressure display screen will be displayed in the
to two sets of preset values in the radio for the instrument cluster.
front and rear axle pressure values.
SAFETY 275
Operation: The TPIS consists of the following components:  Installing aftermarket window tinting that
 The horn will chirp once when the selected pres-  Receiver module contains materials that may block radio wave
sure is reached to let the user know when to signals.
 Four TPMS sensors (Single Rear Wheel (SRW)
stop inflating or deflating the tire. applications)  Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels
 The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over- or wheel housings.
 Six TPMS sensors (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW)
inflated or over deflated and will continue to applications)  Using tire chains on the vehicle.
chirp every five seconds if the user continues to  Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
inflate or deflate the tire.  Pressure display in the instrument cluster
sensors.
 The horn will chirp once again when enough air
The TPIS will display all four (Single Rear Wheel
is added or removed to reach proper selected (SRW) applications) or six (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW)
applications) tire pressure values in the instrument
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
pressure level.
cluster display. Some of the most important safety features in your
Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) vehicle are the restraint systems:
If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster
3500/4500/5500 Series Trucks will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Pressure a minimum of five seconds and then display
Information System (TPIS). dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to FEATURES 6
The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses indicate which sensor is not being received.  Seat Belt Systems
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will  Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
electronic sensors to transmit tire pressure levels. repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the
 Child Restraints
Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the system fault no longer exists, the "SERVICE TPM
valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed, and Some of the safety features described in this
receiver module. a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. section may be standard equipment on some
A system fault can occur due to any of the models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
NOTE:
following: you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly  Signal interference due to electronic devices or
and to maintain the proper pressure. driving next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
276 SAFETY
I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 7. The driver and front passenger seats should a poor driver and could cause a collision that
be moved back as far as practical to allow the includes you. This can happen far away from home
Please pay close attention to the information in front air bags room to inflate. or on your own street.
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
as safe as possible.
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
Here are some simple steps you can take to into the space between occupants and the people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: door and occupants could be injured. reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
1. Children 12 years old and under should 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a modified to accommodate a disabled person, Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
vehicle with a rear seat. see Ú page 409 for customer service contact times.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the information. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in (BeltAlert)
the appropriate child restraint or WARNING! Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position Ú page 291.  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger the driver and outboard front seat
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
front air bag can cause death or serious injury passenger (if equipped with outboard
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
to a child 12 years or younger, including a front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
child in a rear-facing child restraint. their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active
back as possible and use the proper child
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/
restraint Ú page 291.  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
RUN position.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle Initial Indication
behind them or under their arm.
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
5. You should read the instructions provided with rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
your child restraint to make sure that you are
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
using it properly.
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and SEAT BELT S YSTEMS outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
shoulder belts properly. Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
SAFETY 277
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front animal or other items are placed on the outboard WARNING!
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be more severe injuries in a collision. The air
BeltAlert Warning Sequence restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when belts, and cargo is properly stowed. deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an though you have air bags.
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not  In a collision, you and your passengers can
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front recommend deactivating BeltAlert. suffer much greater injuries if you are not
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the NOTE: properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is sure you and others in your vehicle are
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn buckled up properly.
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder on and remain on until the driver and outboard 6
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
Light will remain on until the seat belts are front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may Lap/Shoulder Belts riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
All seating positions except the Crew Cab front ously injured or killed.
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all center seating position have combination lap/  Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
occupants to buckle their seat belts. shoulder belts. vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
Change Of Status The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during seat belts.
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows (Continued)
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
equipped with outboard front passenger seat with you under normal conditions. However, in a
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again. out of the vehicle.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
278 SAFETY
WARNING! WARNING! WARNING!

 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat  A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk  A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
including the driver, should always wear their won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
provided at their seating position to minimize part of your seat belt as low as possible and worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
the risk of severe injury or death in the event keep it snug. ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
of a crash. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
 A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
your strongest bones will take the force in a
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
collision.
your injuries in a collision much worse. You Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
might suffer internal injuries, or you could without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat  A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized protect you from injury during a collision. You
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and dealer immediately and have it fixed. are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
to keep your passengers safe, too. you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
 A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
 Two people should never be belted into a buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
together.
single seat belt. People belted together can portion could ride too high on your body,
crash into one another in a collision, hurting possibly causing internal injuries. Always  A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest collision and leave you with no protection.
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no you. Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
matter what their size. checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
 A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
Wear your seat belt snugly.
collision, or if you have questions regarding
(Continued) seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
SAFETY 279
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
and adjust the seat.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of shoulder belt.
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
the seat belt to retract fully.
your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on lap/shoulder belt.
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap the anchor point. 6
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
under the seat belt in a collision. the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert slot at the top of the latch plate.
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
“click.” clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
Positioning The Lap Belt

280 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage NOTE: First Row Center Seat Belt Operating
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is Instructions (Regular Cab Only)
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only)
upward or downward to position the seat belt away features a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage in the upward position without pushing or
squeezing the release button. To verify the buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The
down to the position that serves you best. shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be
into position. stored out of the way in the seat for added
convenience to open up utilization of the storage
WARNING! areas behind the front seats when the seat is not
occupied.
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
plate from its stowed position on the seat.
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
 Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
Adjustable Anchorage and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
position, and if you are taller than average, you will shoulder belt.
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher  Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
position. After you release the anchorage button, the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
locked in position.  Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
SAFETY 281
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt

in a collision. WARNING!
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that  If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. properly connected when the seat belt is used
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able
seat belt. to provide proper restraint and will increase
the risk of injury in a collision.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.  When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow
Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected the preceding procedure to detach the
plate into the center red slot on the
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the
over the seat. retract to its stowed position. If necessary, webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow and mini-buckle.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the
the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
right head restraint.
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its
6
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating
stowed position. Instructions — If Equipped
the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until
you hear a “click.” The center seating position for the Crew Cab front
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up seat has a lap belt only. To buckle the lap belt, slide
the webbing as far as necessary to allow the the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
seat belt to go around your lap. "click." To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate
and pull.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing.
“click.” Wear the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back
and upright in the seat, then adjust the seat belt as
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
tightly as is comfortable.
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
282 SAFETY
Seat Belt Extender Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belt Pretensioner — If Equipped
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even 3500 Models Only
when the webbing is fully extended and the The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if with pretensioning devices that are designed to
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. collision. These devices may improve the
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the performance of the seat belt by removing slack
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different work for all size occupants, including those in child
occupant, it must be removed. restraints.
WARNING! NOTE:
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
 ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
required in order to properly fit the original Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Extender if, when worn, the distance between an accident is reduced for the mother and the Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
buckle and the center of the occupant’s body Position the lap belt snug and low below the pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
is LESS than 6 inches. abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. replaced immediately.
 Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
Energy Management Feature — If
can increase the risk of serious injury or death from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender behind the back or under the arm. Equipped
when the lap belt is not long enough and only 3500 Models Only
use in the recommended seating positions. The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender with an Energy Management feature that may help
when not needed. further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
SAFETY 283
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors restraint is installed in a seating position that has
(ALR) — If Equipped a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
may be equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a WARNING!
child restraint system Ú page 300.
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
The figures below illustrate the locking feature for
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
each seating position.
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations child in a rear-facing child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. 6
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract belt.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor completely in this case and then carefully pull out
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
only the amount of webbing necessary to
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
until you hear a "click." retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
Locking Mode.
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
284 SAFETY
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode The air bag system must be ready to protect you in The ORC contains a backup power supply system
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller that may deploy the air bag system even if the
allow it to retract completely to disengage the (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle interconnecting wiring associated with the prior to deployment.
sensitive (emergency) locking mode. electrical Air Bag System Components. Your The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag instrument panel for approximately four to eight
WARNING! System Components: seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
 The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the Air Bag System Components first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
feature or any other seat belt function is not
 Air Bag Warning Light turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
working properly when checked according to
 Steering Wheel and Column momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
the procedures in the Service Manual.
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
 Failure to replace the seat belt assembly  Instrument Panel
initial startup.
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.  Knee Impact Bolsters
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
 Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat  Seat Belt Buckle Switch Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
belt or children who are using booster seats. the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
 Supplemental Side Air Bags — If Equipped
The locked mode is only used to install nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints  Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
that have a harness for restraining the child.  Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
Air Bag Warning Light
 The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
SUPPLEMENTAL R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
(SRS) monitors the readiness of the electronic tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
parts of the air bag system whenever the
Some of the safety features described in this ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN  The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
section may be standard equipment on some position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position four to eight-second interval.
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on  The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer. and the air bags will not inflate. tently or remains on while driving.
SAFETY 285
NOTE: comes on intermittently or remains on while driving

If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine have an authorized dealer service the vehicle WARNING!
related gauges are not working, the Occupant immediately Ú page 94.  Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In Front Air Bags ment panel during front air bag deployment
this condition the air bags may not be ready to could cause serious injury, including death. Air
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
dealer service the air bag system immediately. belts for both the driver and front passenger. The ably extending your arms to reach the steering
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt wheel or instrument panel.
WARNING! restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your passenger front air bag is mounted in the front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. front air bag can cause death or serious injury
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are to a child 12 years or younger, including a
light does not come on as a bulb check when the embossed on the air bag covers. child in a rear-facing child restraint.
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
an authorized dealer service the air bag system 6
immediately. child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), Features
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
illuminate on the instrument panel. The driver and front passenger air bags. This system
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations provides output appropriate to the severity and
the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags type of collision as determined by the Occupant
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been information from the front impact sensors (if
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light equipped) or other system components.
286 SAFETY
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
during an impact that requires air bag deployment. WARNING! collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
A low energy output is used in less severe  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to position, away from an inflating air bag.
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more more severe injuries in a collision. The air When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
severe collisions. bags work with your seat belt to restrain you detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat though you have air bags. bags.
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Front Air Bag Operation passenger side of the instrument panel separate
Bags. and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
WARNING! time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
 No objects should be placed over or near the injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
air bag on the instrument panel or steering air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, the driver and front passenger.
wheel because any such objects could cause including some that may produce substantial Knee Impact Bolsters
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe vehicle damage — for example, some pole
enough to cause the air bag to inflate. The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
 Do not put anything on or around the air bag collisions.
front occupants for improved interaction with the
covers or attempt to open them manually. You On the other hand, depending on the type and front air bags.
may damage the air bags and you could be location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
injured because the air bags may no longer be crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but WARNING!
functional. The protective covers for the air that produce a severe initial deceleration.
 Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
bag cushions are designed to open only when Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
the air bags are inflating. impact bolsters in any way.
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
(Continued) by themselves are not good indicators of whether  Do not mount any accessories to the knee
or not an air bag should have deployed. impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
SAFETY 287
Supplemental Side Air Bags When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
(SABs) — If Equipped
the space between the occupant and the door. The
Your vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). If your vehicle is high force that it could injure occupants if they are
equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
Bags (SABs), please refer to the information below. the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or WARNING! Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the Do not use accessory seat covers or place Label Location
outboard side of the seats. objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
SABICs (if equipped with SABICs) may help reduce
performance could be adversely affected and/or
the risk of head and other injuries to front and rear
objects could be pushed into you, causing seri-
seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts,
ous injury.
in addition to the injury reduction potential
6
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
(SABICs) — If Equipped
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
Your vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). If your window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs), please refer to the properly, or if items are positioned in the area
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label information below. where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABs (if equipped with SABs) may help to
reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain (SABICs) are located above the side windows. The The SABICs (if equipped with SABICs) may help
side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of
potential provided by the seat belts and body or “AIRBAG.” vehicle occupants through side windows in certain
structure. side impact events.
288 SAFETY
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side

WARNING! impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle WARNING!
 Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether  Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
other cargo up high enough to block the or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. priate) are necessary for your protection in all
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions. They also help keep you in position,
above the side windows where the SABIC and collisions, including some collisions at certain away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
its deployment path are located should angles, or some side collisions that do not impact best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
remain free from any obstructions. the area of the passenger compartment. The Side pants must wear their seat belts properly and
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal sit upright with their backs against the seats.
 In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
collisions where the front air bags deploy. Children must be properly restrained in a child
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after- Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
the size of the child.
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
roof racks that require permanent attach- than it takes to blink your eyes.
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
WARNING!
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the WARNING!
vehicle for any reason.  Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
 Occupants, including children, who are up
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
center of the seat.
Side Impacts seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in including children, should never lean on or  Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint sleep against the door, side windows, or area deployment could cause you to be severely
Controller (ORC) determines whether the where the side air bags inflate, even if they are injured or killed.
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular in an infant or child restraint.
 Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity (Continued) to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
the ORC in determining the appropriate response you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
to impact events. The system is calibrated to won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the even though you have Side Air Bags.
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
SAFETY 289
NOTE: Air Bag System Components If you do have a collision which deploys the air
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior bags, any or all of the following may occur:
NOTE:
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.  The air bag material may sometimes cause
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
Rollover Events (If Equipped With Rollover the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
Sensing) associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo- pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners (if nents listed below: abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
equipped) are designed to activate in certain those you might get sliding along a carpet or
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
rollover events (if equipped with rollover sensing). gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)  Air Bag Warning Light contact with chemicals. They are not permanent
determines whether deployment in a particular  Steering Wheel and Column and normally heal quickly. However, if you
rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or
 Instrument Panel if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme-
and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags  Knee Impact Bolsters diately.
and seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags  As the air bags deflate, you may see some
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will  Seat Belt Buckle Switch smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover by-product of the process that generates the 6
 Supplemental Side Air Bags — If Equipped
sensing system determines if a rollover event may non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
be in progress and whether deployment is  Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a  Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
If A Deployment Occurs irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners on The front air bags are designed to deflate continues, see your doctor. If these particles
both sides of the vehicle. immediately after deployment. settle on your clothing, follow the garment
NOTE: manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli- Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
side windows in certain rollover or side impact sions. This does not mean something is wrong with deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
events. the air bag system. the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
290 SAFETY
 Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as NOTE:

WARNING! long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes After an accident, remember to place the ignition
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the Response System. key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat  Unlock the power door locks. battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an the engine compartment and on the ground near
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any the engine compartment and fuel tank before
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
of these other functions in response to the resetting the system and starting the engine. If
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
Enhanced Accident Response System: there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
as well.
 Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door accident, reset the system by following the
NOTE:
 Cut off battery power to the: procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
 Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior contact an authorized dealer.
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-  Engine
ment. Enhanced Accident Response System
 Electric Motor (if equipped)
Reset Procedure
 After any collision, the vehicle should be taken  Electric power steering
to an authorized dealer immediately. In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
 Brake booster System functions after an event, the ignition switch
Enhanced Accident Response System  Electric park brake must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN
In the event of an impact, if the communication  Automatic transmission gear selector to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
network remains intact, and the power remains leaks in the engine compartment and on the
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the  Horn
ground near the engine compartment and fuel
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced  Front wiper tank before resetting the system and starting the
Accident Response System perform the following  Headlamp washer pump (if equipped) engine.
functions: After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
 Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped). performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must
 Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected
equipped). and to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System reset.
 Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
SAFETY 291
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR) To read data recorded by an EDR, special
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
WARNING! (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
 Modifications to any part of the air bag system certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as manufacturer, other parties, such as law
could cause it to fail when you need it. You an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, enforcement, that have the special equipment,
data that will assist in understanding how a can read the information if they have access to the
could be injured if the air bag system is not
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed vehicle or the EDR.
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of to record data related to vehicle dynamics and CHILD R ESTRAINTS
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub safety systems for a short period of time, typically
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
instrument panel. Do not modify the front designed to record such data as: all times, including babies and children. Every
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add  How various systems in your vehicle were oper- state in the United States, and every Canadian
aftermarket side steps or running boards. ating; province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
 It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air  Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who belts were buckled/fastened;
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag  How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly 6
system. buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
 Do not attempt to modify any part of your air  How fast the vehicle was traveling. restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally These data can help provide a better
or may not function properly if modifications are understanding of the circumstances in which WARNING!
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer crashes and injuries occur. In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
NOTE: a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a to hold even an infant on your lap could become
be serviced in any way (including removal or
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are so great that you could not hold the child, no
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi- matter how strong you are. The child and others
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
manufacturer approved seat accessories may
and crash location) are recorded. However, other in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the child’s size.
system for persons with disabilities, contact an
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying
authorized dealer.
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
292 SAFETY
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
 For additional information, refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–327–4236
 Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and who Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Infants and Toddlers have not reached the height or weight limits of their Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
child restraint vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who have Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Small Children outgrown the height or weight limit of their Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
rear-facing child restraint vehicle
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
Larger Children child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster
vehicle
seat
SAFETY 293
Infant And Child Restraints Older Children And Child Restraints

WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride Children who are two years old or who have
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
old or until they reach either the height or weight front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant does not have a rear seat, do not transport a seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
carriers and convertible child seats. rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. children who are over two years old or who have
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
WARNING! should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this weight or height allowed by the child seat.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight vehicle is not designed to manage the crash All children whose weight or height is above the
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers forces of this type of car seat. In a crash, the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who support leg may not function as it was designed belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less by the car seat manufacturer, and your child may seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with 6
than at least two years old. Children should remain be more severely injured as a result. knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or the child’s back is against the seatback, they
height allowed by their convertible child seat. should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
WARNING! the vehicle by the seat belt.
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
WARNING!
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury  Improper installation can lead to failure of an
to a child 12 years or younger, including a infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
child in a rear-facing child restraint. a collision. The child could be badly injured or
(Continued) killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
294 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats If the answer to any of these questions was “no”,
WARNING! then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
Children who are large enough to wear the
 After a child restraint is installed in the this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
or rearward because it can loosen the child the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
their back is against the seatback, should use the
restraint attachments. Remove the child or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
position. When the vehicle seat has been the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
seat belt alone:
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the correctly.
 When your child restraint is not in use, secure back of the vehicle seat?
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over WARNING!
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
still sitting all the way back? under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
injury. shoulder between the neck and arm? which may result in serious injury or death. A
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, child must always wear both the lap and
touching the child’s thighs and not the shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
SAFETY 295
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Combined Weight of Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Anchors LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether
Restraint Seat Belt Only
Only + Top Tether Anchor Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
6
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
(LATCH) Restraint System anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for have a top tether anchorage but no lower
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are install the child restraint. Please see the following
two lower anchorages located at the back of the table for more information.
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
LATCH Label
296 SAFETY
LATCH Positions For Installing Child

Restraints In This Vehicle
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions Crew Cab Full Bench LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position) Seating Position)
Regular Cab LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY 297
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once
child restraint?
the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together restraint.
No
to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint? Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster
seat owner’s manual for more information.
Regular Cab Front/Full Bench Rear Seat: Use the seat belt
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the N/A – Regular / Crew Split and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating Rear Bench position.
positions? No – Crew Full Rear Bench Split Bench Rear Seat: Use the supplied center lower 6
anchorages to install a child restraint in the center position.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
No LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
LATCH anchorage?
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
Yes seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
passenger seat?
See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
The head restraints can be removed in every rear seating
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes position if they interfere with the installation of the child
restraint Ú page 35.
298 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages —

Crew Cab Only
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers) Crew Cab Center Tether Anchorage With Head Restraint In
Raised Position
1 — Tether Anchor
2 — Tether Strap Hook LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
3 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats (Driver Side) top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Regular Cab models have tether strap
anchorages behind the front center and
right seats. Crew Cab models have tether
strap anchorages located behind each of Crew Cab Outboard Tether Anchorage
the rear seats.
SAFETY 299
Center Seat LATCH Always follow the directions of the child restraint 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. it to the top tether anchorage. See
Regular Cab or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat: No
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as Ú page 303 for directions to attach a tether
Lower Center LATCH Anchorages Available
described here. anchor.
WARNING! To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
Restraint restraint rearward and downward into the
 Do not install a child restraint in the center
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
position using the LATCH system. This position If the selected seating position has a Switchable the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
is not approved for installing child seats using Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the LATCH attachments. You must use the the seat belt, following the instructions below. See 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
seat belt and tether anchor to install a child Ú page 300 to check what type of seat belt each by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
seat in the center seating position. seating position has. the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
 Never use the same lower anchorage to attach 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
more than one child restraint. For typical instal- on the tether strap of the child seat so that How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
lation instructions, see Ú page 299. you can more easily attach the hooks or
(ALR) Seat Belt:
connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 6
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat: Center LATCH 2. Place the child seat between the lower
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
Anchorages Available anchorages for that seating position. If the
being used by other occupants or being used to
second row seat can be reclined, you may
If a child restraint installed in the center position secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
outboard position, do not use that outboard seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
can be moved forward and rearward in the
position. If a child seat in the center position blocks restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
rear-most position to make room for the child
install a child seat in that outboard position. reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
WARNING! to allow more room for the child seat.
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the through the child restraint belt path and then
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
more than one child restraint. For typical buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
selected seating position. children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
installation instructions, see Ú page 299.
toys and that they should not play with them.
300 SAFETY
pulled back into the retractor. The cinching latch

WARNING! WARNING! plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seat
 Improper installation of a child restraint to the  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s belt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the directions exactly when installing an infant or through a child restraint’s belt path.
restraint. The child could be badly injured or child restraint. See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac- Ú page 283 for additional information on ALR.
turer’s directions exactly when installing an Regular Cab Please see the table below and the following
infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions sections for more information.
 Child restraint anchorages are designed to are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
withstand only those loads imposed by Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no Child Restraints In This Vehicle
portion of the seat belt tight around the child
circumstances are they to be used for adult restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
items or equipment to the vehicle. locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
Installing Child Restraints Using The into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
Vehicle Seat Belt into the retractor.
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
Crew Cab
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt. The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic
WARNING! Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
both. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep
 Improper installation or failure to properly the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
the restraint. The child could be badly injured locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched”
or killed. into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out
(Continued) of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
SAFETY 301
Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations

Cinching Latch plate — Cinching Latch plate
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
Weight limit of the Child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended
Restraint
a forward facing child restraint? weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
Yes restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
passenger seat?
allows contact.
The head restraints can be removed in every rear seating
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes position if they interfere with the installation of the child
restraint Ú page 35.
In positions with cinching latch plates (CINCH), the buckle
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against Yes – Cinching Latch Plate
stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
the belt path of the child restraint? No – ALR
stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
302 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A For Regular Cab Models 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Place the child seat in the center of the seating the seating position has a top tether
position. Move the vehicle seat as far rearward anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
(ALR): anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
as possible to keep the child as far from the
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured Ú page 303 for directions to attach a tether
passenger air bag as possible.
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion anchor.
of a lap/shoulder belt. 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
WARNING!
the belt path. the belt path. It should not move more than
 Improper installation or failure to properly 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
the restraint. The child could be badly injured hear a “click.” Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
or killed. 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
tight against the child seat. Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
child restraint. part of the belt until you have pulled all the
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
allow the webbing to retract back into the
1. For Crew Cab Models of a lap/shoulder belt.
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
Place the child seat in the center of the seating a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
position. If the second row seat can be re-
WARNING!
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
clined, you may recline the seat and/or raise 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it  Improper installation or failure to properly
the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better is locked, you should not be able to pull out any secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat the restraint. The child could be badly injured
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move or killed.
step 5.
it to its rear-most position to make room for the
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
child seat. You may also move the front seat
tighten the lap portion around the child directions exactly when installing an infant or
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
restraint while you push the child restraint child restraint.
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
SAFETY 303
1. Place the child seat in the center of the 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
seating position. If the second row seat can by pulling back and forth on the child seat at Tether Anchorage
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or the belt path. It should not move more than
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. WARNING!
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
wish to move it to its rear-most position to the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. seat to any location in front of the car seat,
make room for the child seat. You may also If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
move the front seat forward to allow more to the belt path opening of the child restraint, you Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
room for the child seat. may have trouble tightening the seat belt. If this seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
happens, disconnect the latch plate from the that seating position, located behind the top of
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt up to the vehicle seat. For the location of approved
from the retractor to pass it through the belt
three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch plate tether anchorages in your vehicle, see
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
into the buckle with the release button facing out, Ú page 295.
webbing in the belt path.
away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6,
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
above, to complete the installation of the child 6
hear a “click.”
restraint.
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you
tighten the lap portion around the child
shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate from
restraint while you push the child restraint
the buckle, turn the buckle around one half turn,
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and you still cannot make the child restraint installation
the seating position has a top tether tight, try a different seating position.
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 303 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
304 SAFETY
Regular Cab Trucks: 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether direct path between the anchorage and the 1. Raise the head restraint and reach between
anchorages are located behind the child seat. The tether strap should go between the rear seat and rear glass to access the
center and right passenger seats. There the head restraint posts underneath the head tether strap loop.
is a plastic cover over each anchorage. restraint. You may need to adjust the head
To attach the tether strap of the child restraint: restraint to the upward position to pass the
tether strap underneath the head restraint
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and and between its posts.
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head restraint 3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the
and to the tether anchor directly behind the hook to the square opening in the sheet metal.
seat. Tighten the tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front Head Restraint In Raised Position
of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a
rear-facing child restraint.
Crew Cab Trucks

Regular Cab Tether Anchorages The top tether anchorages in this vehicle
1 — Tether Anchor are tether strap loops located between
the rear glass and the back of the rear
2 — Tether Strap Hook
seat. There is a tether strap loop located
3 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint behind each seating position. Follow the steps
below to attach the tether strap of the child Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In Raised
restraint. Position
SAFETY 305
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust Center Seat:

the tether strap so that it will reach over the 1. Raise the head restraint and reach between
seat back, under the head restraint, through the rear seat and rear glass to access the
the tether strap loop behind the seat and over tether strap loop.
to the tether strap loop behind the center seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head
restraint behind the child seat, though the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over to
the center tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And

Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
NOTE:
If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left
and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised Position 6
of both child seats should be connected to the
center tether strap loop. This is the correct way to 2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust
tether two outboard child seats. the tether strap so that it will reach over the
seat back, under the head restraint, through
the tether strap loop behind the seat and over
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
to the tether strap loop behind either the right
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop or left outboard seat.
(see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
306 SAFETY
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head 5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child
restraint behind the child seat, though the seat manufacturer’s instructions, tightening
tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the right and left tether straps before the
the right or left outboard tether strap loop. center tether strap.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And

Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Installing Three Child Restraints:

1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
seat. Route the tether straps following the
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap directions for right and left seating positions,
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap above. WARNING!
according to the child seat manufacturer’s 2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap  An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
instructions. loop, but do not tighten the straps yet. lead to increased head motion and possible
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
Route the tether strap following the directions position directly behind the child seat to
for the center seating position, above. secure a child restraint top tether strap.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap  If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
loop. seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
SAFETY 307
SAFETY TIPS TRANSPORTING P ETS Air Bag Warning Light

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about four to eight seconds as a bulb check
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during when the ignition switch is first placed in
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
panic braking or in a collision. ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
AREA.
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
WARNING! equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are as soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked secured by seat belts. will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup the Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay
may cause serious injury or death.
SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE
on until the fault is removed. If the light comes on
I NSIDE THE VEHICLE intermittently or remains on while driving, have an
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli- Seat Belts authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately
sion, people riding in these areas are more Ú page 275.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
likely to be seriously injured or killed. for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts Defroster
6
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your must be replaced immediately. Do not Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and disassemble or modify the system. place the blower control on high speed. You should
seat belts. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you be able to feel the air directed against the
have questions regarding seat belt or retractor windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA your defroster is inoperable.
and using a seat belt properly.
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
308 SAFETY
Floor Mat Safety Information

WARNING! WARNING!
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the  ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your  NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely be properly attached and secured to your change the position of the floor mat and may
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, cause interference with the accelerator,
slip out of position and interfere with the only use a FCA approved floor mat for the brake, or clutch pedals.
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe specific make, model, and year of your
 If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
operation of your vehicle in other ways. vehicle.
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
 ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
WARNING! driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer- secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the each pedal to check for interference with the
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to re-install the floor mats.
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
 It is recommended to only use mild soap and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
always check your floor mat has been properly
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
 ALWAYS securely attach your floor installed and is secured to your vehicle using
trunk.
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
NOT install your floor mat upside down  ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull the passenger’s side floor area.
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
fasteners on a regular basis. into the driver’s side floor area when the
 ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING vehicle is moving. Objects can become
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
installing any other floor mat. NEVER pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
install or stack an additional floor mat control.
on top of an existing floor mat. (Continued)
(Continued)
SAFETY 309
PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD EXHAUST GAS The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE engine exhaust system.
WARNING!
Tires Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
odorless. Breathing it can make you or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: system and adjacent body areas for broken,
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires  Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. confined areas any longer than needed to Open seams or loose connections could permit
move your vehicle in or out of the area. exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
Lights compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
 If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
Have someone observe the operation of brake system each time the vehicle is raised for
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
lights and exterior lights while you work the lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
windows are closed and the climate control
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT 6
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
use the recirculation mode.
Door Latches
 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. the engine running, adjust your heating or
Fluid Leaks cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
310 SAFETY
CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
 Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
an open area with the engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
 Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
311
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
the upper switch bank just below the radio. oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button When you must leave the vehicle to seek
NOTE: assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch continue to operate even though the ignition is
Uconnect display, the Hazard Warning Flashers placed in the OFF position.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button button is located above the display. NOTE: 7
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers
may wear down your battery.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button With 12-inch Display

312 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:

 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
NOTE: rized by the subscriber Ú page 412.
Depending on the vehicles trim level, the overhead
 The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if
console may vary.
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network, which comes as a
built in function. Other Uconnect services will
only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™
service is active and you are connected to an
operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
Assist And SOS Buttons
ASSIST Call
1 — ASSIST Button The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
2 — SOS Button connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
If equipped, the overhead console contains an  Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
Assist And SOS Buttons ASSIST and a SOS button. need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
1 — ASSIST Button you’ll be connected to someone who can help.
WARNING! Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle
2 — SOS Button
you’re driving and its location. Additional fees
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
may apply for roadside assistance.
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility  SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
and assume all risks related to the use of the support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
features and applications in this vehicle. Only  Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
use the features and applications when it is safe other vehicle issues.
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
 Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
accident involving serious injury or death.
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 313
SOS Call 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead operator through the vehicle audio system to system will attempt to remain connected
console. determine if additional help is needed. with the SOS operator until the SOS oper-
ator terminates the connection.
NOTE: WARNING!
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, 5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to appropriate emergency responders and
system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on provide them with important vehicle
the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button the steering wheel. You have full responsibility information and GPS coordinates.
on the overhead console or press the cancellation and assume all risks related to the use of the
button on the Device Screen. Termination of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only WARNING!
SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an  If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
overhead console.
accident involving serious injury or death. (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and conditions or location), do not wait for voice
SOS buttons on the overhead console will turn contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
green once a connection to a SOS operator has NOTE: occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
been made.  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as and move to a safe location.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a authorized by the subscriber.
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 7
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system  Once a connection is made between the operable network and GPS antennas. You
may transmit the following important vehicle vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper- could prevent operable network and GPS
information to a SOS operator: ator, the SOS operator may be able to open signal reception, which can prevent your
 Indication that the occupant placed a SOS a voice connection with the vehicle to deter- vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
Call. mine if additional help is needed. Once the operable network and GPS signal reception is
SOS operator opens a voice connection with required for the SOS Call system to function
 The vehicle brand.
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator properly.
 The last known GPS coordinates of the should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle. vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur- (Continued)
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
WARNING! of the following may occur at the time the factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
 The SOS Call system is embedded into the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after- each ignition cycle: include, but are not limited to, the following
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s  The overhead console light located within the factors:
electrical system. This may prevent your ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illumi-  The ignition is in the OFF position.
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an nate red.  The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
 The Device Screen will display the following  The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
message: “Vehicle device requires service. are damaged during a crash.
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your  The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the  An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle disconnected during a vehicle crash.
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
WARNING! able or obstructed.
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT  Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
 Ignoring the overhead console light could
OPERATE. facility.
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the overhead console light is illuminated, have  Operator error by the SOS operator.
 Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail an authorized dealer service the SOS Call  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network conges-
when you need it. You could be injured if the system immediately. tion.
air bag system is not there to help protect you.  The Occupant Restraint Control module turns  Weather.
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
SOS Call System Limitations panel if a malfunction in any part of the tunnels.
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
system capabilities.
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico immediately.
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
 Changes or modifications not expressly

WARNING! approved by the party responsible for compli- WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to ance could void the user's authority to operate  Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the equipment. is on a jack.
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility Automatic SOS — If Equipped  The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that changing tires only. The jack should not be
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
can immediately connect you with help in the event used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
use the features and applications when it is safe
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
your provided radio supplement for complete surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
accident involving serious injury or death.
information.
4500/5500 MODELS
CAUTION! JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
These vehicles do not come equipped with a jack.
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, WARNING! NOTE:
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
 Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of Jacking and tire changing on 4500/5500 models
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far should be performed by an authorized dealer, or
and wipe the mirror clean.
enough off the road to avoid the danger of knowledgeable service personnel with the appro-
being hit when operating the jack or changing priate heavy duty equipment, like a tire service 7
NOTE: the wheel. company.
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-  Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
rized by the subscriber. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
GPS signal reception, which can prevent your it to a service center where it can be raised on
vehicle from placing an emergency call. An oper- a lift.
able LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network (Continued)
connection and a GPS signal is required for the
SOS Call system to function properly.
PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING WARNING!

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid  Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
ice or slippery areas. transmission in PARK.
WARNING!  Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far  Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
enough off the road to avoid being hit when on a jack.
operating the jack or changing the wheel.  Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
Wheel Blocked on a jack.
2. Place the gear selector into PARK. On NOTE:  Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
four-wheel drive vehicles, shift the transfer Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
case to the 4WD Low position. the vehicle is being jacked. take it to a service center where it can be
3. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. raised on a lift.
J ACKING INSTRUCTIONS 4500 AND
4. Apply the parking brake.  Only use the jack in the positions indicated
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
5500 S ERIES and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel WARNING!  If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For careful of motor traffic.
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your  To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
vehicle: securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
 Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
(Continued)
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make

sure that the jack will not damage surrounding
truck parts and adjust the jack position as re-
quired.
4. Raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the
surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
Jack Warning Label Front Jacking Locations jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
When changing a rear wheel, securely place only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION! the jack under the sway bar bracket (unless
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on both tires are flat on one side, then place jack 5. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off. For
locations other than those indicated in the under shock bracket) facing forward in vehicle. Single Rear-Wheel (SRW) models, Install the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. spare wheel and lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nuts toward the wheel. For Dual
1. If equipped, remove the spare wheel and Rear-Wheel (DRW) models, the lug nuts are a 7
tools from storage. two-piece assembly with a flat face. Lightly
tighten the nuts. To avoid risk of forcing the
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the
remove, the lug nuts by turning them counter- nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on
the ground. 6. Using the lug wrench, finish tightening the nuts
using a crisscross pattern Ú page 397. If in
3. When changing the front wheel, place the jack doubt about the correct tightness, have them
under the axle as close to the tire as possible. checked with a torque wrench by an
Rear Jacking Location authorized dealer or at a service station.
Dual wheel models require a special heavy-duty lug wheel nut just previously tightened until final
WARNING! nut tightening adapter (included with the vehicle) torque is achieved Ú page 397.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision to correctly tighten the lug nuts. Also, when it is
or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of necessary to remove and install dual rear wheels, TO STOW THE FLAT O R S PARE —
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the use a proper vehicle lifting device. I F E QUIPPED
spare tire in the places provided. NOTE: Refer to Upfitters Body Builder’s Guide for
When installing a spare tire (if equipped) as part of information on stowing your spare tire (if
7. Install wheel center cap (if equipped) and a dual rear wheel end combination, the tire equipped).
remove wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or diameter of the two individual tires must be
aluminum wheel center caps on the spare compared. If there is a significant difference, the HUB CAPS/WHEEL COVERS —
wheel. This may result in cap damage. larger tire should be installed in a front location. I F E QUIPPED
The correct direction of rotation for dual tire instal-
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow The hub caps must be removed before raising the
lations must also be observed.
the replaced tire and tools as previously vehicle off the ground.
described. It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept
torqued to specifications at all times. Torque wheel
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible. CAUTION!
stud nuts to specifications at each lubrication
10. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut interval Ú page 397. Use extreme caution when removing the front
torque Ú page 397 with a torque wrench to and rear wheel covers. Damage can occur to the
ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated
Wheel Nuts
center cap and/or the wheel if screwdriver type
against the wheel. All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to tools are used. A pulling motion, not a pry off
eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being motion, is recommended to remove the caps.
Dual Rear Wheels sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming
elongated. This is especially important during the
Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting For 3500 Single Rear-Wheel (SRW) models, use
first few hundred miles/kilometers of operation to
the inner and outer wheels. Align these slots when the flat end of the lug wrench to hook and pull off
allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All
assembling the wheels for best access to the tire the hub cap. Find the opening in the hub cap,
wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the
valve on the inner wheel. The tires of both dual insert the lug wrench, and pull off the cap. If you
wheel. The wheel nuts should then be tightened to
wheels must be completely off the ground when need to pry against the wheel, protect the wheel
recommended torque. Tighten the wheel nuts to
tightening to ensure wheel centering and surface.
final torque in increments. Progress around the
maximum wheel clamping.
bolt circle, tightening the wheel nut opposite to the
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Hub Cap Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Wheel Cover Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
On 3500 models with Dual Rear-Wheels (DRW), personal injury.
you must first remove the hub caps—use the CAUTION!
procedure noted for the single rear wheel. For the  Use a pulling motion to remove the hub cap.
wheel covers (wheel skins), insert the flat end of Do not use a twisting motion when removing CAUTION!
the lug wrench between the outer edge of the the hub cap, damage to the hub cap; finish
wheel cover and the wheel. Pry against the wheel may occur. Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
to remove the wheel cover. Repeat this procedure
 The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has
any other booster source with a system voltage 7
around the wheel until the cover pops off. greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
two pull off notches. Make sure that the hook starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
of the jack handle driver is located squarely in occur.
the cap notch before attempting to pull off.
NOTE:
Replace the wheel covers using a rubber mallet to When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
ease the installation. Align the wheel cover vent the manufacturer's operating instructions and
holes to the wheel vent holes. Tap on the wheel precautions.
cover as needed to firmly seat it evenly around the
wheel.
PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP START NOTE:

WARNING!
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
transmission into PARK and turn the ignition
the engine compartment, behind the left headlight could establish a ground connection and
OFF.
assembly. personal injury could result.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, apply the parking brake, and WARNING!
make sure the ignition is OFF.
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
WARNING! damage due to battery explosion.
 Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be CAUTION!
Battery Location
injured by moving fan blades. Failure to follow these procedures could result in
If you have a diesel engine, you may have two
 Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
damage to the charging system of the booster
batteries, however jump start off the driver side
watch bands and bracelets that could make vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
battery.
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
The positive battery post may be covered with a
seriously injured. NOTE:
protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to
gain access to the positive battery post. Do not  Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive post your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas cables are not contacting each other or either
which has a positive (+) symbol on or around the which is flammable and explosive. Keep open vehicle while making connections.
post. flames or sparks away from the battery.
Connecting The Jumper Cables 6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper necting procedure below.
cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
vehicle.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
NOTE:
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
with the discharged battery.
positive post.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
booster battery.
Jump Starting Label 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster WARNING! battery.
battery.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
resulting electrical spark could cause the battery vehicle with the discharged battery.
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
to explode and could result in personal injury.
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground
If frequent jump starting is required to start your 7
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
must be away from the battery and fuel 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
injection system. booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the CAUTION!
vehicle with the discharged battery.
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
CAUTION! outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
on the positive battery terminal. The resulting
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
electrical current will blow the fuse.
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS WARNING! GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE

In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine 6–S PEED TRANSMISSION
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
appropriate action. If you see or hear steam coming from under the In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
 On the highways — slow down. hood, do not open the hood until the radiator transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
 In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans- available.
system pressure cap when the radiator or cool-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the
ant bottle is hot. 1. Turn the engine OFF.
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
NOTE: CAUTION! 3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
There are steps that you can take to slow down an 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
impending overheat condition: Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
pedal.
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
 If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The 5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling access port (ringed circle) on the bottom of the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
system and turning the A/C off can help remove steering column, and push and hold the
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
this heat. override release lever up.
the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
 You can also turn the temperature control to continuous chimes, turn the engine off immedi-
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and ately and call for service.
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
Gear Selector Override Access Port Location

MANUAL PARK RELEASE

8–S PEED TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park
Release. In addition, you should be seated in the
driver’s seat with your foot firmly on the brake
Gear Selector Override Access Port pedal when activating the Manual Park Release. Manual Park Release Cover
Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the 3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow pedal.
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on 4. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious Manual Park Release lever locking tab (just
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle. below the middle of the lever) upwards.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the 7

transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as
a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
Engaging The Access Port Follow the below steps to activate the Manual Park
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL Release:
position. 1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. 2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the Manual Park Release access
cover, which is just above the parking brake Manual Park Release Pull Strap
release handle, below and to the left of the
steering column.
5. While holding the locking tab in the NOTE:

disengaged position, pull the tether strap to  For trucks equipped with an 8–speed transmis-
rotate the lever rearward, until it locks in place sion, shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can
pointing towards the driver's seat. Release the only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
locking tab and verify that the Manual Park (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
Release lever is locked in the released remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
position. seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
6. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
towed. Release the parking brake only when  Push the ESC OFF button, to place the Electronic
the vehicle is securely connected to a tow Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off”
vehicle. Manual Park Release Tether In Stowed Position mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 260.
4. Re-install the access cover. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
OFF button again to restore ESC On mode.
1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the
lever. FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE WARNING!
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
to its original position, until the locking tab snow, it can often be moved using a rocking generated by excessive wheel speeds may
snaps into place to secure the lever. motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
the lever is locked in its stowed position. back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
(R), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 sec-
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that onds continuously without stopping when you
will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning
the wheels or racing the engine. wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
 Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for
at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
 When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
 Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled
vehicles may also be towed as described Ú page 185.
Wheels OFF The
Towing Condition 2WD Models 4WD Models
Ground
If transmission is operable: Detailed instructions Ú page 185 7
 Transmission in NEUTRAL  Auto Transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE
 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed  Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
 15 miles (24 km) max distance (6–speed transmission)  Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Front  30 miles (48 km) max distance (8–speed transmission) NOT ALLOWED
Tow Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to (with the rear wheels on the ground) under the FOUR-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars following conditions:
and other equipment designed for this purpose, FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
 The transmission must be in NEUTRAL
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
Ú page 323.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle
or other towing device to main structural members  The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated (48 km/h).
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles  The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be
under tow must be observed. (24 km) for 6–speed transmission, or 30 miles towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on
If you must use the accessories (wipers, (48 km) for 8–speed transmission. the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle the transmission is in PARK Ú page 185.
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode. must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 15 miles (24 km) for 6–speed CAUTION!
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery
is discharged, Ú page 323. transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for 8–speed  Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
transmission, tow with the rear wheels OFF the the remaining wheels are on the ground).
CAUTION! ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle Internal damage to the transmission or
on a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel
 Do not use sling type equipment when towing. the rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a lift is used when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur. suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front
wheels in the straight position) with rear wheels  Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
 When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
raised and the front wheels ON the ground. requirements can cause severe transmission
do not attach to front or rear suspension
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
components. Damage to your vehicle may
CAUTION! improper towing is not covered under the New
result from improper towing.
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe engine and/or
TWO-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS transmission damage. Damage from improper
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with towing is not covered under the New Vehicle
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. Limited Warranty.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — NOTE:

For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
I F EQUIPPED both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of (EARS)
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow damage to the vehicle.
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
hooks.
WARNING! Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
 Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 290.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
 Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, This vehicle is equipped with an event data
causing serious injury. recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
CAUTION! or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 291.
Emergency Tow Hooks Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
a vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow
hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. 7
You could damage your vehicle.
328
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
 Check engine oil level.
ENGINE oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
 Check windshield washer fluid level.
by someone other than an authorized dealer, the
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil message can be reset by referring to the steps  Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
change indicator system. The oil change indicator described under Instrument Cluster Display unusual wear or damage. Rotate at the first sign
system will remind you that it is time to take your Ú page 81. of irregular wear.
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Under no circumstances should oil change  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km), brake master cylinder, power steering and auto-
change indicator message will illuminate. This 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, matic transmission (6-speed only), and fill as
means that service is required for your vehicle. whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine needed.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient  Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
customers.
temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
MAINTENANCE P LAN – GASOLINE ENGINE

Refer to the maintenance plan on the following pages for required maintenance. More frequent maintenance may be needed in severe conditions, such as dusty
areas and very short trip driving. In some extreme conditions, additional maintenance not specified in the maintenance schedule may be required.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

 Change oil and filter.
 Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect exhaust system.
 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace the engine air cleaner filter, if necessary.
 Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick.
 Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
 Inspect front end, and lubricate — If equipped with serviceable fittings.
 Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty condi-
tions. 8
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for police, X X X X X X X
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing, change axle fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 mi (19,000 km).
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. 1 X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
X X
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Change the automatic transmission fluid (AS66RC Transmission
X X X
Only).
Change the automatic transmission fluid and sump filter
X X
(AS66RC Transmission Only).
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any of the following:
X X X X X
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
8
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE At Each Oil Change OIL C HANGE I NDICATOR SYSTEM —
 Change the engine oil filter. DIESEL E NGINE
CAUTION!  Inspect the exhaust system.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
Failure to perform the required maintenance  Check the tire inflation pressures and look for indicator system. This system will alert you when it
items may result in damage to the vehicle. unusual wear or damage. Rotate at the first sign is time to change your engine oil by displaying the
of irregular wear. words “Oil Change Due” in your instrument cluster
Required Maintenance Intervals  Inspect engine air cleaner filter. Replace the display. The engine oil change indicator system is
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following engine air cleaner filter, if necessary. duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
pages for the required maintenance intervals. change interval may fluctuate depending on your
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
More frequent maintenance may be needed in personal driving style. Failure to change the engine
 Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps. oil per the maintenance schedule can result in
severe conditions, such as dusty areas and very
short trip driving. In some extreme conditions,  Inspect front end, and lubricate — If equipped internal engine damage.
additional maintenance not specified in the with serviceable fittings. An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
maintenance schedule may be required.  Inspect and replace the Evaporative System indicator message after completing the scheduled
At Each Stop For Fuel Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement may oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
be more frequent if vehicle is operated in by someone other than an authorized dealer, the
Check the engine oil level at least 30 minutes after extreme dusty conditions. message can be reset by referring to the steps
a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil described under Instrument Cluster Display
level while the vehicle is on level ground will Inspection and service should also be performed
anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Ú page 81.
improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add
oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or Retain all receipts. Replace the engine oil and oil filter every
MIN mark. NOTE: 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months, or
sooner if prompted by the oil change indicator
Once A Month Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door
system. Under no circumstances should oil change
hinge pivot joints twice a year to prevent
 Inspect the batteries, and clean and tighten the intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or
premature wear.
terminals as required. 12 months, whichever comes first.
 Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and automatic transmis-
sion, and add as needed.
NOTE: If models configured with optional B20 capability PERFORM SERVICE INDICATOR —
 Under no circumstances should oil change inter- are operated with greater than 5% levels of
biodiesel, the oil change interval must not exceed D IESEL E NGINE
vals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or
12 months or 500 hours, whichever comes first. 12,500 miles (20,000 km) or 400 hours, Your vehicle will require emissions maintenance at
whichever comes first under any circumstances. a set interval. To help remind you when this
 It is recommended that every 3,000 miles
See the Fuel Requirements section for more maintenance is due, the instrument cluster will
(4,800 km), check the engine oil level at least information regarding operation with biodiesel display “Perform Service”. When the “Perform
30 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut blend (B6-B20) fuel meeting ASTM specification Service” message is displayed on the instrument
off. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on D-7467. cluster it is necessary to have the emissions
level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil
maintenance performed. Emissions maintenance
level reading. Add oil only when the level is at or
may include replacing the Closed Crankcase
below the ADD or MIN mark.
Ventilation (CCV) filter element. The procedure for
 Severe service (high ambient temperature, clearing and resetting the “Perform Service”
short trips, heavy loading, trailer towing, indicator message is located in the appropriate
off-road, or law enforcement use) may reduce Service Information.
oil change intervals.
8
MAINTENANCE P LAN — D IESEL ENGINE

Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
7,500
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first):
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Change engine oil every 15,000 miles

(24,000 km) or 12 months or 500
hours or sooner if prompted by the oil X X X X X X X X X X
change indicator system, whichever
comes first.1
Additional Inspections
Check the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
tank, refill if necessary.
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front end, and lubricate — If
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
equipped with serviceable fittings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter,
X X X X X X X X X X
replace if necessary. 2
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
7,500
comes first):
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod

ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks
and all parts for damage, wear, X X X X X X X X X X
improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings. X X X X X X
Inspect and adjust parking brake. X X X X X X
Inspect drive belt; replace as
X X X X X X
necessary.
Inspect wheel bearings. X X X X X 8
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 mi (19,000 km).
Replace the engine fuel filter. X X X X X X X X X X
Replace the chassis mounted fuel
X X X X X X X X X X
filter.
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
7,500
comes first):
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Inspect the front and rear axle

surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If
X X X X X X
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing
change the axle fluid.
Inspect the transfer case fluid (4x4),
change for any of the following: police, X X X X X
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change the transfer case fluid (4x4). X X
Change automatic transmission fluid
X X X X X
(AS69RC transmission only).
Change the automatic transmission
fluid and sump filter (AS69RC X X
transmission only).
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter(s) (AS69RC transmission X
only).
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
7,500
comes first):
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Replace Crankcase Ventilation Filter

X X
(CCV).
Flush and replace power steering fluid. X
Flush and replace engine coolant. *** X
1. Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months or 500 Hours, whichever comes first.
2. Under no circumstances should the engine air cleaner filter exceed 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months, whichever comes first.
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. 8
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
CAUTION!
***The manufacturer highly recommends that all cooling system service, maintenance, and repairs be performed by an authorized dealer.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Battery
6.7L DIESEL E NGINE
1 — Battery 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap

2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 8 — Battery
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Engine Oil Dipstick 11 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
6 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 12 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
CHECKING OIL L EVEL ADDING W ASHER FLUID MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY

To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the should be checked for fluid level at regular battery. You will never have to add water, and
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer periodic maintenance is not required.
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When NOTE:
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some Replacement batteries should both be of equal
is shut off. washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and capacity to prevent damage to the vehicle's
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade charging system.
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. performance.
There are four possible dipstick types: To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer WARNING!
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture  Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
 Crosshatched zone.
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
 Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. your climate. This rating information can be found battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
 Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low on most washer fluid containers. clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
range. WARNING! on skin, flush the area immediately with large
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the Commercially available windshield washer amounts of water Ú page 320.
MIN and the MAX ends of the range. solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
 Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
NOTE: burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch working around the washer solution.
use a booster battery or any other booster
markings on the dipstick. source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at After the engine has warmed up, operate the Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil defroster for a few minutes to reduce the other.
level to the high end of the range marking. possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the
 Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
cold windshield. Windshield washer solution used
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
CAUTION! with water as directed on the container, aids
hands after handling.
cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to avoid
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
CAUTION! VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ENGINE OIL

 It is essential when replacing the cables on An authorized dealer has the qualified service Engine Oil Selection— Gasoline Engine
the battery that the positive cable is attached personnel, special tools, and equipment to Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
to the positive post and the negative cable is perform all service operations in an expert Ú page 404.
attached to the negative post. Battery posts manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your NOTE:
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before Hemi engines (6.4L) at times can tick right after
are identified on the battery case. Cable
attempting any procedure yourself. startup and then quiet down after approximately
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
30 seconds. This is normal and will not harm the
and free of corrosion. NOTE: engine. This characteristic can be caused by short
 If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is Intentional tampering with emissions control drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is started
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery systems may void your warranty and could result in then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon
cables before connecting the charger to the civil penalties being assessed against you. restarting, you may experience a ticking sound.
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for
WARNING!
starting voltage. an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended
You can be badly injured working on or around a oil changes or extended idling. If the engine
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which continues to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator
PRESSURE WASHING you have the knowledge and the proper Light (MIL) comes on, see the nearest authorized
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high equipment. If you have any doubt about your dealer.
pressure washer is not recommended. ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle Engine Oil Selection — Diesel Engine
to a competent mechanic. 8
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
CAUTION!
Ú page 404.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Synthetic Engine Oils varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
Approved Engine Oil certified filters should be used.
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils,
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified only use synthetic API approved engine oils. ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
trademark oils. For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 329.
correct API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity
The API Starburst trademark certifies grade numbers should not be used. NOTE:
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils. Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
Materials Added To Engine Oil maintenance interval if applicable.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 the addition of any additives (other than leak WARNING!
and 5W-40 engine oil. detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
engineered product and its performance may be
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
For diesel engines, oils with a high ash content may impaired by supplemental additives.
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
produce damaging deposits on cylinder head Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
valves and/or after-treatment system damage. A Filters such removal is necessary for repair or mainte-
maximum sulfated ash content of 1.00 mass % is nance. Make sure that no one is near the engine
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
recommended for all oil used in the engine. compartment before starting the vehicle with
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
The same oil change interval is to be followed for the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
synthetic oil as for petroleum-based oil. Also, removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
problem to the environment. Contact an
synthetic oil must meet the same performance personal injury.
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
specifications as petroleum oil. agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
CAUTION!
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
ENGINE OIL FILTER filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new should be used to ensure most efficient service.
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle filter at every engine oil change. Mopar® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality
Limited Warranty. Engine Oil Filter Selection filter and are recommended.
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And 2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access 3. Tighten the fasteners (six) on the engine air
Replacement— Gasoline Engine the engine air cleaner filter. cleaner filter assembly.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or 3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris
you should change your engine air cleaner filter.
Replacement — Diesel Engine
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
NOTE:
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris
When replacing the engine air cleaner filter on
you should change your engine air cleaner filter.
vehicles equipped with a 6.4L gasoline engine,
replace with a dry (non-oiled) filter only. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal 1. Remove the screws from the engine air
cleaner filter cover.
1. With suitable tool fully loosen (six) fasteners
on engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly

1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation 8

NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
Engine Air Cleaner Filter filter. 1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Fasteners 1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the 2 — Screws
2 — Air Hose Clamp housing assembly with the engine air cleaner
3 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover filter inspection surface facing downward. 2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the engine air cleaner filter.
the housing assembly.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
housing assembly. R-134a — If Equipped
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
dealer at the start of each warm season. This rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly
service should include cleaning of the condenser substance. The manufacturer recommends that
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension air conditioning service be performed by an
should also be checked at this time. authorized dealer or other service facilities using
recovery and recycling equipment.
WARNING! NOTE:
 Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri- Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
cants approved by the manufacturer for your compressor oil and refrigerants.
air conditioning system. Some unapproved Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
Engine Air Cleaner Filter refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
R-1234yf — If Equipped
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter lubricants can cause the system to fail, R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydroflu-
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Infor- oroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
mation Book, for further warranty information. Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation  The air conditioning system contains refrig-
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
NOTE: erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
recommends that air conditioning service be
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is personal injury or damage to the system,
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery
present before replacing the engine air cleaner adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
and recycling equipment.
filter. to be disconnected should be done by an expe-
rienced technician. NOTE:
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner compressor oil, and refrigerants.
filter inspection surface facing downward. CAUTION!
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto Do not use chemical flushes in your air condition-
the housing assembly locating tabs. ing system as the chemicals can damage your air
3. Tighten the (6) screws to secure the engine air conditioning components. Such damage is not
cleaner filter cover to the housing assembly. covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement

For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 329.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter
removed and the blower operating, the blower
can contact hands and may propel dirt and
debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment Glove Compartment
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet 1 — Glove Compartment Door 1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
behind the glove compartment. Perform the 2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether 2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
following procedure to replace the filter: 3 — Glove Compartment Door
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all 3. There are travel stops on both sides of the
contents. glove compartment. Push inward on right side 4. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the
2. With the glove compartment door open, of the glove compartment travel stop to finger tabs on each end of the filter cover.
remove the glove compartment tension tether disengage the stop. Then pull the right of the
and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the glove compartment outward (away from the
face of the glove compartment door. Lift the hinge) to disengaging the right side of the 8
clip out of glove compartment door and compartment from the hinge. Continue by
release into dash panel. removing the left side from the hinge by slightly
lowering the compartment while pulling
outward until it is completely disengaged from
the hinge.
Filter Cover
the filter cover, press on each end until you NOTE:

hear an audible click. Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
CAUTION! 9. Reattach the glove compartment tension
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to tether by inserting the tether clip in the glove
indicate airflow direction through the filter. compartment and sliding the clip away from
Failure to properly install the filter will result in the face of the glove compartment door.
the need to replace it more often.
ACCESSORY D RIVE BELT INSPECTION
7. Reinstall the glove compartment on the
Filter Cover Removal WARNING!
hinges.
1 — Finger Tabs 8. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall  Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
the glove compartment past the travel stops by belt with vehicle running.
5. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight pushing in on the glove compartment sides.  When working near the radiator cooling fan,
out of the housing. disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be
injured by the moving fan blades.
 You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equip-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
Glove Compartment
Cabin Air Filter When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from
6. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the 2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a
filter pointing toward the floor. When installing 3 — Glove Compartment Door reason to replace belt. However, cracks running
along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt  Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble If water is detected in the water separator while the
with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation) engine is running, or while the ignition switch is in
Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, Some conditions can be caused by a faulty the ON position, the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light”
frayed cords or severe glazing. component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys will illuminate and an audible chime will be heard
should be carefully inspected for damage and five times. At this point you should stop the engine
proper alignment. and drain the water from both of the filters.
Belt replacement on some models requires the CAUTION!
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer. If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” remains on,
DO NOT START the engine before you drain water
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR from the fuel filters to avoid engine damage.
FILTER
There are two fuel filter assemblies. One is located If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” comes on and
on the driver's side of the engine. The best access a single chime is heard while you are driving, or
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt) to this water drain valve is from under the hood. with the ignition switch in the ON position, there
The second one is on the under body, located in may be a problem with your water separator wiring
Conditions that would require replacement: or sensor. See an authorized dealer for service.
front of the rear axle above the drive shaft on
 Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated pick-up models. The second filter location is on the Upon proper draining of the water from both fuel
from belt body) frame behind the front axle. The best access to this filters, the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will
water drain valve is from under the vehicle. remain illuminated for approximately 10 seconds.
 Rib or belt wear
If the water was drained while the engine was
8
 Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two
CAUTION! running, the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” may
ribs)
remain on for approximately three minutes.
 Belt slips  Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter
when the engine is running. NOTE:
 “Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids
correct position on pulley)  Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate discarded, can present a problem to the envi-
 Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem
container. ronment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
before new belt is installed)
station, or government agency for advice on recy- The sensor drain should not be overtightened
cling programs and for where used fluids and during normal service operations to avoid internal
filters can be properly disposed of in your area. damage and future fuel leaks. The drain should be
Drain the fuel/water separator filters when the closed and secured without the use of tools.
“Water In Fuel Indicator Light” is ON. Within If more than a couple ounces/milliliters of fuel
10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the engine have been drained, follow the directions
mounted filter drain valve (located on the side of Ú page 350
the filter assembly) counterclockwise a quarter
turn, and turn the under body mounted filter drain ENGINE MOUNTED FUEL F ILTER
valve (located on the bottom of the filter assembly) REPLACEMENT
counterclockwise 1 full turn. Then turn the ignition Engine Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly
switch to the ON position, and allow any NOTE:
accumulated water to drain. Leave the drain valve  Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manu- 1 — Drain Valve
open until all water and contaminants have been facturer's filtration and water separating
removed. When clean fuel is visible, close the drain requirements can severely impact fuel system
valve following these guidelines: life and reliability. CAUTION!
1. Rotate the drain clockwise to close until you  The engine mounted filter housing is equipped  Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
feel resistance from the internal seal. with a No-Filter-No-Run (NFNR) feature. Engine surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
2. Continue turning the drain half of a turn to will not run if: container.
properly compress the seal.  No filter is installed.  Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
NOTE:  Inferior/Non-approved filter is used. Use of new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
Over-compression of the seal due to overtightening OEM filter is required to ensure vehicle will could be introduced into the fuel filter during
of the drain will damage the seal, cause a leak, and run. this action. It is best to install the filter dry and
require the entire sensor to be replaced. allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel
system.
3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
1. Ensure engine is turned off. 11. Install lid onto housing and tighten to 22.5 ft lb
(30.5 N.m). Do not overtighten the lid. CAUTION!
2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose.
12. Prime the engine, then start the engine and  Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
3. Open the water drain valve a quarter turn
confirm there are no leaks Ú page 350. surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
counterclockwise and completely drain fuel
container.
and water into the approved container.
4. Close the water drain valve.
UNDERBODY MOUNTED FUEL FILTER  Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench.

REPLACEMENT new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
could be introduced into the fuel filter during
Rotate counterclockwise for removal. Remove NOTE: this action. It is best to install the filter dry and
used o-ring and discard it.  Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manu- allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the facturer's filtration and water separating system.
housing and dispose of according to your local requirements can severely impact fuel system
regulations. life and reliability. 1. Ensure engine is turned off.
7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and  The underbody mounted filter housing will
2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose.
housing. cause the engine not to run if:
3. Open the water drain valve one full turn
8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on the a. No filter is installed. counterclockwise and completely drain fuel
filter housing and lubricate with clean engine
and water into the approved container.
oil.
4. Close the water drain valve.
9. Remove new filter cartridge from plastic bag
and install into housing. 5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench. 8
Rotate counterclockwise for removal. Remove
NOTE: used o-ring and discard it.
Do not remove cartridge from bag until you reach
this step in order to keep cartridge clean. 6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the
housing and dispose of according to your local
10. Push down on the cartridge to ensure it is
regulations.
properly seated. Do not pre-fill the filter
housing with fuel. 7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and
housing.
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly
1 — Drain Valve
8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on the 3. Start the engine using the “Normal Starting” NOTE:
filter housing and lubricate with clean engine procedure Ú page 108.  A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel, meeting
oil. 4. Once the engine starts, allow the engine to idle ASTM specification D-975 may be used with
for a minimum of 30 seconds. your Cummins® diesel engine.
NOTE:
Water In Fuel (WIF) sensor is re-usable. Service kit  A maximum blend of 20% biodiesel, meeting
comes with new o-ring for filter canister and WIF CAUTION! ASTM specification D-7467 may be used with
sensor. your Cummins® diesel engine.
Do not engage the starter motor for more than
 Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT 15 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes
negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to sepa-
between the cranking intervals.
OF FUEL rate water from the fuel, resulting in high pres-
sure fuel system corrosion or damage.
WARNING! NOTE:
 Ethanol blends are not recommended or
The engine may run rough until the air is forced
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with approved for use with your Cummins® diesel
from all the fuel lines.
the engine running. Engine operation causes engine.
high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can WARNING!  In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
cause serious injury or death. tives are not necessary for the proper operation
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
of your Cummins® diesel engine.
agent. They can be unstable under certain
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank, conditions and be hazardous or explosive when I NTERVENTION REGENERATION
approximately 2 to 5 gal (8L to 19L). mixed with diesel fuel.
STRATEGY — M ESSAGE PROCESS FLOW
2. Three priming cycles must be completed. Turn
ignition to the RUN position and wait approxi- The Cummins® diesel engine meets all
mately 30 seconds. This will activate the in tank CAUTION! Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Heavy Duty
fuel pump. Turn the ignition switch to the off Diesel Engine Emissions Standards, resulting in
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline,
position, and leave off for at least 30 seconds. one of the lowest emitting diesel engines ever
the use of these fuels can cause damage to the
Repeat this procedure three times before produced.
fuel system.
cranking the engine. To achieve these emissions standards, your
vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine
and exhaust system. The engine and exhaust
after-treatment system work together to achieve
the EPA Heavy Duty Diesel Engine Emissions protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
Standards. These systems are seamlessly WARNING! application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
integrated into your vehicle and managed by the A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
Cummins® Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The over materials that can burn. Such materials after lubricating excess, oil and grease should be
PCM manages engine combustion to allow the might be grass or leaves coming into contact removed. Particular attention should also be given
exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn with your exhaust system. Do not park or oper- to hood latching components to ensure proper
Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input or ate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust sys- function. When performing other underhood
interaction on your part. tem can contact anything that can burn. services, the hood latch, release mechanism and
If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is driven safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
on low engine speed drive cycles for more than two The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
hours, the system will automatically enter an
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID (DEF) twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
emissions operating mode that will increase the DEF sometimes known simply by the name of its Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
engine idle speed to 1,050 RPM. While in this active component, UREA—is a key component of such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
mode, which is designed to help maintain the Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) systems, which into the lock cylinder.
Diesel Particulate Filter, the engine idle speed will help diesel vehicles meet stringent emission
return to normal when the brake pedal is applied. regulations. DEF is a liquid reducing agent that WINDSHIELD WIPER B LADES
A small change in engine tone or a slight change in reacts with engine exhaust in the presence of a Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
engine performance while accelerating may also catalyst to convert smog-forming nitrogen oxides windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
be noticeable at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h). (NOx) into harmless nitrogen and water vapor and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
This operating mode may last for up to an hour of Ú page 404. accumulations of salt or road film.
idle time, or around 20 minutes of driving time. You can receive assistance in locating DEF by 8
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert you contacting an authorized dealer. periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
to additional maintenance required on your truck blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
or engine Ú page 81. BODY LUBRICATION wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and contact with petroleum products such as engine
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with oil, gasoline, etc.
a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
NOTE: Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending arm, flip up the locking tab.
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor CAUTION!
performance of blades may be present with chat-
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
against the glass without the wiper blade in
these conditions are present, clean the wiper
place or the glass may be damaged.
blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
performance problems are experienced. This of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
inspection should include the following points: up position.
 Wear or uneven edges
 Foreign material Wiper Locking Assembly
 Hardening or cracking
1 — Wiper
 Deformation or fatigue 2 — Locking Tab
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do
not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is
damaged.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade

1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from 4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the
the arm and with one finger, push the release wiper arm until it is latched (engagement will
tab toward the wiper arm. be accompanied by an audible click). Fold
down the latch release tab and snap it into its
locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
1 — Wiper If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
2 — Locking Tab system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
Wiper Disengaging 3 — Wiper Arm J Hook inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
1 — Locking Tab
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass. technician inspect the complete exhaust system
2 — Wiper and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
3 — Release Tab deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
Installing The Front Wipers
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base to seep into the passenger compartment. In 8
wiper arm is in the full up position.
of the wiper arm. addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab change. Replace as required.
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the open.
wiper arm with one hand and separating the
wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other 3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper
hand (move the wiper blade down toward the assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm
base of the wiper arm and away from the J through the opening in the wiper blade under
hook in the end of the wiper arm). the locking tab.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter

WARNING! CAUTION! damage:
 Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain  Damage to the catalytic converter can result if  Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and your vehicle is not kept in proper operating sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon- condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
 Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
scious and can eventually poison you particularly involving engine misfire or other
towing the vehicle.
Ú page 309. apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-  Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
 A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you nents disconnected or removed, such as when
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
park over materials that can burn. Such mate- diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
could cause the converter to overheat,
rials might be grass or leaves coming into during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
resulting in possible damage to the converter
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park ating conditions.
and vehicle.
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can COOLING SYSTEM
burn. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it WARNING!
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
CAUTION! ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent  You or others can be badly burned by hot
possible catalyst damage. engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
 The catalytic converter requires the use of radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will NOTE: under the hood, do not open the hood until the
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an Intentional tampering with emissions control radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
emissions control device and may seriously systems can result in civil penalties being cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
reduce engine performance and cause assessed against you. ator or coolant bottle is hot.
serious damage to the engine. In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor  Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
(Continued) from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off raised. The fan starts automatically and may
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a start at any time, whether the engine is
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should running or not.
be obtained immediately. (Continued)
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
WARNING! coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
NOTE: rized dealer as soon as possible.
 When working near the radiator cooling fan,
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature coolant products. Do not use additional rust
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
controlled and can start at any time the igni- inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not
coolant is needed to be added to the system
tion is in the ON mode. be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
please contact an authorized dealer.
and may plug the radiator.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
Engine Coolant Checks contains visible sediment, have an authorized  This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is MS.90032). recommended.
dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 329.  Some vehicles require special tools to add
drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
Check the front of the A/C condenser or radiator Selection Of Coolant properly could lead to severe internal engine
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, For further information Ú page 404. damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose NOTE: the system please contact an authorized dealer.
vertically down the face of the A/C condenser or
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than Adding Coolant
the back of the radiator core.
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle engine coolant, may result in engine damage coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that 8
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and engine coolant is different and should not be coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat- To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is period, it is important that you use the same engine
introduced into the cooling system in an emer- coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
gency, the cooling system will need to be throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using  Some vehicles require special tools to add
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems WARNING!
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer properly could lead to severe internal engine  Do not open a hot engine cooling system.
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
engine coolant: the system, please contact a local authorized the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
 We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/ dealer. remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)  Mixing engine coolant types is not recom- Heat causes pressure to build up in the
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the mended and can result in cooling system cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in do not remove the pressure cap while the
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain, system is hot or under pressure.
 Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to  Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032 MS.90032) as soon as possible. specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations Cooling System Pressure Cap engine damage may result.
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that Disposal Of Used Coolant
an authorized dealer for assistance.
engine coolant will return to the radiator from the Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
 Use only high purity water such as distilled or coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank (if a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
deionized water when mixing the water/engine equipped). Check with your local authorities to determine the
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there disposal rules for your community. To prevent
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection is any accumulation of foreign material on the ingestion by animals or children, do not store
in the engine cooling system. sealing surfaces. ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
NOTE: or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground,
 It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the clean up any ground spills immediately. If ingested
proper level of protection against freezing by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
according to the temperatures occurring in the immediately.
area where the vehicle is operated.
Checking Coolant Level — 6.4L Engine  Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. CHARGE A IR C OOLER — I NTER-C OOLER
The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant  Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
The charge air cooler is positioned below the
bottle should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
radiator and the air conditioner condenser. Air
range on the bottle when the engine is cold. coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
enters the engine through the air cleaner and
contents of the coolant expansion bottle must
The radiator normally remains completely full, so passes through the turbocharger, where it is
also be protected against freezing.
there is no need to remove the cap unless pressurized. This pressurized air rapidly reaches
checking for coolant freeze point or replacing  If frequent engine coolant additions are high temperature. The air is then directed through
engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service required, the cooling system should be pressure a hose to the charge air cooler and through
attendant of this. As long as the engine operating tested for leaks. another hose to the intake manifold of the engine.
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle  Maintain engine coolant concentration at a The air entering the engine has been cooled by
need only be checked once a month. When minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to about 50° to 100°F (10° to 38°C). This cooling
additional engine coolant is needed to maintain MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro- process enables more efficient burning of fuel
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant sion protection of your engine which contains resulting in fewer emissions.
bottle. Do not overfill. aluminum components. To guarantee optimum performance of the system,
Cooling System Notes  Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle keep the surfaces of the charge air cooler,
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. condenser and radiator clean and free of debris.
NOTE:
Periodically check the hoses leading to and from
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-  Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
the charge air cooler for cracks or loose clamps
meters of operation, you may observe vapor vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
resulting in loss of pressure and reduced engine
coming from the front of the engine compartment. the front of the condenser clean.
performance.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,  Do not change the thermostat for Summer or 8
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
enter the radiator. engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
If an examination of your engine compartment and increased emissions.
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING! WARNING!

In order to ensure brake system performance, all  Use only manufacturer's recommended brake  Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contam-
brake system components should be inspected fluid Ú page 407. Using the wrong type of inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
periodically Ú page 329. brake fluid can severely damage your brake could be damaged, causing partial or
system and/or impair its performance. The complete brake failure. This could result in a
WARNING! proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is collision.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and also identified on the original factory installed
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
 To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that Special Additives
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You has been in a tightly closed container. Keep The manufacturer strongly recommends against
would not have your full braking capacity in an the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at using any special additives in the transmission.
emergency. all times. Brake fluid in an open container Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a engineered product and its performance may be
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This only exception to this policy is the use of special
checked when performing under the hood service
could result in a collision. dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in 6-speed
or immediately if the Brake System Warning Light
indicates system failure.  Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
transmissions. Avoid using transmission sealers as
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, they may adversely affect seals.
If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the
designated marks on the side of the reservoir of causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
CAUTION!
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top
of the master cylinder area before removing cap. surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its Do not use chemical flushes in your
contact with these surfaces. transmission as the chemicals can damage your
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to
(Continued) transmission components. Such damage is not
fall as the brake linings wear. However, an
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a system check should be conducted.
For further information Ú page 407.
Fluid Level Check — 8-Speed Transmission Use the following procedure to check the reference holes on the dipstick at normal
transmission fluid level properly: operating temperature. If the fluid level is low,
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
1. Monitor the transmission temperature using add fluid through the dipstick tube to bring it to
require adjustment under normal operating
the instrument cluster display, and operate the proper level. Do not overfill. Use ONLY the
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
the vehicle as required to reach the normal specified fluid Ú page 407. After adding any
required, therefore the transmission has no
operating temperature. If the transmission is quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait a
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
not functioning properly, or the vehicle cannot minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
be driven, see the NOTE and CAUTION below drain into the transmission before rechecking
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission the fluid level.
about checking the fluid level at colder
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
temperatures. NOTE:
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper 2. Park the vehicle on level ground. If it is necessary to check the transmission below
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. the operating temperature, the fluid level should
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at
be between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the
least 60 seconds, and leave the engine
CAUTION! dipstick with the fluid at 60-70°F / 16-21°C. Only
running for the rest of this procedure.
use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an 4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the reference when setting the fluid level after a trans-
authorized dealer immediately. Severe brake pedal. mission service or fluid change. Re-check the fluid
transmission damage may occur. An authorized 5. Place the gear selector momentarily into each level, and adjust as required, once the trans-
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid gear position (allowing time for the mission reaches normal operating temperature.
level accurately. transmission to fully engage in each position),
ending with the transmission in PARK. CAUTION! 8
Fluid Level Check — 6-Speed Transmission 6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it
It is best to check the fluid level when the it until seated. may not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid
transmission is at normal operating temperature until the temperature is elevated enough to
7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid
(158-176°F / 70-80°C). This normally occurs produce an accurate reading. Run the engine at
level on both sides. The fluid level reading is
after at least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid.
only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on
operating temperature the fluid cannot be held both sides of the dipstick. Note that the holes
comfortably between the fingertips. You can read in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the actual 8. Reinsert the dipstick. Check for leaks. Release
the transmission sump temperature in the level is at or above the hole. The fluid level the parking brake.
instrument cluster screen Ú page 81. should be between the “HOT” (upper)
NOTE: Fluid And Filter Changes — 6-Speed REAR AXLE AND 4X4 FRONT DRIVING
If it is necessary to check the transmission below Transmission
the operating temperature, the fluid level should
AXLE FLUID L EVEL
be between the two COLD (lower) holes on the For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 329.
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are
dipstick with the fluid at 68-86°F / 20-30°C. Only In addition, change the fluid and filters if the fluid not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other
use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly
reference when setting the fluid level after a trans- transmission is disassembled for any reason. should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is
mission service or fluid change. Re-check the fluid Selection Of Lubricant suspected inspect the fluid level. This inspection
level, and adjust as required, once the trans- should be made with the vehicle in a level position.
mission reaches normal operating temperature. It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and When checking the fluid level, the vehicle should
CAUTION! life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified be in a level position. The fluid level at room
transmission fluid Ú page 407. It is important to temperature should be as follows:
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level 3500 Front Axle: ¼ inch ± ¼ inch (6.4 mm ±
may not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes 6.4 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
until the temperature is elevated enough to should be used in any transmission; only the
produce an accurate reading. Run the engine at 3500 Rear Axle: ¼ inch ± ¼ inch (6.4 mm ±
approved lubricant should be used. 6.4 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid.
CAUTION! 4500/5500 Front Axle: ¼ inch +/- ¼ inch (6.4 mm
± 6.4 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
Fluid And Filter Changes — 8-Speed Using a transmission fluid other than the
Transmission manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause 4500/5500 Rear Axle: 1/8 inch +/- 1/8 inch
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or (3.2 mm +/- 3.2 mm) below the bottom of the fill
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid hole.
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory torque converter shudder, and (for 6-speed
lubrication for the life of the vehicle. transmissions) will require more frequent fluid
and filter changes Ú page 407.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Drain And Refill Limited-Slip Differentials DO REQUIRE limited slip Noise Regulations. These vehicles can be
oil additive (friction modifiers). identified by the Noise Emission Control Label
On 4500/5500 vehicles, remove the lower bolt to
NOTE: located in the operator's compartment.
drain the axle fluid.
Slight noise and mild shuddering may be evident
while turning a vehicle with limited slip differential
on concrete or dry pavement. These conditions
should be considered normal operation of the
limited slip differential.
TRANSFER C ASE
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the
filler plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom
edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level Required Maintenance For Noise Control
4500/5500 Rear Axle Plugs
position. Systems
1 — 4500/5500 Rear Axle Fluid Fill Plug Drain And Refill The following maintenance services must be
2 — 4500/5500 Rear Axle Fluid Drain Plug performed every six months or 7,500 miles
(12,000 km) whichever comes first, to ensure
Selection Of Lubricant
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 329. proper operation of the noise control systems. In
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid addition, inspection and service should be 8
Lubricant Selection Ú page 407. performed anytime a malfunction is observed or
For further information Ú page 407. suspected. Proper maintenance of the entire
NOISE CONTROL S YSTEM REQUIRED vehicle will help the effectiveness of the noise
NOTE:
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will MAINTENANCE & WARRANTY control systems.
result in corrosion and possible failure of differ- All vehicles built over 10,000 lb (4,535 kg) Gross
ential components. Operation of the vehicle in Vehicle Weight Rating and manufactured for sale
water, as may be encountered in some off-highway and use in the United States are required to
types of service, will require draining and refilling comply with the Federal Government's Exterior
the axle to avoid damage.
Exhaust System Tampering With Noise Control System ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Inspect the entire exhaust system for leaks and Prohibited  Removal or rendering inoperative the fan clutch.
damaged parts. Devices such as hangers, clamps, Federal law prohibits the following acts or the  Removal of the fan shroud.
and U-bolts should be tight and in good condition. causing thereof: (1) the removal or rendering
Damaged components, burned or blown out Noise Emission Warranty
inoperative by any person, other than for purposes
mufflers, burned or rusted out exhaust pipes of maintenance, repair, or replacement, of any The manufacturer warrants that this vehicle as
should be replaced according to the procedures device or element of design incorporated into any manufactured by the manufacturer, was designed,
and specifications outlined in the appropriate new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to built and equipped to conform at the time it left the
service manual. its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or manufacturer's control with all applicable US EPA
Air Cleaner Assembly while it is in use, or (2) the use of the vehicle after Noise Control Regulations.
Inspect air cleaner housing for proper assembly such device or element of design has been This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built
and fit. Make certain that the air cleaner is properly removed or rendered inoperative by any person. and equipped by the manufacturer, and is not
positioned and that the cover is tight. Check all Among those acts presumed to constitute limited to any particular part, component or system
hoses leading to the air cleaner for tightness. The tampering are the acts listed below. of the vehicle manufactured by the manufacturer.
air filter element must also be clean and serviced Defects in design, assembly or in any part,
AIR CLEANER
according to the instructions outlined in the component or system of the vehicle as
Scheduled Maintenance section of this manual.  Removal of the air cleaner. manufactured by the manufacturer, which, at the
 Removal of the air cleaner filter element from time it left the manufacturer's control, caused
the air cleaner housing. noise emissions to exceed Federal standards, are
covered by this warranty for the life of the vehicle.
 Removal of the air ducting.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
 Removal or rendering inoperative exhaust
system components including the muffler or tail-
pipe.
Maintenance Log and Service Chart (Diesel Engines)

Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log — Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to the mileage at which service was
performed.
MILES 7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500 45,000 52,500 60,000
KILOMETERS 12,000 24,000 36,000 48,000 60,000 72,000 84,000 96,000
Exhaust system-inspect
Air cleaner assembly-inspect
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
MILES 67,500 75,000 82,500 90,000 97,500 105,000 112,500 120,000

KILOMETERS 108,000 120,000 132,000 144,000 156,000 168,000 180,000 192,000
Exhaust system-inspect
Air cleaner assembly-inspect
ODOMETER READING 8
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
FUSES The fuses protect electrical systems against Power Distribution Center
excessive current.
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
General Information When a device does not work, you must check the engine compartment near the battery. This center
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/ contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and
WARNING!
melt. circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and
 When replacing a blown fuse, always use an Also, please be aware that using power outlets for component may be stamped on the inside cover,
appropriate replacement fuse with the same extended periods of time with the engine off may otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace result in vehicle battery discharge. stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. the following chart.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical CAUTION!
system overload. If a properly rated fuse
When installing the power distribution center
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
circuit that must be corrected. Never replace a
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
blown fuse with metal wires or any other mate-
do so may allow water to get into the power
rial. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit
distribution center and possibly result in an
breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use
electrical system failure.
proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
 Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the Blade Fuses CAUTION!
ignition is off and that all the other services
1 — Fuse Element If it is necessary to wash the engine
are switched off and/or disengaged.
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse compartment, take care not to directly hit the
 If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an element fuse box or the windshield wiper motors with
authorized dealer. water.
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
 If a general protection fuse for safety systems element (blown fuse)
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission
system) or steering system blows, contact an
authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center Location 8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 60 Amp Yellow – ABS Pump Mtr
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan HI/Lo *
F04 50 Amp Red – 400W Inverter

* If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green – Air Suspension Comp
F06 40 Amp Green – STOM
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F08 20 Amp Blue – NOX Sensor *
F09 40 Amp Green – Diesel / Fuel Heater *
F09 30 Amp Pink – Gas / Brake Vacuum Pump *
F10 40 Amp Green – CBC #2 / Ext Lights
F11 40 Amp Green – Brake SYS MOD ECU& Valves
F12 40 Amp Green – CBC #3 / Pwr Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blwr Mtr
F14 40 Amp Green – CBC #4 / Ext Light
F15 30 Amp Pink – Power Side Step *
F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart-Bar Module *
F17 30 Amp Pink – Winch *
F18 – – Spare
F19 30 Amp Pink – Diesel SCR Feed *
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Mod
F21 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
F22 20 Amp Blue – Gas - ECM *
F22 25 Amp White – Diesel - PCM *

* If Equipped
F23 30 Amp Pink – CBC #1 / Int Light
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Mod
F25 30 Amp Pink – FT Wiper
F26 – – Spare
F27 – – Spare
F28 20 Amp Blue – TRLR Tow B/U
F29 20 Amp Blue – TRLR TOW PARK
F30 30 Amp Pink – TRLR Tow
F31 – – Spare
F32 – – Spare
F33 20 Amp Blue – Trans Control Mod *
F34 30 Amp Pink – VSIM #2 *
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof *
8
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL) *
F37 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Frame / Fuel HTR *
F38 30 Amp Pink – ITBM *
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 10 Amp Red Vented Seats *
F41 – 10 Amp Red Act Grille Shutter / Dam *
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn

* If Equipped
F43 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Strng Wheel *
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F45 – – Spare
F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters Relay Coils *
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red IP Cluster / CSG
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Mod *
F51 – 10 Amp Red IGN Mod / KIN Mod/ RF Hub
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Batt Snsr
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trlr Tow – Lt Turn/Stop
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Non-Memory Adjustable Pedals *
F55 – – Spare
F56 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Vapor Blocking Valve (VBV) *
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM / PCM / Trans PRSR SW
F58 – 10 Amp Red Bed Lighting
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – 10 Amp Red NH3 Sensor / PM Sensor *
F62 – 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch

* If Equipped
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils / CAPS
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors
F65 – – Spare
Sunroof / USB Rear * / Inside Rearview Mirror / Passenger
F66 – 10 Amp Red
Window SW
UCI Port / USB Front / Trailer Gateway Module (360 Camera) /
F67 – 10 Amp Red
Tachograph
F68 – 10 Amp Red AEB RACAM HTR *
F69 – 15 Amp Blue SCR Mod 12 Volt *
F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Mtr/ Fuel Htr RLY
F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amp / Act Noise Cnsl
F72 – – Spare
F73 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump *
F74 – 10 Amp Red Backup Alarm 8
F75 – 10 Amp Red SCR RLY / ATMM*
F76 – 10 Amp Red Electronic Stability Control (ESC) *
F77 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / TCM / FAD MOD / STOM
F78 – 15 Amp Blue ECM / PCM / IRCM / AUX PDC Relay Coil Feed / HRLS
F79 – 15 Amp Blue ID / Clearance Lt
F80 – 10 Amp Red Ovrdh Con / Assist / 911
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trlr tow Rt turn/Stop

* If Equipped
F82 – 10 Amp Red SCCM / Cruise control
F83 – – Spare
F84 – 15 Amp Blue ASBM / HVAC / ICS / Heated Seats SW
F85 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F86 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Susp / ITBM / SCCM / Module Gateway Trailer
F88 – 15 Amp Blue IP Cluster
F89 – – Spare
F90 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet / Batt
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet / Acc
F92 – 10 Amp Red MOD Invertor (Wake Up) / Power Port / USB IP / WCPM*
F93 – – Spare
F94 – 10 Amp Red SBW / TCASE SW / TRL TPM
F95 – 10 Amp Red R CAM / PRKTRNX/ CHMSL Cam / Bld SPT SNR / SVUE CAM *
F96 – 10 Amp Red TRL Cam *
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Front HTD ST PSGR *
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Front HTD ST DRIVER *
HVAC / In-Car Temperature Sensor / CSG MOD / Module
F99 – 10 Amp Red
Gateway Trailer / Tachograph
F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitter Box Feed *

* If Equipped
F101 – 20 Amp Yellow RR HTD ST Right *
F102 – 20 Amp Yellow RR HTD ST Left / Run RLY #3 *
F103 – 10 Amp Red HeadLamp AFLS *
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow UCI Port / USB Rear
BULB R EPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9 8
Dome Lamp 7679
NOTE:
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
High Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 9005LL
Low & High Beam (LED Reflector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Low & High Beam (LED Projector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Turn Signal / Front Position (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 7444NA
Turn Signal (LED Projector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Position (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Turn Signal (LED Reflector Headlamp) 7444NA
Front Side Marker (Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Fog Lamps (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
Front Fog Lamps (LED Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921
Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA
Box Off Tail Lamps – Stop/Turn/Tail/License Plate 1157
Box Off Tail Lamps – Back Up 1156
Replacing Exterior Bulbs 4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel 6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
house splash shield and disengage the bulb turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
BASE QUAD: LOW BEAM HEADLAMP, HIGH access cover by rotating counterclockwise. 7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
BEAM HEADLAMP, FRONT PARK AND TURN —
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
IF EQUIPPED bulb and covers.
Low Beam
High Beam
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable. 2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the
front wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the
cover over the access hole in the front of the Bulb Access Cover
wheel house splash shield. Access to the rear
of the lamp can be gained through this access 5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
hole. connector from the low beam bulb.
CAUTION!
 Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching
8
it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact
other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will
result. Bulb Access Cover
 Always use the correct bulb size and type for
3. Look under the hood and behind the
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type
headlamp to find the high beam bulb access
may overheat and cause damage to the lamp,
cover.
the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.
4. Reach behind the headlamp and disengage
Splash Shield Access Cover
the access cover by rotating counterclockwise.
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness of the lamp can be gained through this access 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the
connector from the high beam bulb. hole. housing.
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without
CAUTION! twisting.
 Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching 7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact bulb and covers.
other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will
result. FOG LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
 Always use the correct bulb size and type for Halogen
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type See below steps to replace:
may overheat and cause damage to the lamp,
the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring. 1. Reach under and behind the front fascia/
bumper to access the back of the front fog
Splash Shield Access Cover lamp housing.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter 4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel 2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp. house splash shield and disengage the side connector from the fog lamp bulb.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing. marker socket by rotating counterclockwise a
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new quarter turn.
bulb and covers.
Outer Park And Turn

1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the
front wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the Fog Lamp Bulb
cover over the access hole in the front of the
Park And Turn Sockets 3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
wheel house splash shield. Access to the rear
turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing. 2. Separate the connector holding the housing  Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
5. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and and wiring harness to the body.  Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop
cover. Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs
CAUTION! and housing.
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it CAB TOP CLEARANCE LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the
lamp.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL)
WITH CARGO LAMP
See below steps to replace: CHMSL Connector Location
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/ 3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn
lens to the body as shown. and remove the socket and bulb from housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it 8
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. Removing Rear Screw From Clearance Lamp
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations

2. Rotate the bulb socket a quarter turn and pull Tire Markings NOTE:
it from the lamp assembly.  P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
 European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
 LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
Tire Markings US design standards. The size designation for
Removing Bulb Socket From Clearance Lamp
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
3. Pull the bulb straight from it's socket and except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
replace. 2 — Size Designation the sidewall preceding the size designation.
3 — Service Description Example: LT235/85R16.
TIRES 4 — Maximum Load  Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 5 — Maximum Pressure sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the 6 — Treadwear, Traction and “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Temperature Grades designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and  High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5
R15 LT.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) 8
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or
 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
EXAMPLE:
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the
B-pillar
front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in
units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
Maximum Inflation Pressure inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into
the sidewall.
8
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading
Tire Placard capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire
inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about
the:
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on 1. Number of people that can be carried in the
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the vehicle.
driver's side door. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
and spare tires.
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar) Loading
Tire And Loading Information Placard The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
Ú page 172.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading,
Tire And Loading Information Placard and trailer towing Ú page 172.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of (4) The resulting figure equals the Metric Example For Load Limit
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined available amount of cargo and luggage For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
weight of occupants and cargo should never
load capacity. For example, if “XXX” there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading the amount of available cargo and luggage load
Information placard. The combined weight of amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue be five 150 lb passengers in your
shown in step 4.
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the vehicle, the amount of available cargo
weight referenced here. and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. NOTE:
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
Steps For Determining Correct Load your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Limit— (5) Determine the combined weight of The following table shows examples on how to
(1) Locate the statement “The combined luggage and cargo being loaded on the calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
weight of occupants and cargo should vehicle. That weight may not safely capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
exceed the available cargo and luggage configurations and number and size of occu-
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
vehicle's placard. load capacity calculated in Step 4.
and may not be accurate for the seating and
(2) Determine the combined weight of (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load carry capacity of your vehicle.
the driver and passengers that will be load from your trailer will be transferred  For the following example, the combined weight
riding in your vehicle. to your vehicle. Consult this manual to of occupants and cargo should never exceed
determine how this reduces the 865 lbs (392 kg).
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
available cargo and luggage load 8
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
capacity of your vehicle.
XXX lbs.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION WARNING!

Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
Tire Pressure  Unequal tire pressures can cause steering abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the problems. You could lose control of your resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. vehicle.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
 Unequal tire pressures from one side of the Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
pressure:
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
 Safety drift to the right or left. uncomfortable ride.
 Fuel Economy  Always drive with each tire inflated to the Tire Inflation Pressures
 Tread Wear recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the side door.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
At least once a month:
WARNING! sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.  Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
 Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
can cause collisions.
NOTE:
make a visual judgment when determining
 Unequal tire pressures from side to side may proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and can cause erratic and unpredictable steering
result in overheating and tire failure. even when they are underinflated.
response.
 Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible 8
 Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion  Unequal tire pressure from side to side may damage.
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
can cause damage that result in tire failure. CAUTION!
Fuel Economy
 Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
resulting in loss of vehicle control. prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
(Continued) valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Tire Repair
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure it meets the following criteria:
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle  The tire has not been driven on when flat.
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold  The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire  The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
sidewall. (6 mm).
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. and additional information.
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi WARNING!
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. High speed driving with your vehicle under immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure maximum load is dangerous. The added strain size and service description (Load Index and
inside a garage, especially in the Winter. on your tires could cause them to fail. You could Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle as well as it is not designed to be reused.
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
Radial Ply Tires rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
condition.
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to WARNING! Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
be too low. capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat
four. Never combine them with other types of tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire
tires.
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is Tread Wear Indicators Life Of Tire
not designed to be reused when driven under Run
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
tires to help you in determining when your tires factors including, but not limited to:
NOTE: should be replaced.  Driving style.
TPMS Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.  Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
Run Flat mode.
the need for earlier tire replacement.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section
 Distance driven.
for more information.
 Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
Tire Spinning or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds Tire Tread recommended.
continuously without stopping.
1 — Worn Tire
WARNING!
WARNING! 2 — New Tire
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
generated by excessive wheel speeds may These indicators are molded into the bottom of the Failure to follow this warning can result in
8
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). have a collision resulting in serious injury or
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) When the tread is worn to the tread wear death.
for more than 30 seconds continuously when indicators, the tire should be replaced.
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
NOTE:
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as

little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires WARNING! CAUTION!
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.  Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or Replacing original tires with tires of a different
Replacement Tires speed rating other than that specified for your size may result in false speedometer and
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved odometer readings.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of tires and wheels may change suspension
many characteristics. They should be inspected dimensions and performance characteristics,
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation resulting in changes to steering, handling, and TIRE TYPES
pressures. The manufacturer strongly braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the All Season Tires — If Equipped
dictable handling and stress to steering and
originals in size, quality and performance when suspension components. You could lose All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
replacement is needed Ú page 385. Refer to the control and have a collision resulting in (Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
Tire and Loading Information placard or the serious injury or death. Use only the tire and levels may vary between different all season tires.
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation wheel sizes with load ratings approved for All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your vehicle. M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
your tire will be found on the original equipment season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
tire sidewall.  Never use a tire with a smaller load index or may adversely affect the safety and handling of
capacity, other than what was originally your vehicle.
For more information relating to the Load Index
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 376.
smaller load index could result in tire over- Summer Or Three Season Tires —
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or loading and failure. You could lose control and If Equipped
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can have a collision. Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s  Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
specifications match those of the original wheels. Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
dealer or original equipment dealer with any Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
questions you may have on tire specifications or temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement are covered with ice or snow. For more
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and information, contact an authorized dealer.
ride of your vehicle.
Summer tires do not contain the all season Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the what was originally equipped with your vehicle and And Wheel — If Equipped
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; should not be operated at sustained speeds over
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
handling of your vehicle. (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an wheel equivalent in look and function to the
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe original equipment tire and wheel found on the
WARNING! operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
pressures. may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in While studded tires improve performance on ice, tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces pattern.
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
vehicle control. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
laws should be checked before using these tire The compact spare is for temporary emergency
types. use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
Snow Tires equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
Some areas of the country require the use of snow SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified Information Placard located on the driver’s side
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire CAUTION! door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
sidewall. Because of the reduced ground clearance, do Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
If you need snow tires, select tires not take your vehicle through an automatic car letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
equivalent in size and type to the original wash with a compact or limited use temporary Example: T145/80D18 103M. 8
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
sets of four; failure to do so may result. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
adversely affect the safety and handling of your equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
vehicle. and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use opportunity.
Ú page 178.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Since this tire has limited tread life, the original Full Size Spare — If Equipped
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
since the wheel is designed specifically for the and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one opportunity.
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
given time. properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the When the tread is worn to the tread wear
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
WARNING! lowering the vehicle. needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
emergency use only. With these spares, do not conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary since the wheel is designed specifically for the at the first opportunity.
use spares have limited tread life. When the tread collapsible spare tire. Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be WARNING! The limited use spare tire is for temporary
sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
failure and loss of vehicle control. emergency use only. With these spares, do not contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
use spares have limited tread life. When the tread front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped is worn to the tread wear indicators, the Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading failure and loss of vehicle control. at the first opportunity.
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s NOTE:

WARNING! protective coating that helps keep them from If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. corroding and tarnishing. extended period after cleaning the wheels with
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more CAUTION! brakes to remove the water droplets from the
than the speed listed on the limited use spare Avoid products or automatic car washes that use brake components. This activity will remove the
wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pres- acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
sures listed on your Tire and Loading Information harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel vibration when braking.
Placard located on the driver’s side B-pillar or the cleaners and automatic car washes may Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or damage the wheel's protective finish. Such Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
repair) the original equipment tire at the first damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® CAUTION!
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
WHEEL A ND W HEEL TRIM C ARE When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including or polishing compounds. They will permanently
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the damage this finish and such damage is not cov-
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis;
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for 8
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
aluminum or chrome wheels.
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
CAUTION!
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These prod-
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt ucts may damage the wheel's protective finish.
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
SNOW TRACTION D EVICES

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage:
 Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
 No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
 Please follow the table below for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
3500 SRW CAB CHASSIS Snow Traction Device (maximum projection

Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Trim Level beyond tire profile or equivalent)
4x2
Rear LT275/70R18E U Class
4x4
3500 DRW CAB CHASSIS Snow Traction Device (maximum projection

4x2 Rear
LT235/80R17E U Class
4x4 Front/Rear
4500/5500 DRW CAB CHASSIS Snow Traction Device (maximum projection

4x2
Rear 225/70R19.5G U Class
4x4
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION! CAUTION! More frequent rotation is permissible if desired.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe  Observe the traction device manufacturer’s The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
the following precautions: instructions on the method of installation, be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
operating speed, and conditions for use.
 Because of restricted traction device clear-
Always use the suggested operating speed of
ance between tires and other suspension
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
components, it is important that only traction
30 mph (48 km/h).
devices in good condition are used. Broken
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the  Do not use traction devices on a compact
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could spare tire.
indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further
use. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
 Install device as tightly as possible and then Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
retighten after driving about 0.5 mile operate at different loads and perform different Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
(0.8 km). Autosock devices do not require steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
retightening. reasons, they wear at unequal rates. NOTE:
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of On Canadian vehicles only, if your vehicle is
 Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). equipped with All-Season type tires on the front
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
 Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as and On/Off Road type tires mounted on the rear,
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will do not use a front to back rotation pattern. Instead, 8
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, rotate your tires side to side at the recommended
 Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry intervals.
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
pavement.
smooth, quiet ride.
(Continued)
Dual Rear Wheels occurs when the vehicle ignition status is

changed from Off to On and speeds of greater
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
than 5 mph (8 km/h) are obtained and remain UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
over 5 mph (8 km/h) for at about a 15 minute
period. You may need to drive for 20 minutes to The following tire grading categories
account slower speeds and stops. were established by the National
 If the tires are rotated incorrectly, the Auto local- Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
ization of the TPIS sensors will fail to locate The specific grade rating assigned by the
correctly resulting in incorrect locations for the tire's manufacturer in each category is
pressure values displayed in the Instrument shown on the sidewall of the tires on
Cluster. your vehicle.
Tire Rotation CAUTION! All passenger vehicle tires must conform
 4500/5500 Dual Rear Tires may only have
to Federal safety requirements in
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in one approved direction of rotation. This is to addition to these grades.
a set. To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge accommodate the asymmetrical design (tread TREADWEAR
across all four tires. The straight edge should touch pattern) of the On/Off road tire.
all the tires.  When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
NOTE: to be remounted on the rim or installed at a rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure different location to maintain the correct when tested under controlled conditions
Information System (TPIS): placement of the tire on the wheel relative to on a specified government test course.
 The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) the tire/wheel position on the vehicle. For For example, a tire graded 150 would
uses unique sensors in the inner rear wheels to example, if the spare is used to replace an wear one and one-half times as well on
help identify them from the outer rear wheels, outer rear tire it will have to be remounted on
the rim so that the wheel is dished inward.
the government course as a tire graded
because of this, the inner and outer wheel loca- 100. The relative performance of tires
tions can’t be switched. That way the tread design of asymmetrical
tires will maintain proper position. depends upon the actual conditions of
 After a tire rotation is completed, as shown
their use, however, and may depart
below, the system can auto learn the locations
of each sensor ID. Auto learning/localization
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service under controlled conditions on a steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
practices, and differences in road specified indoor laboratory test wheel. battery:
characteristics and climate. Sustained high temperature can cause  Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
the material of the tire to degenerate  Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
TRACTION G RADES service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
and reduce tire life, and excessive
The Traction grades, from highest to temperature can lead to sudden tire
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
failure. The grade C corresponds to a setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet level of performance, which all cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
pavement, as measured under passenger vehicle tires must meet damage when the system is started again.
controlled conditions on specified under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
government test surfaces of asphalt and Standard No. 109. Grades B and A BODYWORK
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor represent higher levels of performance
traction performance. PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law. AGENTS
WARNING!
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based WARNING! geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and make roads passable in snow and ice and those
does not include acceleration, cornering, The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in 8
or excessive loading, either separately or in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
TEMPERATURE G RADES combination, can cause heat buildup and vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
possible tire failure. which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
The Temperature grades are A (the weather and other extreme conditions will have an
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
resistance to the generation of heat and STORING THE VEHICLE protection.
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested If you are storing your vehicle for more than three The following maintenance recommendations will
weeks, we recommend that you take the following enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion? PRESERVING T HE BODYWORK Special Care

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal  If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
Washing
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
 Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your at least once a month.
The most common causes are:
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
 Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.  It is important that the drain holes in the lower
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
 Stone and gravel impact. completely with water.
kept clear and open.
 Insects, tree sap and tar.  If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
 Salt in the air near seacoast localities. paint, touch them up immediately.
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
 Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.  If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
 Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
BODY A ND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
Cleaning Headlights as possible.
scratch the paint.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights  If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
 Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
to stone breakage than glass headlights. materials are well packaged and sealed.
the paint finish.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and  If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must CAUTION! consider mud or stone shields behind each
be followed. wheel.
 Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses rials such as steel wool or scouring powder  Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap touch up paint to match the color of your
 Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi vehicle.
solution followed by rinsing.
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, of paint and decals.
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
INTERIORS  For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose

Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove WARNING!
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
residue. collision and leave you with no protection.
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery  Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
and carpeting. of protectants on Stain Repel products. checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
WARNING! Seat Belt Maintenance Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
if used in closed areas they may cause fabric. retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
respiratory harm. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from Certified Collision Care Program facility for
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. inspection.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace
the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the PLASTIC A ND C OATED PARTS
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following buckles do not work properly.
manner: Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
NOTE:
 Remove as much of the stain as possible by If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
CAUTION!
loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a
 Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp wet soft cloth until all residue is removed.  Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel- 8
towel. lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
 For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, or
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and away immediately.
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.  Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster NOTE: GLASS SURFACES

Lenses If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
The lenses in front of the instruments in this transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching recommends Mopar® Total Care leather cleaner use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
the plastic. applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution needed. electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean CAUTION! instruments that may scratch the elements.
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
LEATHER S URFACES Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended result.
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
397
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses
normal braking capability, the remaining system
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the will still function with some loss of overall braking Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
instrument panel, visible through the windshield. effectiveness. This will be evident by increased ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
pedal travel during application, greater pedal force vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
required to slow or stop, and activation of the reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
Brake Warning Light and/or the ABS Warning Light should be torqued using a properly calibrated
during brake use. torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
HYDRAULIC BRAKE ASSIST —
I F E QUIPPED TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
The brake system power assist is provided by a Lug Nut/
Lug Nut/ **Lug
hydro-boost unit which shares fluid with the power Lug Nut/ Bolt
Bolt Nut/Bolt
steering system. You may experience some Bolt Type Socket
Torque Size
clicking or hissing noises from the hydro-boost Size
Vehicle Identification Number
system during hard braking conditions. 130 Ft-Lb
Cone
NOTE: NOTE: (176 N·m) M14 x
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. 22 mm
Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be 129 Ft-Lb 1.50
higher than normal until the power steering fluid Flanged
(175 N·m)
BRAKE SYSTEM reaches operating temperature. 9
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example, bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
repeated brake applications with the engine off),
the brakes will still function. However, you will
experience a substantial increase in braking effort
to stop the vehicle.
398 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to

mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
NOTE:
Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The
lug nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires
are being rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts
at the interface between the lug nut/bolt and the
washer. Do not oil wheel studs.
Wheel Mounting Surface 8/10 Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Patterns

Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to 1 — 10 Bolt Pattern
the torques listed in the table. Go through the 2 — 8 Bolt Pattern
sequence a second time to verify that specific
torque has been achieved. Retighten to
It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept
specifications after 25 miles (40 km) and check
torqued to specifications at all times. Torque wheel
the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug
stud nuts to specifications at each lubrication
nuts/bolts are properly tightened.
interval.
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to
Two-Piece Lug Nut eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or elongated. This is especially important during the
loose particles. first few hundred miles/kilometers of operation to
allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All
wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the
wheel. The wheel nuts should then be tightened to
recommended torque. Tighten the wheel nuts to
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 399
final torque in increments. Progress around the 6.4L E NGINE Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
bolt circle, tightening the wheel nut opposite to the contains a higher level of detergents to
wheel nut just previously tightened until final Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater further aide in minimizing engine and
torque is achieved. than 15% in this engine. fuel system deposits. When available,
This engine is designed to meet all the usage of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
WARNING! emissions regulations and provide recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list
satisfactory fuel economy and of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until performance when using high quality Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow unleaded gasoline having a posted octane number should be avoided. Many of these materials
this warning may result in personal injury. of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
REFORMULATED G ASOLINE harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS— GASOLINE ENGINE Many areas of the country require the use of
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as
While operating on gasoline with the required
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended oxygenates such as ethanol.
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
quality. CAUTION!
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of
gasoline with a lower than recommended octane The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
number can cause engine failure and may void or Properly blended reformulated gasoline will or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited provide improved performance and durability of (E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
Warranty. engine and fuel system components. and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL system components, cause emissions to exceed 9
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you the applicable standard, and/or cause the
experience these symptoms, try another brand of Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, observe pump labels as they should clearly
corrosion and stability additives are communicate if a fuel contains greater than
recommended. Using gasolines that have these 15% ethanol (E-15).
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Problems that result from using gasoline emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or that result from running CNG or LP are not the CAUTION!
gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or  The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty. engine performance and damage the emis-
Warranty. sions control system.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
DO N OT U SE E-85 IN N ON-FLEX F UEL MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N  An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
VEHICLES malfunctions can cause the catalytic
GASOLINE converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use that is blended into some gasoline to increase may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no require immediate service. Contact an autho-
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. performance advantage beyond gasoline of the rized dealer for service assistance.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with same octane number without MMT. Gasoline  The use of fuel additives, which are now being
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
symptoms: reduces emissions system performance in some mended. Most of these products contain high
 Operate in a lean mode. vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The damage or vehicle performance problems
 OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
 Poor engine performance. the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
 Poor cold start and cold drivability. gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains turer and may void or not be covered under
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
 Increased risk for fuel system component corro-
reformulated gasoline.
sion.
CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM FUEL S YSTEM CAUTIONS NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
MODIFICATIONS CAUTION! system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Follow these guidelines to maintain your
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane vehicle’s performance:
(LP) may result in damage to the engine,
(Continued)
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To
prevent fuel system trouble, drain the
NOTE:
 If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gasoline
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable accumulated water from the fuel/water separator on your diesel vehicle, Do not start the vehicle.
supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that using the fuel/water separator drain provided on If you restart your vehicle you risk damaging the
you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur both fuel filters. If you buy good quality fuel and engine and fuel system. Please call an autho-
Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and follow the cold weather advice above, fuel rized dealer for service.
prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel conditioners should not be required in your vehicle.
(500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the  A maximum blend of 20% biodiesel meeting
If available in your area, a high cetane “premium”
emissions control system. diesel fuel may offer improved cold-starting and ASTM specification D-7467 may be used with
warm-up performance. your Cummins® diesel engine. (Models config-
For most year-round service, Number 2 diesel fuel ured with B20 Capability.)
meeting ASTM (formerly known as the American
Society for Testing and Materials) specification CAUTION!  In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance. If tives are not necessary for the proper operation
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F of your Cummins® diesel engine. However, if
DO NOT START engine before you drain the water
or -7°C), or is required to operate at seasonably adjusted fuel is not available and
from the fuel filter(s) to avoid engine damage
colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged you are operating below 20°F (-6°C), Mopar®
Ú page 347.
periods, use climatized Number 2 diesel fuel or Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent)
dilute the Number 2 diesel fuel with 50% Number may be beneficial to avoid fuel gelling.
1 diesel fuel. This will provide better protection FUEL S PECIFICATIONS  Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should
from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters. only be used where extended arctic conditions
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine has been
(0°F or -18°C) exist.
developed to take advantage of the high energy
WARNING!
content and generally lower cost Number 2 Ultra BIODIESEL FUEL R EQUIREMENTS
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending Low Sulfur diesel fuel or Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur
agent. They can be unstable under certain climatized diesel fuels. Experience has shown that Chassis Cab Models Ordered With 9
conditions and hazardous or explosive when it also operates on Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur B20 Option
mixed with diesel fuel. diesel fuels or other fuels within specification.
Your vehicle has been validated and approved for
the use of biodiesel in blends up to 20% (B20)
provided that you comply with the requirements
outlined below. It is important that you understand
and comply with these requirements. Failure to
comply with Oil Change requirements for vehicles Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
operating on biodiesel blends up to B20 will result Within Six Months Of Manufacture Required Oil Change Interval
in premature engine wear. Such wear is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been observed
can result in long term storage problems. Fuel with the use of biodiesel fuel. Fuel in oil must not
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable produced to approved ASTM standards, if stored exceed 5%. To ensure this limit is met your oil
resources typically derived from animal fat, properly, provides for protection against fuel change interval must be maintained to the
rapeseed oil (Rapeseed Methyl Ester (RME) base), oxidation for up to six months. following schedule:
or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester (SME or SOME)
base). Biodiesel fuel has inherent limitations which Fuel Water Separation — Must Use  Ram 3500/4500/5500 Chassis Cab —
require that you understand and adhere to the Mopar®/Cummins® Approved Fuel Filter 12,500 Miles (20,000 km)*
following requirements if you use blends of Elements (*unless otherwise notified with a oil service
biodiesel greater then 5% but not greater than message)
You must use Mopar®/Cummins® approved fuel
20% (B6-B20). There are no unique restrictions for
filter elements in both your engine mounted filter CAUTION!
the use of B5. Use of blends greater than 20% is
and frame mounted filter.
not approved. Use of blends greater than 20% can  Under no circumstances should oil change
result in engine damage. Such damage is not Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and
water accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar®/ intervals exceed 12,500 miles (20,000 km) if
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. operation occurs with greater than 5%
Cummins® filtration system is designed to provide
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM adequate fuel water separation capabilities. biodiesel blends. Oil change intervals should
Standards not exceed six months in either case. Failure to
Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient comply with these Oil Change requirements for
The quality of biodiesel fuel may vary widely. Only
Temperatures vehicles operating on biodiesel blends up to
fuel produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the B20 may result in premature engine wear.
following specifications may be blended to meet Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient
temperatures, which may pose problems for both Such wear is not covered by the New Vehicle
biodiesel blend (B6–B20) fuel meeting ASTM Limited Warranty.
specification D-7467: storage and operation. Precautions can be
necessary at low ambient temperatures, such as  B20 Biodiesel capable: The engine may suffer
 Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification
storing the fuel in a heated building or a heated severe damage if operated with concentra-
D-975 and biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting ASTM
storage tank, or using cold temperature additives. tions of Biodiesel higher than 20%.
specification D-6751.
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Standard Rear Tank 52 Gallons 197 Liters
Optional Midship Tank 22 Gallons 83 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
6.4L Engine 16.6 Quarts 15.7 Liters
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE

US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Standard Rear Tank 52 Gallons 197 Liters
Optional Midship Tank 22 Gallons 83 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank (Approximate) 8.7 Gallons 33 Liters 9
Engine Oil With Filter
6.7L Turbo Diesel Engine 12 Quarts 11.4 Liters
Cooling System
6.7L Engine Chassis Cab 3500/4500 with AS69RC 22.3 Quarts 21.1 Liters
6.7L Engine Chassis Cab 5500 with AS69RC 22.8 Quarts 21.6 Liters
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10–Year/150,000 Mile
Engine Coolant
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic Engine
Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
Engine Oil
MS-A0921. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine oil can be used but
must have the API Donut trademark Ú page 342.
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
Engine Oil Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE

We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Engine Coolant
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
In ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), we recommend using 10W-30
engine oil such as Mopar®, Shell Rotella and Shell Rimula that meets the
manufacturer Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CK-4 engine oil
category is required. Products meeting Cummins® CES 20081 may also be
used. The identification of these engine oils is typically located on the back of
Engine Oil
the oil container.
In ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), we recommend using 5W-40
synthetic engine oil such as Mopar®, Shell Rotella and Shell Rimula that
meets the manufacturer Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CK-4
engine oil category is required.
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
Engine Oil Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
We recommend using Mopar® Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating (engine
mounted filter). Must meet 5 micron rating (chassis mounted filter). Using a
Fuel Filters
fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturer’s filtration and water
separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
Crankcase Ventilation Filter We recommend using Mopar® CCV Filter. 9

Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal
law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway
Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur
Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the
emissions control system.
For most year-round service, Number 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification
D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance.
Fuel Selection
If climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is not available, and you are
operating below (20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar® Premium
Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling.
This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel
meeting ASTM specification D-975. Pickup models, and Chassis Cab models
configured with optional B20 capability, are additionally compatible with 20%
biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-7467.
Mopar® Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has been
API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO
Diesel Exhaust Fluid 22241 may result in system damage. You can receive assistance in locating
DEF in the United States by calling 866-RAM-INFO (866-726-4636). In Canada
call 1–800–465–2001 (English) or 1–800–387–9983 (French).
CAUTION!
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
Automatic Transmission – 8-Speed equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Use only Mopar® ASRC Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to
Automatic Transmission – 6-Speed use the proper fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
We recommend using Mopar® Transfer Case Lubricant for Borg Warner 44-44
Transfer Case
and 44-45.
We recommend using SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid
Limited slip additive is required for limited slip axles. If the axle fluid is not 9
pre-mixed with limited slip additive we recommend using Mopar®
MS-10111 Limited Slip Additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
We recommend using Mopar® Power Steering Fluid +4, Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic
Power Steering Reservoir
Transmission Fluid.
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE

Only use Mopar® ASRC Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to
Automatic Transmission use the proper fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® BW44–44 Transfer Case Fluid.
We recommend using SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant.
Limited slip additive is required for limited slip axles. If the axle fluid is not
Front and Rear Axle Fluid
pre-mixed with limited slip additive we recommend using Mopar®
MS-10111 Limited Slip Additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
409
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
FOR YOUR VEHICLE FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally  Owner's name and address
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
 Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT happy with our products and services.
office)
All work to be performed may not be covered by the Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the  Authorized dealer name
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you  Vehicle delivery date and mileage
clue to the current problem. get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC’s
authorized dealers have the facilities, FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
PREPARE A L IST factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed P.O. Box 21–8004
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the correctly and in a timely manner. Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your This is why you should always talk to an authorized Phone: (866) 726-4636
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
FCA C ANADA INC. C USTOMER CENTER
BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They P.O. Box 1621
want to know if you need assistance. If an
If you list a number of items and you must have Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
situation with the service advisor and list the items (800) 387-9983 French
Assistance center.
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you 10
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
410 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MEXICO Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that We appreciate that you have made a major
require assistance can use the special needs relay investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY authorized dealer has also made a major
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, investment in facilities, tools, and training to
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
Mexico, D.F.
Service operator. ownership experience.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568 SERVICE CONTRACT WARNING!
You may have purchased a service contract for a
PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
FCA Caribbean LLC unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
P.O. Box 191857 Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle known to the State of California to cause cancer
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
San Juan 00919-1857 protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
Phone: (866) 726-4636 by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection certain products of component wear contain, or
Fax: (787) 782-3345 beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a emit, chemicals known to the State of California
Mopar® Vehicle Protection plan, you will receive to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in reproductive harm.
HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about the service
(TDD/TTY) contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract WARRANTY INFORMATION
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommu- (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
nication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its (800) 387-9983 French).
this vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/
customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service om for further information.
customer, who has access to a TDD or a contract you may have purchased from another
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United See the Warranty Information for the terms and
manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
dialing 1-800-380-2479. applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
please refer to the contract documents, and
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further information.
contact the person listed in those documents.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 411
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
further information. may open an investigation, and if it finds Investigations and Recalls at
Use this QR code to access your that a safety defect exists in a group of 1-800-333-0510 or go to
digital experience. vehicles, it may order a recall and wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA PCDB-BDPP.
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
dealer or FCA US LLC. To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
MOPAR® PARTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at Service Manuals
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your 1-800-424-9153); or go to http:// complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
www.safercar.gov; or write to: system, and/or components and is written in
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
straightforward language with illustrations,
its original condition. Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
diagrams, and charts.
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
information about motor vehicle safety Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES AND diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
from http://www.safercar.gov.
WASHINGTON, D.C. manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
I N C ANADA computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
If you believe that your vehicle has a They show exactly how to find and correct
defect that could cause a crash or cause If you believe that your vehicle has a problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
injury or death, you should immediately safety defect, you should contact the drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
inform the National Highway Traffic Customer Service Department a complete list of all tools and equipment. 10
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in immediately. Canadian customers who To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
addition to notifying FCA US LLC. wish to report a safety defect to the Procedure manuals, visit:
Canadian government should contact www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
412 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Owner's Manuals 1. This device may not cause harmful La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with interference, and siguientes dos condiciones:
the assistance of service and engineering 2. This device must accept any interference 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA received, including interference that may cause interferencia perjudicial y
vehicles. cause undesired operation. 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
To access your Owner's Information online, visit cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
www.mopar.com/om (US) or pueda causar su operación no deseada.
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de NOTE:
Or licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux Changes or modifications not expressly approved
Call Tech Authority toll free at: conditions suivantes: by the party responsible for compliance could void
 1-800-890-4038 (US) 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
et
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
Archway at: brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
le fonctionnement.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
413
INDEX
A Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Automatic Headlights .......................................48
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Filter) ................................................... 342, 361 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............60
Control) ................................................ 141, 143 Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 344 Automatic Transmission....................... 122, 360
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............355 Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 344 Adding Fluid .............................................. 360
Adding Fuel ....................................................169 Air Conditioner System ................................. 344 Fluid And Filter Change............................. 360
Additives, Fuel ...............................................399 Air Conditioning................................................58 Fluid Change............................................. 360
Adjust Air Conditioning Filter .......................................61 Fluid Level Check............................. 358, 359
Down ........................................................... 32 Air Conditioning System ...................................60 Fluid Type ........................................ 360, 407
Forward ....................................................... 32 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................60 Shifting ..................................................... 126
Rearward..................................................... 32 Air Filter ........................................................ 342 Special Additives ...................................... 358
Up................................................................ 32 Air Pressure Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode... 125
Adjustable Pedals ............................................ 37 Tires ......................................................... 383 AutoPark ....................................................... 105
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................231 Alarm AUX Camera ......................................... 165, 168
Air Bag Security Alarm ...................................... 23, 96 Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 266
Air Bag Operation ......................................286 Alterations/Modifications Axle Fluid.....................................360, 361, 407
Air Bag Warning Light ................................284 Vehicle.........................................................10 Axle Lubrication ................................... 360, 361
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 290, 327 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................... 355
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................327 Capacities................................................. 403 B
If Deployment Occurs ................................289 Disposal ................................................... 356 Back-Up......................................................... 159
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................286 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 259 Back-Up Camera ........................................... 159
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............291 Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 100 Battery ................................................... 96, 340
Maintenance .............................................291 Assist, Hill Start............................................. 264 Blanket ..................................................... 114
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............285 Audio Settings ............................................... 219 Charging System Light .................................96
Transporting Pets ......................................307 Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 190 Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................16
Air Bag Light ..................................95, 284, 307 Auto Down Power Windows .............................71 Battery Saver Feature ......................................51 11
Automatic Door Locks ......................................26 Belts, Seat .................................................... 307
414
Bluetooth Car Washes................................................... 394 Cold Weather Operation ................................ 108

Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Carbon Monoxide Warning................... 309, 310 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 387
Or Audio Device After Pairing ................227 Cargo Light.......................................................50 Connected Services ...................................... 233
Body Builders Guide ........................................ 10 CD ................................................................. 221 Connected Services FAQ ............................... 247
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................351 Cellular Phone .............................................. 252 Connected Services Features ....................... 236
B-Pillar Location.............................................380 Center High Mounted Stop Light ................... 375 Connected Services, Getting Started ............ 235
Brake Assist System ......................................260 Center Seat Storage Compartment ..................62 Connected Services, Introduction ................. 233
Brake Control System ....................................260 Changing A Flat Tire ...................................... 315 Contract, Service ........................................... 410
Brake Fluid .......................................... 358, 407 Charge Air Cooler .......................................... 357 Controls ........................................................ 214
Brake System ...................................... 358, 397 Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 377 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 356
Fluid Check ...............................................358 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Cooling System ............................................. 354
Master Cylinder .........................................358 Light)............................................................. 104 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 355
Parking ......................................................119 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 307 Coolant Level ................................... 355, 357
Warning Light .............................................. 95 Checks, Safety .............................................. 307 Cooling Capacity ....................................... 403
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................122 Child Restraint .............................................. 291 Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 356
Bulb Replacement .........................................371 Child Restraints Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 355
Bulbs, Light.......................................... 309, 371 Booster Seats ........................................... 294 Inspection ................................................. 357
Child Seat Installation ..................... 300, 302 Points To Remember ................................ 357
C How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 299 Pressure Cap ............................................ 356
Cab Top Clearance Lights ..............................375 Infant And Child Restraints....................... 293 Radiator Cap............................................. 356
Camera ..........................................................159 Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 298 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 355, 404
Camera, AUX ........................................ 165, 168 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 295 Corrosion Protection ..................................... 393
Camera, Rear ...................................... 159, 161 Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 293 Cruise Control (Speed Control) ............. 141, 143
Camera, Trailer 360 ......................................165 Seating Positions ...................................... 295 Cruise Light ................................................... 102
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .........403 Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 399 Customer Assistance .................................... 409
Capacities, Fluid ............................................403 Cleaning Cybersecurity ................................................ 190
Caps, Filler Wheels ..................................................... 389
Oil (Engine) ................................................338 Climate Control ................................................54
Power Steering ..........................................140 Automatic ....................................................54
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................356 Manual ........................................................58
415
D Driving Fails To Start............................................. 107

Daytime Running Lights ................................... 48 Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Flooded, Starting ...................................... 107
Dealer Service ...............................................341 Standing Water .................................... 189 Fuel Requirements ................................... 399
Defroster, Rear Window................................... 58 Dual Rear Wheels .......................318, 392, 397 Identification............................................. 339
Defroster, Windshield .............................58, 307 Idling ......................................................... 115
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .............................. 53 E Jump Starting ........................................... 319
Deleting A Phone ...........................................227 Electric Brake Control System....................... 260 Oil .................................................... 341, 404
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................103 Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 259 Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 338
Diesel Exhaust Brake ....................................120 Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 260, 265 Oil Filter .................................................... 342
Diesel Fuel .....................................................401 Electrical Power Outlets ...................................68 Oil Reset ......................................................82
Diesel Fuel Requirements .............................401 Electronic Range Select (ERS) ............. 125, 130 Oil Selection.............................................. 341
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .....................350 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 261 Oil Synthetic.............................................. 342
Differential, Limited Slip ................................139 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light.........96 Overheating .............................................. 322
Dipsticks Electronically Shifted Transfer Case .... 132, 135 Runaway ................................................... 168
Power Steering ..........................................140 Emergency Braking ....................................... 119 Starting ..................................................... 107
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................325 Emergency, In Case Of Enhanced Accident Response
Disc Drive ......................................................221 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ..................... 324 Feature ................................................ 290, 327
Disconnecting ................................................227 Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 311 Entry System, Illuminated ................................52
Disposal Jacking ..................................................... 315 Ethanol.......................................................... 399
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................356 Jump Starting ........................................... 319 Exhaust Brake ............................................... 120
Disturb ...........................................................230 Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 104 Exhaust Gas Cautions .......................... 309, 310
Door Ajar.......................................................... 97 Engine.................................................. 338, 339 Exhaust System ..........................309, 353, 361
Door Ajar Light ................................................. 97 Air Cleaner ................................................ 342 Exterior Lighting ...............................................47
Door Locks Block Heater ............................................. 110 Exterior Lights ........................................ 47, 309
Automatic .................................................... 26 Break-In Recommendations ............ 118, 119
Doors ............................................................... 24 Compartment ........................................... 339
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter ............347 Compartment Identification...................... 338
Driver Memory Presets ..................................219 Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 404 11
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 31 Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 309, 310
416
F Ethanol ..................................................... 399 H

Family Alerts ..................................................246 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................................. 169 Hazard
Filters Filter ................................................ 347, 404 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Air Cleaner.................................................342 Gasoline ................................................... 399 Shallow Standing Water ....................... 189
Air Conditioning ..................................61, 345 Light ............................................................99 Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 311
Engine Fuel ..................................... 347, 404 Materials Added ....................................... 399 Head Restraints ...............................................35
Engine Oil ........................................ 342, 404 Methanol .................................................. 399 Head Rests ......................................................35
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................342 Octane Rating........................................... 399 Headlights ..................................................... 373
Flashers Requirements .................................. 399, 401 Automatic High Beam ..................................48
Turn Signals ..............................50, 102, 309 Specifications ........................................... 401 Cleaning.................................................... 394
Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 48 Tank Capacity ........................................... 403 High Beam ...................................................48
Flat Tire Stowage ...........................................318 Fuses ............................................................ 364 Lights On Reminder .....................................49
Fluid Capacities .............................................403 Passing ........................................................48
Fluid Leaks ....................................................309 G Switch ..........................................................47
Fluid Level Checks Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ..................43 Heated Mirrors .................................................42
Brake ........................................................358 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .............................. 169 Heated Seats ...................................................34
Power Steering ..........................................140 Gasoline, Clean Air........................................ 399 Hill Descent Control ...................................... 263
Fog Lights ...............................................50, 374 Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 399 Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 263
Fold Flat Load Floor ......................................... 65 Gauges Hill Start Assist .............................................. 264
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 31 Voltage ..................................................... 113 Hitches
Forward Collision Warning .............................266 Gear Ranges ................................................. 127 Trailer Towing ........................................... 176
Four Wheel Drive ...........................................132 Gear Selector Override ................................. 322 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) ..................43
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...............................311 Glass Cleaning .............................................. 396 Hood Prop ........................................................73
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................324 Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 174 Hood Release...................................................73
Front Axle (Differential) ..................................360 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 173 Hub Caps ...................................................... 318
Fuel ............................................ 169, 399, 401 Guide
Adding .......................................................169 Body Builders ..............................................10
Additives ...................................................399 GVWR............................................................ 172
Clean Air ....................................................399
Diesel .............................................. 169, 401
417
I Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Courtesy/Reading ........................................51

Idle-Up Feature ..............................................115 Entry) ...............................................................17 Cruise ....................................................... 102
Ignition ............................................................ 18 Keyless Enter 'n Go™ .................... 25, 107, 109 Daytime Running .........................................48
Switch ......................................................... 18 Passive Entry ...............................................25 Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Illuminated Entry ............................................. 52 Keys .................................................................15 Indicator ..................................................96
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................38, 312 Exterior .............................................. 47, 309
Instrument Cluster ...................... 78, 79, 80, 81 L Fog............................................................ 374
Descriptions ..............................................102 Lane Change And Turn Signals ........................50 Four Wheel Drive Indicator ....................... 139
Display ........................................................ 81 Lane Change Assist .........................................50 Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 311
Engine Oil Reset .......................................... 82 LaneSense .................................................... 156 Headlights ............................................47, 48
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ....................396 Latches ......................................................... 309 High Beam ...................................................48
Integrated Trailer Brake Control ....................179 Hood ............................................................73 Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 263
Interior Appearance Care...............................395 Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 399 Illuminated Entry .........................................52
Interior Lights .................................................. 51 Leaks, Fluid .................................................. 309 Interior .........................................................51
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) .................. 53 Life Of Tires................................................... 385 Lights On Reminder .....................................49
Intervention Regeneration Strategy ........90, 350 Light Bulbs ........................................... 309, 371 Low Fuel ......................................................99
Inverter Outlet (115V) ...................................... 69 LIghts Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........97
Electrinic Power Steering Pump ..................97 Park .......................................................... 102
J Oil Temperature...........................................96 Passing ........................................................48
Jack Location .................................................315 Lights ............................................................ 309 Seat Belt Reminder .....................................94
Jack Operation ...............................................315 Air Bag ...................................... 95, 284, 307 Security Alarm .............................................96
Jacking And Tire Changing .............................315 Automatic High Beam ..................................48 Service ...................................................... 371
Jump Starting ................................................319 Brake Assist Warning ............................... 263 Traction Control ........................................ 263
Brake Warning .............................................95 Transfer Case ........................................... 139
K Bulb Replacement .................................... 371 Turn Signals .....................50, 102, 309, 373
Key Fob Cab Top Clearance ................................... 375 Warning Instrument Cluster
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 17 Cargo ...........................................................50 Descriptions .................................. 96, 102
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Center Mounted Stop ............................... 375 Limited-Slip Differential ....................... 139, 361 11
Entry) ............................................................... 16
418
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ....................... 93 Memory .......................................................29 Capacity .................................................... 403
Load Shed Battery Saver On ............................ 93 Outside ........................................................40 Dipstick..................................................... 340
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction .............. 93 Rearview.............................................38, 312 Disposal .................................................... 342
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor .............. 93 Trailer Towing ..............................................42 Filter ................................................ 342, 404
Loading Vehicle .............................................172 Mirrors, Digital .................................................39 Filter Disposal ........................................... 342
Tires ..........................................................380 Mobile App .................................................... 235 Identification Logo .................................... 342
Locks Modifications/Alterations Materials Added To................................... 342
Automatic Door ........................................... 26 Vehicle.........................................................10 Pressure Warning Light................................96
Child Protection ........................................... 27 Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 268 Recommendation ..................................... 341
Power Door.................................................. 24 Mopar Parts .................................................. 411 Synthetic ................................................... 342
Low Tire Pressure System .............................268 MP3 Control .....................................................66 Onboard Diagnostic System .......................... 103
Lubrication, Body ...........................................351 Multi-Function Control Lever ............................47 Operating Precautions .................................. 103
Lug Nuts/Bolts .................................... 318, 397 Operator Manual
N Owner's Manual ........................................ 411
M Navigation System (Uconnect GPS) .............. 159 Outside Rearview Mirrors .................................40
Maintenance Free Battery .............................340 New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 118, 119 Overdrive ....................................................... 130
Maintenance Plan .........................................334 Noise Control Overdrive OFF Switch .................................... 130
Maintenance Schedule............... 328, 332, 334 Maintenance ............................................ 361 Overheating, Engine ...................................... 322
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ..... 97 Tampering Prohibited ............................... 362
Manual Noise Emission Warranty ..................... 361, 362 P
Park Release .............................................323 Paint Care ..................................................... 393
Service ......................................................411 O Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Media Hub ....................................................... 66 Occupant Restraints ..................................... 275 Phone S .................................................... 225
Media Mode ..................................................221 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..................... 399 Parking Brake ............................................... 119
Memory Seat ................................................... 29 Oil Change Indicator ..................................... 332 ParkSense System, Rear ............................... 151
Memory Settings ............................................. 29 Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 342 Passive Entry....................................................25
Methanol .......................................................399 Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 342 Pedals, Adjustable ...........................................37
Mirrors ............................................................. 38 Oil Pressure Light .............................................96 Pets ............................................................... 307
Electric Powered ......................................... 40 Oil Reset ..........................................................82 Phone Mode .................................................. 223
Heated ........................................................ 42 Oil, Engine ............................................ 341, 404 Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 380
419
Power R Remote Keyless Entry ......................................15

Distribution Center (Fuses) .......................364 Radial Ply Tires ............................................. 384 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............17
Door Locks .................................................. 24 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .. 355, 356 Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 213
Mirrors......................................................... 40 Radio Remote Start (Diesel) .......................................22
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ......... 68, 69 Presets ..................................................... 219 Remote Start (Gasoline)...................................20
Seats ........................................................... 32 Settings .................................................... 191 Remote Starting
Sliding Rear Window ................................... 72 Radio Controls .............................................. 214 Exit Remote Start Mode ...............................21
Steering..............................................40, 140 Radio Mode .................................................. 214 Replacement Bulbs ....................................... 371
Take-Off Adapter .......................................140 Radio Operation ................................... 214, 252 Replacement Tires ........................................ 386
Take-Off Operation ....................................140 Radio Remote Controls ................................. 213 Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 411
Windows ...................................................... 71 Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................54 Resetting Perform Service Indicator ............. 333
Power Seats Rear Axle (Differential) ......................... 360, 361 Restraints, Child............................................ 291
Down ........................................................... 32 Rear Camera................................................. 161 Restraints, Head ..............................................35
Forward ....................................................... 32 Rear ParkSense System ............................... 151 Roadside Assistance ............................ 241, 248
Rearward..................................................... 32 Rear Window, Sliding .......................................72 Rotation, Tires ............................................... 391
Recline ........................................................ 32 Recreational Towing ..................................... 185
Tilt ............................................................... 32 Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 186 S
Up................................................................ 32 Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Safety ............................................................ 213
Power Steering Fluid ......................................407 Neutral (N) ........................................... 187 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 307
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...................282 Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 399 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...................... 309
Preparation For Jacking .................................315 Refrigerant .................................................... 344 Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 411
Presets ..........................................................219 Registering SiriusXM Guardian ..................... 234 Safety Features ............................................. 213
Profile Settings ..............................................192 Release, Hood .................................................73 Safety Information, Tire................................. 376
Programmable Features ................................191 Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 276 Safety Tips .................................................... 307
PTO (Power Take-Off) .....................................140 Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock ... 240, 248 Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 309
Remote Features, Horn And Lights ............... 241 Satellite Radio............................................... 215
Remote Features, Starting ................... 241, 249 Saved Radio Stations .................................... 219
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 328 11
420
Seat Belt Security Alarm...........................................23, 96 Snow Tires .................................................... 387

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ............283 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 404 SOS Call ............................................... 236, 248
Seat Belt Reminder ......................................... 94 Send & Go ........................................... 242, 248 Spare Tires ........................................... 387, 388
Seat Belts ............................................ 276, 307 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................18 Speed Control
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...........................280 Service Assistance ........................................ 409 Accel/Decel .............................................. 142
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ......280 Service Contract ........................................... 410 Cancel....................................................... 142
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Service Manuals ........................................... 411 Resume .................................................... 142
Anchorage .............................................280 Settings, Audio .............................................. 219 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............. 141, 143
Child Restraints .........................................291 Shift Lever Override ...................................... 322 Starting .......................................105, 107, 108
Extender ....................................................282 Shifting ......................................................... 121 Automatic Transmission .................. 105, 109
Front Seat ....................................... 276, 279 Automatic Transmission .................. 122, 126 Button..........................................................18
Inspection .................................................307 Transfer Case ........................................... 139 Cold Weather ............................................ 108
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ....................279 Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Engine Block Heater ................................. 110
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...................279 Case Neutral (N)................................... 186 Engine Fails To Start ................................. 107
Operating Instructions ...............................279 Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Starting And Operating .................................. 107
Pregnant Women ......................................282 Case Neutral (N)................................... 187 Starting Procedures ............................. 107, 108
Reminder ..................................................276 Signals, Turn ................................. 50, 102, 309 Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) ............ 108
Seat Belt Extender ....................................282 Sirius Satellite Radio..................................... 215 Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) ............... 105
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................276 Favorites................................................... 218 Steering
Untwisting Procedure ................................279 Replay ...................................................... 217 Power........................................................ 140
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................395 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Tilt Column...................................................27
Seats ........................................................ 31, 32 Browse in SXM ......................................... 218 Wheel, Heated ......................................27, 28
Adjustment ........................................... 31, 32 Favorites................................................... 218 Wheel, Tilt ....................................................27
Easy Entry ................................................... 33 Replay ...................................................... 217 Steering Wheel Audio Controls...................... 213
Folding Floor ............................................... 65 Sliding Rear Window, Power ............................72 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ....... 213
Head Restraints .......................................... 35 Smart Watch ................................................. 247 Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................... 244, 249
Memory ....................................................... 29 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 390 Storage ............................................................61
Power .......................................................... 32 Snow Plow .................................................... 183 Storage Compartment, Center Seat .................62
Rear Folding ................................................ 31
Tilting .......................................................... 31
421
Storage, Vehicle......................................60, 393 Load Capacity ........................................... 380 Mirrors .........................................................42

Store Radio Presets .......................................219 Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..99, 268 Tips ........................................................... 182
Storing Your Vehicle ......................................393 Quality Grading ......................................... 392 Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 177
Sunglasses Storage ......................................... 64 Radial ....................................................... 384 Wiring ....................................................... 181
Sway Control, Trailer ......................................266 Replacement ............................................ 386 Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 176
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................................342 Rotation.................................................... 391 Trailer Weight ................................................ 176
Safety .............................................. 376, 383 Transfer Case ................................................ 361
T Sizes ......................................................... 377 Electronically Shifted ....................... 132, 135
Telescoping Steering Column .......................... 27 Snow Tires ................................................ 387 Fluid.......................................................... 407
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............ 60 Spare Tires ...................................... 387, 388 Transmission................................................. 122
Tilt Spinning ................................................... 385 Automatic ...............................122, 126, 358
Down ........................................................... 32 Trailer Towing ........................................... 178 Fluid.......................................................... 407
Up................................................................ 32 Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 385 Maintenance ............................................ 358
Tilt Steering Column ........................................ 27 Wheel Nut Torque..................................... 397 Shifting ..................................................... 121
Tip Start ............................................... 107, 109 To Open Hood ..................................................73 Transporting Pets .......................................... 307
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........380 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 177 Tread Wear Indicators ................................... 385
Tire Markings .................................................376 Torque Converter Clutch ............................... 131 Turn Signals .................................. 50, 102, 373
Tire Safety Information ..................................376 Tow Mode Mirror ..............................................39
Tires...................................309, 383, 387, 392 Towing ................................................. 173, 325 U
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................385 Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 325 Uconnect
Air Pressure ...............................................383 Guide ........................................................ 176 Phone Call Features ................................. 228
Chains .......................................................390 Recreational ............................................. 185 Things You Should Know About Your
Changing ...................................................315 Weight ...................................................... 176 Uconnect Phone ................................... 231
Compact Spare .........................................387 Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 185 Uconnect Phone ............................................ 225
Dual........................................ 318, 392, 397 Traction ......................................................... 188 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
General Information ........................ 383, 387 Traction Control ............................................ 265 Call Currently In Progress ..................... 230
High Speed ................................................384 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 266 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Inflation Pressure ......................................383 Trailer Towing ............................................... 173 No Call Currently In Progress ................ 229 11
Jacking ......................................................315 Hitches ..................................................... 176 Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 233
Life Of Tires ...............................................385 Minimum Requirements ........................... 177 Call Continuation ...................................... 231
422
Call Controls ..............................................229 Uconnect Settings ......................................... 191 W

Call Termination ........................................231 Customer Programmable Features .............25 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Cancel Command ......................................225 Passive Entry Programming .........................25 Descriptions) ....................................................98
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Uconnect System .......................................... 211 Warranty Information .................................... 410
Or Audio Device After Pairing ................227 Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 392 Washers, Windshield ............................. 53, 340
Help Command .........................................225 Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) — Washing Vehicle ............................................ 394
Join Calls ...................................................230 If Equipped S ................................................43 Water
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Unleaded Gasoline ....................................... 399 Driving Through ........................................ 189
Favorite .................................................227 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 279 Water Separator
Making A Second Call While Current Call USB ..................................................................66 Diesel Fuel ................................................ 347
Is In Progress ........................................230 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 389
Managing Your Favorites...........................228 V Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 389
Natural Speech .........................................225 Vehicle Finder ...................................... 243, 249 Wheel Covers ................................................ 318
Operation ..................................................224 Vehicle Health Alert ...................................... 245 Wi-Fi .............................................................. 243
Overview....................................................223 Vehicle Health Report ................................... 244 Wind Buffeting .................................................72
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 397 Window Fogging ...............................................61
Phone ...................................................225 Vehicle Loading ................................... 172, 380 Windows ..........................................................71
Phonebook Download ...............................227 Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 341 Power...........................................................71
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............230 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................10 Rear Sliding .................................................72
Power-Up ...................................................233 Vehicle Notifications ..................................... 245 Reset Auto-Up ..............................................72
Recent Calls ..............................................229 Vehicle Settings ............................................ 191 Windshield Defroster .................................... 307
Redial ........................................................231 Vehicle Storage .......................................60, 393 Windshield Washers .............................. 53, 340
To Remove A Favorite ...............................228 Ventilated Seats ..............................................34 Fluid................................................... 53, 340
Toggling Between Calls .............................230 Voice Command...............................................28 Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 351
Touch-Tone Number Entry .........................229 Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................28 Windshield Wipers ...........................................53
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ..231 Voltmeter ...................................................... 113 Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 351
Voice Command ........................................231 Wipers, Intermittent .........................................53
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................54
Wireless Charging Pad .....................................70
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving
itself to install them on products previously manufactured. is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
substitution therefore. while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/ This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. reference for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway transportation.
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except WARNING
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
2022 RAM CHASSIS CAB
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
U.S. CANADA
` `
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA 2022 CHASSIS CAB

©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. First Edition V1
OWNER’S MANUAL
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 22_DPF_OM_EN_USC

2022 Chassis Cab: Owner'S Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 Chassis Cab: Owner'S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 RAM CHASSIS CAB

MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA 2022 CHASSIS CAB

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................15 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 74 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................105 4

6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................ 259 6

INTRODUCTION DOORS ....................................................................24 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —

EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 47 CLIMATE CONTROLS .............................................54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR

LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............................156 TRAILER TOWING................................................ 173 MULTIMEDIA

CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS ...........................247 SAFETY IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

SYMBOL GLOSSARY Red Warning Lights

Red Warning Lights Hood Open Warning Light

Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Vehicle Security Warning Light LaneSense Warning Light

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

Cruise Control Fault Warning Light

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light

Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

4WD Low Indicator Light

Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator Light

Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off Indicator Light

Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator Light

NEUTRAL Indicator Light

Green Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected

Cruise Control Ready Indicator

LaneSense Indicator Light

Set Speed Display

LaneSense Indicator Light Blue Indicator Lights

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

DOORS WARNING! WARNING!

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

CHILD-P ROTECTION DOOR LOCK — WARNING!

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

HEATED S TEERING WHEEL — WARNING!

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

SEATS Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Power Seat Switches

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Front Heated Seats Rear Heated Seats VENTILATED S EATS — I F EQUIPPED

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35

HEAD R ESTRAINTS Front Head Restraints NOTE: